Yamaha S03 Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: S03

Categorie: Software

Type: Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

S03SL

OWNER’S MANUAL

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT

connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one

described in the manual, on the name plate, or speciﬁcally recommended by

Yamaha.

WARNING:

Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over,

or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an

extension cord is not recommended! IF you must use an extension cord, the

minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the

AWG number ,the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension

cords, consult a local electrician.

This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart,

rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please

observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory

product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time

of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of

the speciﬁcations without notice or obligation to update existing units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an ampliﬁer and headphones

or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause

permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high

volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing

loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before

damage occurs.

Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting

ﬁxtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories.

Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please

make sure that benches are stable and any optional ﬁxtures (where

applicable) are well secured BEFORE using.

Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses

are recommended.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a

function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not

covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners

responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer

before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and

environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with

both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the

following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if

applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery

is approximately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a

qualiﬁed service representative to perform the replacement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be

rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable

type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged.

When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a

different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect

installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries

away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by

the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type

batteries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its

useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and

federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead,

batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact

Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number,

serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should

record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the

spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your

purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-BP (bottom)

(3)-6

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock,

short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into

any openings.

• If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a

sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or

smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,

disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Use the speciﬁed adaptor (PA-3C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)

only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or

overheating.

• Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the outlet.

Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may

have accumulated on it.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the

instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or

radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place

heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip

over, or roll anything over it.

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-

connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause

overheating in the outlet.

• Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during

electrical storms.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all

components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the

volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the

volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold

or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal

components.

• Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televisions,

radios, or speakers, since this might cause interference which can affect proper

operation of the other products.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,

solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Also, do not

place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might

discolor the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do

not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Use only the stand speciﬁed for the instrument. When attaching the stand or

rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the

internal components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or

uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If

you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

■

REPLACING THE BACKUP BATTERY

• This instrument contains a non rechargeable internal backup battery which

permits internal data to remain stored even when the power is off. When the

backup battery needs replacing, the message “!BatteryLo” will display in the

LCD. When this happens, immediately back up your data (using an external

device such as the ﬂoppy disk-based Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3), then

have qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel replace the backup battery.

• Do not attempt to replace the backup battery yourself, in order to prevent the

possible serious hazards. Always have qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel

replace the backup battery.

• Never place the backup battery in a location that a child can reach, since a child

might accidentally swallow the battery. If this should happen, consult a

physician immediately.

■

SAVING USER DATA

• Save all data to an external device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3,

in order to help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user

operating error.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or

modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Introduction

Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha S03 Music Synthesizer. In order to get the most out of your new S03 and its

sophisticated functions, we suggest you read through this manual thoroughly. Also keep it in a safe, convenient place

so that you can regularly refer to it when necessary.

Package Contents

•PA-3C AC Adaptor *

Since the PA-3C has the same speciﬁcations as the PA-3B, the PA-3C can be used as the AC adapter for any product

requiring the PA-3B.

• Owner’s Manual

• Data List

* May not be included in your area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Main Features

•Exceptionally high-quality dynamic Voices — including many sounds from Yamaha’s top-of-the-line S80 Music

Synthesizer (page 18).

• Wide variety of pro-quality digital effects (page 53).

• Category Search function for quickly calling up Voices in a desired instrument group (page 35).

•A total of 480 Normal Voices and 20 Drum Voices, all XG-compatible — in addition to Preset Voices and User

Voices (page 25).

• Comprehensive, detailed editing features for customizing your Voices (page 70).

• Convenient TO HOST terminal for direct, easy connection to computer — with just one cable (page 13).

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is a standard speciﬁcation that deﬁnes the arrangement of voices in a tone generator and its MIDI

functionality, ensuring that data can be played back with substantially the same sounds on any GM-compatible tone

generator, regardless of its manufacturer or model. Tone generators and song data that meet the “GM System Level 1” bear

this GM logo.

“XG” is a tone generator format that expands the voice arrangement of the “GM System Level 1” speciﬁcation to meet the

ever-increasing demands of today’s computer peripheral environment, providing richer expressive power while maintaining

upward compatibility of data. “XG” greatly expands “GM System Level 1” by deﬁning the ways in which voices are expanded

or edited and the structure and type of effects.

When commercially available song data bearing the XG logo is played back on a tone generator which bears the XG logo, you

will enjoy a full musical experience that includes unlimited expansion voices and effect functions.

About This Manual

This manual is basically divided into two sections:

■

Basics Section (Page 8)

Explains how to get started with the S03, it’s overall structure, and how to use its main features and functions.

■

Reference Section (Page 55)

Explains the parameters of the S03’s various modes.

About the “Page” References in this Manual

PAGE xx ..... Refers to a display “page” in the LCD

page xx........ Refers to an actual page in this manual.

Many of the functions and parameters of the S03 are shown on various display “pages,” each of which is numbered

within each mode and indicated in the display. Searching for a function or parameter is made more convenient and

fast by the use of these page numbers.

To distinguish these display page references from actual pages in the manual, we’ve applied the following convention:

“PAGE” (all capital letters) refers to the display page. Unless indicated otherwise, the PAGE reference is for display

pages within the same mode (as described for other parameters in the same section).

Throughout the manual, parameter names are prefaced by numbers, such as “13-2 Resonance.” This, for example,

indicates that the Resonance parameter is on display PAGE 13 in the selected mode.

When one display page contains two or more related parameters, use the [

]/[

] buttons (page 30) to scroll

through the available parameters. These related parameters selected by the [

]/[

] buttons are indicated by

hyphenated numbers (e.g., 13-1, 13-2, etc.). In the example above, you can select the Resonance parameter by using

the [

]/[

] buttons to move to the second page.

For a full listing of the parameters and their corresponding display pages, refer to the Function Tree chart (page 20) or the

Parameter Table (page 22).

●

Copying of the commercially available music sequence data and/or digital audio ﬁles is strictry prohibited except

for your personal use.

●

The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may

appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.

●

The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of

their respective companies.

Table of Contents

Basics Section............................8

The Controls & Connectors ................................................ 8

Front Panel ................................................................................... 8

Rear Panel .................................................................................. 10

Before Use........................................................................... 11

Power Supply ............................................................................. 11

Connections................................................................................ 11

Powering Up .............................................................................. 15

Demo Playback................................................................... 16

Overview of the S03 ........................................................... 17

Controller ................................................................................... 17

Tone Generator .......................................................................... 17

Effects ........................................................................................18

About the Modes ................................................................ 19

Function Tree chart ........................................................... 20

Parameter Table................................................................. 22

Multis .................................................................................. 24

Voices .................................................................................. 25

Overview of Voices/Waves ....................................................... 26

Waves......................................................................................... 27

Basic Operations ................................................................ 28

Selecting a Mode........................................................................ 28

Selecting a Screen ...................................................................... 30

Entering Data .............................................................................31

Playing the S03 ................................................................... 33

Playing the Voices ..................................................................... 33

Using Multi Mode .............................................................. 37

Playing in Multi Mode ............................................................... 37

Using the S03 as a Multitimbral Tone Generator (Multi Edit)..38

Performing Live While Playing Back a Song File..................... 40

Splitting the Keyboard — Setting Upper and Lower Ranges for the Voices

.... 41

Layering Two Voices (Parts) Together...................................... 42

Using Controllers ............................................................... 44

Pitch Bend Wheel ......................................................................44

Modulation Wheel .....................................................................44

Foot Controller........................................................................... 45

Foot Switch ................................................................................ 46

Voice Edit............................................................................ 47

Effects.................................................................................. 53

Effects in Voice Mode ...............................................................53

Effects in Multi Mode................................................................53

Reference Section ....................55

Multi Mode ......................................................................... 55

Multi Edit................................................................................... 55

Common (Settings for all Parts) ........................................... 56

Part (Settings for each Part).................................................. 59

Multi Job.................................................................................... 67

Performing a Job................................................................... 67

Multi Store................................................................................. 69

Voice Mode ......................................................................... 70

Voice Edit.................................................................................. 70

Normal Voice ....................................................................... 70

Drum Voices......................................................................... 84

Voice Job ................................................................................... 87

Performing a Job................................................................... 87

Voice Store ................................................................................ 89

Utility Mode........................................................................ 90

Utility Job .................................................................................. 92

Factory Set (Restore Factory Defaults) ................................ 92

MIDI Mode......................................................................... 93

Appendix................................95

About MIDI ........................................................................ 95

Display Messages.............................................................. 100

Troubleshooting ............................................................... 101

Specifications.................................................................... 105

Index.................................................................................. 106

Basics Section Multi Mode Voice Mode Utility Mode MIDI Mode Appendix

Application Index

This convenient, easy-to-use index is divided to general categories to help you when you want to ﬁnd information on a speciﬁc topic or

function.

Listening/Playing

• Listening to Demo songs ........................................................................................................................................ Demo Playback (Page 16)

• Playing the voices............................................................................................................................................................................... (Page 33)

• Calling up Voices in a desired instrument group .............................................................................Using Voice Category Search (Page 35)

•Performing live while playing back a Song ﬁle ................................................................................................................................ (Page 40)

• Splitting the keyboard — Setting upper and lower ranges for the Voices

In Multi mode .................................................................................................................................................................................... (Page 41)

In Voice mode.................................................................................................................................................................. Note Limit (Page 73)

•Layering two voices (Parts together) ................................................................................................................................................ (Page 42)

Using controllers

• Connecting controllers ...................................................................................................................................................................... (Page 14)

• Using a Foot Controller to control parameters................................................................................................................................. (Page 45)

• Using a Footswitch to advance through Voice or Multi programs.................................................................................................. (Page 46)

• Maintaining the controller state/position when you switch between voices..................................................... Controller Reset (Page 91)

• Setting the AC1 (Assignable Controller 1) Controller ..........................................................................................Foot Controller (Page 45)

AC1 (Assignable Controller 1) (Page 66)

Copying

• Copying the Voice Variation Effect settings to the Multi mode ..................................................................Copy Variation Effect (Page 68)

• Copying the Controller settings of the Voice mode to the Multi mode...............................................................Copy Controller (Page 68)

• Copying Part parameter settings of the Multi being edited to another Part in the same Multi..................................................... (Page 68)

• Copying Element parameter settings of the Voice being edited to another Element in the same Voice....................................... (Page 88)

• Backing up your S03 data............................................................................................Saving S03 Settings to an External Device (Page 42)

Changing the sound

• Editing a Voice ................................................................................................................................................................. Voice Edit (Page 47)

• Effect structure and signal ﬂow ............................................................................................................................................Effects (Page 53)

• Details on the parameters of the modes .............................................................................................................Reference Section (Page 55)

Saving data

• Storing the edited Voice to the S03 internal (USER) memory.....................................................................................Voice Store (Page 89)

• Storing the edited Multi to the S03 internal (USER) memory ................................................................................... Multi Store (Page 69)

•Saving S03 settings (Voice/Multi/MIDI/Utility) to an external device such as a computer .......... Saving S03 Settings to an External Device (Page 42)

Connecting the S03 to other devices

• Connecting a computer............................................................................................................... Connecting a Personal computer (Page 13)

• Setting Local On/Off .................................................................................................................................................. Local On/Off (Page 93)

• Using the S03 as a multitimbral tone generator............................................................................................................................... (Page 38)

• Sending the S03 data using the Bulk Dump function ...............................................Saving S03 Settings to an External Device (Page 42)

Resetting parameters (Initializing)

• Initializing Multi parameters ............................................................................................................................................ Initialize (Page 68)

• Initializing Voice parameters............................................................................................................................................. Initialize (Page 88)

•Resetting the S03 to its default settings............................................................................Factory Set (Restore Factory Defaults) (Page 92)

Quick solutions

• Global functions of the S03.............................................................................................................................Function Tree chart (Page 20)

• S03 parameter structure and the LCD PAGES..................................................................................................... Parameter Table (Page 22)

• General information on MIDI......................................................................................................................................About MIDI (Page 95)

• Meaning of the display messages ...................................................................................................................... Display Messages (Page 100)

•Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................................................................(Page 101)

Basics Section

The Controls & Connectors

Font Panel

OCTAVE [UP] and [DOWN] buttons (Page 36)

Press either of these buttons to shift the note range

of the keyboard up or down in octaves. Press them

together to restore the normal range (0).

[VOLUME] slider (Page 15)

Adjusts the master volume output from the

OUTPUT L/R jacks and the PHONES jack. Move

the slider upwards to raise the level.

PITCH bend wheel (Page 44)

Controls the pitch bend effect.

MODULATION wheel (Page 44)

Controls the modulation effect. You can also assign

other parameters and functions to this controller.

LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)

This backlit LCD displays various operation

messages and information.

Parameter Type List (Page 30)

Follow the arrow in the LCD across to the

appropriate column in the list; the arrow indicates

the type of the currently selected parameter.

MODE buttons (Page 19)

Press these to buttons to select one of the modes:

Multi, Voice, Utility, or another mode.

[PART/ELEMENT/KEY] buttons

These buttons are used to select Parts/Elements/

Drum keys in the Multi Edit or Voice Edit Mode.

-1 [+]/[–] buttons (Page 30)

In the Multi Mode, these buttons select Parts 1 to

16. In the Multi Part Edit mode, press both of these

buttons simultaneously to call up the Common Edit

screens. To return to the Part Edit screens, press

only one of these buttons, [–] or [+].

In the Voice Edit Mode, these buttons select

Elements 1 to 4 or the Drum keys. In the Voice

Element Edit mode, press both of these buttons

simultaneously to call up the Common Edit screens.

To return to the Element Edit screens, press only

one of these buttons, [–] or [+].

-2 [MUTE] button (Page 48, 55)

In the Multi Mode, this button mutes the selected

Parts. In the Voice Edit Mode, this button mutes the

selected Elements or Drum keys.

MUSIC SYNTHESIZER

PHONES

OUTPUT

RDCINON

STANDBY

CONTROLLER SWITCH TO HOST HOST SELECT IN OUT THRU

MIDI

VOLUME

UTILITY

UTILITY MIDI MODE PART ELEMENT KEY

DATA

EDIT

MULTI PA RT

COMMON ELEMENT

VOICE

MIX

TONE

EFFECT

CONTROLLER

GENERA L

OSC MIX

PITCH

AMP

EFFECT

LFO

FILTER

MULTI

UTILITY

EDIT

COMPARE

JOB STORE

MIDI

VOICE DEMO MUTE

DRUM

CATEGORY

PRESET

PIANO

BASS

456

789

REED/PIPE

STRINGS

SYN LEAD

BRASS

ENTER EXIT

SYN PAD

ORGAN GUITAR

USER

GM XG

OTHER KEYBOARD

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

DRUM/PERC

COMMON

DEC INC

KEYBOARD

MIDI FILTER

EFFECT

CONTROLLER

MIDI CHANNEL

DOWN

OCTAVE

FOOT FOOT

MIDI

PAGE

OCTAVE

PART

NO YES

ELEM

KEY

MONO

KEYELEMPART

OCTAVE

PAGE

12 5 6 78 9)!$

@# % ^34

Basics Section

DATA buttons (Page 30)

These are used during editing for selecting various

pages and for setting parameter values.

-1 [DEC/NO] button (Page 31)

Use this to decrease the value of the selected

parameter. To decrease the value by 10,

simultaneously hold down this button and press the

[INC/YES] button. The button can also be used to

cancel a Job or Store operation.

-2 [INC/YES] button (Page 31)

Use this to increase the value of the selected

parameter. To increase the value by 10,

simultaneously hold down this button and press the

[DEC/NO] button. The button can also be used to

execute a Job or Store operation.

-3 [

▲

]/[

▼

] buttons (Page 30)

Use these to select the screen “pages” in each Mode.

9-4 [E]/[F] buttons (Page 30)

Use these to select the value to be set in the LCD, or

to display continuous parts of the page (on the left

and right), for pages that consist of several parts.

) [CATEGORY SEARCH/DRUM] button

(Pages 34, 35)

Turns on the Category Search function (page 35).

This function allows you to instantly select a

desired Voice category from the numeric keypad or

the Memory buttons. You can also assign the drum

bank of each memory by simultaneously pressing

this button and the [USER/(SE)] button or the

[GM/XG /(OTHER)] button.

! [PRESET/(DRUM/PERC)] button (Page 33)

In the Multi and Voice modes, this lets you select

the Preset Memory programs. When the Category

Search function (page 35) is active, this is used to

specify the DRUM/PERC Voice category.

@ [USER/(SE)] button (Page 33)

In the Multi and Voice modes, this lets you select

the User Memory programs. You can also specify a

User Memory Drum bank by simultaneously

pressing both this button and the [CATEGORY

SEARCH/DRUM] button. When the Category

Search function (page 35) is active, this is used to

specify the SE Voice category.

# [GM/XG/(OTHER)] button (Page 33)

In the Multi and Voice modes, this lets you select

the GM/XG Memory programs. You can also

specify a GM/XG Memory Drum bank by

simultaneously pressing both this button and the

[CATEGORY SEARCH/DRUM] button. When the

Category Search function (page 35) is active, this is

used to specify the OTHER: CO, ME Voice

categories.

$ Numeric keypad (Pages 32, 35)

This is used to select speciﬁc Multi or Program

numbers. In the Edit mode, it is used to input

parameter data values. The selected value is actually

entered or executed only after pressing the

[ENTER] button. This is also used to select the

various Voice categories (page 70) when the

Category Search function (page 35) is set to ON.

% [ENTER/KEYBOARD] button

This is used to enter or execute the value typed in

from the numeric keypad. This can also be used to

set parameters whose values are expressed as a note

(from C-2 - G8); simultaneously hold this button

and press the desired key on the keyboard. It is also

used for executing various jobs and store

operations.

& [EXIT] button (Page 31)

During editing or when in a mode other than Multi/

Voice Play, pressing this button exits from the mode

and returns to the Multi/Voice Play mode.

Basics Section

Rear Panel

1 MIDI IN/OUT/THRU terminals (Page 12)

MIDI IN receives MIDI messages from an external

MIDI device. Use this connector to control the S03

from an external MIDI device. MIDI OUT sends

out MIDI messages generated by the S03 (including

notes played on the keyboard and panel control

movements) to an external MIDI sound module or

device. MIDI THRU simply relays the MIDI

messages received at MIDI IN. Connect other

devices here.

2 HOST SELECT switch (Page 12)

For selecting the type of computer connected to the

S03 via the TO HOST connector. When using the

MIDI IN/OUT/THRU terminals, set this switch to

MIDI.

3 TO HOST terminal (Page 13)

For connection to a computer, using an optional

serial computer cable.

4 FOOT SWITCH jack (Pages 14, 46)

For connecting an optional footswitch (FC4 or

FC5). Depending on the assigned function, you can

use the footswitch to turn speciﬁc functions on and

off.

5 FOOT CONTROLLER jack (Pages 14, 45)

For connecting an optional foot controller (FC7,

etc.). This gives you real-time control over various

aspects of the sound, such as tone, pitch, and

volume.

6 STANDBY/ON switch (Page 15)

Use this to turn the S03 on or off.

Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position,

electricity is still ﬂowing to the instrument at a minimum

level. When not using the S03 for an extended period of

time, be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the

wall AC outlet.

7 DC IN terminal (Page 11)

For connecting an appropriate AC power adaptor

(PA-3C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)

to supply power to the S03.

8 OUTPUT L/MONO and R jack (Page 11)

Line level audio signals are output from the S03 via

these phone jacks (1/4" mono phone plug). For

monophonic output, use just the L/MONO jack.

9 PHONES jack (Page 11)

For connection to a pair of stereo headphones.

MIDI

OUTTHRU IN

HOST SELECT

TO HOS T

FOOT

SWITCH

FOOT

CONTROLLER

MacPC-2

MIDI OFF

OUTPUT

RLMONOON

STANDBY

DC IN PHONES

12 5678934

Basics Section

Before Use

This section explains how to connect to an AC power source, audio and MIDI devices, and a computer system. Only

switch the S03 on after you have made all the necessary connections. We strongly recommended you read this

section BEFORE using the S03.

Power Supply

1 Make sure that the S03’s STANDBY/ON switch is

at the STANDBY (off) position.

2 Connect the PA-3C’s DC plug to the S03’s DC IN

terminal on the instrument’s rear panel.

3 Connect the adaptor’s AC plug to the nearest

electrical outlet.

Do not attempt to use an AC adaptor other than the

Yamaha PA-3C or an equivalent recommended by

Yamaha. The use of an incompatible adaptor may cause

irreparable damage to the S03, and may even pose a

serious shock hazard! ALWAYS UNPLUG THE AC

ADAPTOR FROM THE AC POWER OUTLET WHEN

THE S03 IS NOT IN USE.

Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position,

electricity is still ﬂowing to the instrument at a minimum

level. When not using the S03 for an extended period of

time, be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the

wall AC outlet.

Connections

Connecting to External

Audio Equipment

Since the S03 has no built-in speakers, you need to

monitor its sound output via external audio

equipment. Alternatively, you could use a pair of

headphones.

There are several methods of connecting to external

audio equipment, as described in the following

illustrations.

Connecting Stereo Powered

Speakers

A pair of powered speakers can accurately produce the

S03’s rich sounds with their own pan and effect

settings. Connect your powered speakers to the

OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks on the rear panel.

n When using just one powered speaker, connect it to the

OUTPUT L/MONO jack on the rear panel.

S03 Rear Panel

DC IN

To electrical

outlet

OUTPUT

RLMONOON

STANDBY

DC IN PHONES

S03

Stereo headphones

PHONES

OUTPUT L /

MONO

OUTPUT R

INPUTINPUT

Powered speaker

(Left)

Powered speaker

(Right)

Basics Section

Connecting to a Mixer

If you want to integrate the S03 into a larger system

with other instruments and additional audio

processing capabilities, connect it to a mixer, ampliﬁer

and stereo monitor system as shown below.

n Connecting a pair of headphones does not affect audio

output from the OUTPUT (L/MONO and R) jacks.

The audio output at the PHONES jack and the OUTPUT

jacks is exactly the same.

Connecting External MIDI

Equipment

You can connect an external MIDI device using a MIDI

cable (available separately) and control it from the S03.

You can also use an external MIDI keyboard or

sequencer to control the S03’s internal sounds. This

section introduces several different MIDI applications.

n The HOST SELECT switch on the rear panel should be

set to “MIDI” Otherwise, MIDI data will not be

transmitted from the S03’s MIDI OUT connector.

Controlling the S03 from an

External MIDI Keyboard

Controlling an External MIDI

Keyboard with the S03

12345678910111213141516LR

Stereo headphones

Mixer

Speaker

Amplifier

OUTPUT L

OUTPUT

L / MONO PHONES

S03

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

External MIDI keyboard

or synthesizer

S03

HOST SELECT

MacPC-2

MIDI OFF

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

External MIDI keyboard

or synthesizer

S03

HOST SELECT

MacPC-2

MIDI OFF

Basics Section

Recording and Playback using an

External MIDI Sequencer

Controlling Another MIDI Device via

MIDI THRU

With the above MIDI connections, you can send MIDI

data from the S03’s MIDI OUT terminal, while

sending MIDI data from the external sequencer to an

external MIDI synthesizer via the S03’s MIDI THRU

terminal.

n The MIDI cable should be no greater than 15 meters in

length, and there should be no more than three devices in

a MIDI chain (chained in series via each unit’s MIDI

THRU). To connect more units, use a MIDI Thru Box

for parallel connections. You may encounter errors if the

MIDI cables are too long or if too many devices are

chained together via their MIDI THRU connectors.

Connecting to a Personal

Computer

You can use a connected computer to control the S03

and to transfer S03 data to/from computer via MIDI.

There are two ways to connect your S03 to a computer:

1: Serial connection (the computer’s serial port to

the S03’s TO HOST terminal)

2: MIDI connection (the computer’s MIDI

interface or external MIDI interface to the

S03’s MIDI IN and OUT)

Depending on your particular computer, the

connections may differ. (See below.)

n You may also want to change the Local On/Off setting

(page 93), depending on how you are using the S03 in

your MIDI system.

1: Serial Port to TO HOST

IBM-PC/AT

Macintosh

MIDI OUT

External

MIDI sequencer

S03

MIDI IN

HOST SELECT

MacPC-2

MIDI OFF

MIDI IN

MIDI THRU

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

External

MIDI sequencer

External MIDI

synthesizer

External MIDI synthesizer

HOST SELECT

MacPC-2

MIDI OFF

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

S03

IBM-PC/AT

and compatibles

RS-232C

(DB9)

Personal System/V

PS/V

Personal System/V

HOST

8-pin MINI DIN to

D-SUB 9-pin Cable

S03

HOST SELECT

MacPC-2

MIDI OFF

mini DIN 8-pin

D-SUB 9-pin

HOST

Macintosh Peripheral

Cable (M0197)

Macintosh

S03

HOST SELECT

MacPC-2

MIDI OFF

mini DIN 8-pin mini DIN 8-pin

Basics Section

MIDI Interface to MIDI IN and OUT

Using the computer’s MIDI interface

Using an external MIDI interface

■ Connection to serial port

■ Connection to USB terminal

n You will also need the appropriate MIDI application

(sequencer, editor, etc.), compatible with your

computer platform.

Connecting Controllers

The S03 has controller jacks on the rear panel,

including FOOT SWITCH and FOOT CONTROLLER.

You can connect optional controllers such as a

footswitch (the FC4 or FC5) and foot controller (the

FC7) to control tone, volume, pitch and other

parameters.

n Details about how to use these controllers are given on

page 45.

Computer with

MIDI interface

HOST SELECT

PC-2 PC-1

MIDI Mac

MIDI OUT

MIDI

OUT

MIDI

MIDI IN

NEC

PC-9821

NEC MultiSync

S03

MIDI Interface

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

Computer

S03

HOST SELECT

MacPC-2

MIDI OFF

USB-MIDI interface

(UX256, etc.)

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

Computer

S03

HOST SELECT

MacPC-2

MIDI OFF

FOOT SWITCH

FC4 or FC5

FOOT CONTROLLER

FC7

S03

OST SELECT

TO HOS T

FOOT

SWITCH

FOOT

CONTROLLER

MacPC-2

IOFF

OUTPUT

RLMONOON

STANDBY

DC IN PHONES

Basics Section

Powering Up

Power-on Procedure

When you have made all the necessary connections

between your S03 and any other devices, make sure

that all volume settings are turned down all the way to

zero. Then turn on every device in your setup in the

order of MIDI masters (senders), MIDI slaves

(receivers), then the audio equipment (mixers,

ampliﬁers, speakers, etc.). This ensures smooth MIDI

operation and prevents speaker damage.

When powering down the setup, ﬁrst turn down the

volume for each audio device, then switch off each

device in the reverse order (ﬁrst audio devices, then

MIDI).

When using the S03 as MIDI slave:

Turning on the S03

In order to avoid possible damage to the speakers or other

connected electronic equipment, always switch on the

power of the S03 before switching on the power of the

ampliﬁed speakers or mixer and ampliﬁer. Likewise,

always switch off the power of the S03 after switching off

the power of the ampliﬁed speakers or mixer and

ampliﬁer.

Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position,

electricity is still ﬂowing to the instrument at a minimum

level. When not using the S03 for an extended period of

time, be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the

wall AC outlet.

n Before you switch your S03 on or off, ﬁrst turn down the

volume of any connected audio equipment.

1 Press the STANDBY/ON switch

2 A splash screen (“Welcome to S03”) is displayed

brieﬂy.

3 The Multi or Voice Play Mode screen appears next.

4 Turn up the ampliﬁer’s volume as necessary.

5 Adjust the S03’s [VOLUME] slider to set an

appropriate volume level.

MIDI master (transmitting device)

Audio equipment (first mixer, then amplifier)

12345678910111213141516LR

POWER

ON!!

S03 as MIDI slave (MIDI receiving device)

FOOT

CONTROLLER

OUTPUT

RLMONOON

STANDBY

DC IN PHONES

GrandPno

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

XG001

VOLUME

Basics Section

Demo Playback

The S03 features a variety of demo songs, showcasing its dynamic sound and sophisticated functions.

n Make sure synthesizer is ready for playback. Details are given in the section “Before Use” on page 11.

At the “Demo” screen, any data in the instrument’s User Voice memory will be overwritten by the data for the demo song.

Important data should be saved to the external MIDI device or computer beforehand.

At the “DEMO” screen, the Master Tune parameter (in Utility) will be overwritten and set to “0.”

1 Press the [DEMO] button.

The following screen appears.

2 Press the [INC/YES] button to call up the Demo screen and automatically start playback of the Demo song.

3 To stop Demo playback, press one of the following buttons: [MULTI], [VOICE], or [EXIT].

This exits from the Demo mode and automatically returns to the Multi mode, Voice mode, or the mode previously

selected.

n Demo song playback continues indeﬁnitely until stopped.

Demo Song Selection

While the Demo song is playing back, you can select the particular Demo song that you wish to hear.

Enter the desired Demo song category from the numeric keypad to call up the song.

For example, you can play the piano song by pressing button 7 (PIANO) in the numeric keypad. If you don’t select a

particular song, an ensemble (OTHER) song will play back automatically.

n When there are several Demo songs contained in one category, you can select from among the available songs by using the

[DEC/NO] and [INC/YES] buttons.

MODE

MULTI VOICE DEMO

EraseUserV

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

OK?

MODE PART ELEMENT KEY

DATA

MULTI

UTILITY

EDIT

COMPARE

JOB STORE

MIDI

VOICE DEMO MUTE

DRUM

CATEGORY

PRESET

PIANO

BASS

456

789

REED/PIPE

STRINGS

SYN LEAD

BRASS

ENTER EXIT

SYN PAD

ORGAN GUITAR

USER

GM XG

OTHER KEYBOARD

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

DRUM/PERC

COMMON

DEC INC

NO YES

DRUM

CATEGORY

PRESET

PIANO

BASS

456

789

REED/PIPE

STRINGS

SYN LEAD

BRASS

ENTER EXIT

SYN PAD

ORGAN GUITAR

USER

GM XG

OTHER KEYBOARD

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

DRUM/PERC

Select the

CATEGORY

PRESET

PIANO

BASS

456

789

REED/PIPE

STRINGS

SYN LEAD

BRASS

ENTER EXIT

SYN PAD

ORGAN GUITAR

USER

GM XG

OTHER KEYBOARD

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

DRUM/PERC

COMMON

DEC INC

KEYBOARD

MIDI FILTER

EFFECT

CONTROLLER

MIDI CHANNEL

DOWN

OCTAVE

FOOT FOOT

MIDI

NO YES

MONO

123

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

GrandPno

XG001

DRUM

CATEGORY

PRESET

USER

GM XG

OTHER

DRUM/PERC

Preset Voice

1~128

User Voice

1~128

........

GM/XG Voice

GM Bank Other Bank

Basics Section

The Drum Voices are stored in separate areas of the

User and GM/XG memory sections.

•To call up the User Drum memory (USDR1/

USDR2):

Press the [USER] button while holding down the

[DRUM] button.

•To call up the GM/XG Drum memory

•To call up the XG SFX Kit memory

Press the [GM/XG] button while holding down the

[DRUM] button.

n PRESET, of course, contains the Preset Voices. The XG

Voices are assigned in order according to the GM format,

starting with Bank 1, and various XG Voices are

distributed throughout the GM/XG memory banks.

USER is stored in internal RAM memory and contains

factory default Voices. These can be overwritten, but can

be recalled from the original factory settings at any time

if required.

3 Select a Voice number.

Selecting with the [INC/YES] and

[DEC/NO] buttons

First, press the [ENTER] button to specify the Voice

Memory, then press the [INC/YES] button to

increment the Voice Number, and press [DEC/NO] to

decrement it.

Selecting with the numeric keypad

and [ENTER] button

First, specify the Voice number with the numeric

keypad, then press the [ENTER] button to actually set

it. For example, to select voice number 100, press

buttons [1], [0] and [0] in order. (The indicated

number ﬂashes.) Finally, press the [ENTER] button to

select the Voice.

n For one- or two-digit numbers, it’s not necessary to enter

all three digits (such as, “001” or “010”). For example, to

enter Voice number “3,” simply press numeric keypad

button [3], then press the [ENTER] button.

CATEGORY

PRESET

USER

GM XG

OTHER

DRUM/PERC

XG Drum 1~20

User Drum

1/2

DATA

DEC INCNO YES

PIANO

BASS

789

REED/PIPE

STRINGS

SYN LEAD

BRASS

ENTER

SYN PAD

ORGAN GUITAR

KEYBOARD

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

Set the number.Specify the number.

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

GrandPno

XG100

The displayed value flashes.

Basics Section

4 Now, play the keyboard

and hear the selected

Voice. Try selecting and

playing other Voices as

well.

Selecting XG Banks

The XG Voices are divided up into several different

banks. This gives you access to an even greater

number of Voices and a wider variety of sounds.

1 Make sure that XG memory is selected, then call

up the BK (Bank Select) display by using the

[E] button.

2 Select the desired Bank number by using the

[INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons, or by using

the numeric keypad and the [ENTER] button.

The bank is now changed. Return to the XG

display by using the [E]/[F] buttons and

select the desired Voice number.

n For details about Bank types, refer to the separate

Data List booklet.

Using Voice Category Search

With the Voice Category Search feature, you can

quickly ﬁnd Voices within a speciﬁed Voice

Category. For example, by selecting the PIANO

Voice Category, you can instantly call up for

selection all and only those Voices which fall into the

“PF” (PIANO) Voice Category.

1 Press the [CATEGORY SEARCH] button in

Voice Mode. Its LED will light and Category

Search will be enabled. The Memory buttons

and the numeric keypad are used for selecting

categories.

n Press the [EXIT] button to disable Category Search.

n The category names are printed under each button.

To switch between the “ME” and “CO” categories,

press the [OTHER] button.

n Refer to the Category List on page 71 for more

information on Voice category types.

2 Specify the desired Category using the buttons

above. The ﬁrst Voice in that Category will be

automatically selected.

n In this step, the lowest numbered Voice of the

category is selected.

n The S03 searches in the following order: PRESET,

then USER, then GM/XG.

3 Press the [INC/YES] button to increment the

Voice number in that category and press the

[DEC/NO] button to decrement it.

n You can use the same operation as described here

in selecting Voices for Multi Part Edit (page 59).

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

DATA

DEC INCNO YES

GrandPno

BK000

DRUM

CATEGORY

PRESET

PIANO

BASS

456

789

REED/PIPE

STRINGS

SYN LEAD

BRASS

ENTER EXIT

SYN PAD

ORGAN GUITAR

USER

GM XG

OTHER KEYBOARD

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

DRUM/PERC

Select the

CATEGORY

PRESET

PIANO

BASS

456

789

REED/PIPE

STRINGS

SYN LEAD

BRASS

ENTER EXIT

SYN PAD

ORGAN GUITAR

USER

GM XG

OTHER KEYBOARD

SYN COMP

CHROMATIC

PERCUSSION

DRUM/PERC

COMMON

DEC INC

KEYBOARD

MIDI FILTER

EFFECT

CONTROLLER

MIDI CHANNEL

DOWN

OCTAVE

FOOT FOOT

MIDI

NO YES

MONO

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

1 P 1

MODE

MULTI VOICE DEMO

Init Mlt

MLT01

DRUM

CATEGORY

PRESET

USER

GM XG

OTHER

DRUM/PERC

USER

1~32

DATA

DEC INCNO YES

Basics Section

3 You can now play Parts

in the Multi via the

keyboard.

If the MIDI receive channel parameter is the same for

any Parts, those Parts can be played in unison. Now

try selecting other Multis.

n To play a Voice from the keyboard, make sure that the

MIDI Receive Channel for that Voice’s Part and the MIDI

Transmit Channel for the keyboard are both set to the

same value.

Using the S03 as a

Multitimbral Tone

Generator (Multi

Edit)

Multi mode lets you conﬁgure the S03 as a

multitimbral tone generator for use with computer-

based music software or external sequencers. If each

track in a song ﬁle uses a different MIDI channel, then

the Parts in a Multi can be each assigned to those MIDI

channels correspondingly. Therefore, you can play

back a song ﬁle on an external sequencer and have

different Voices playing on different tracks

simultaneously.

In the following example, we will create a Multi suited

to playing back a song ﬁle consisting of three Parts:

piano, bass and drums. The piano track is assigned to

MIDI channel 2, the bass track to channel 3, and the

drums to channel 10.

Computer

(sequencer software)

S03

Tone

generator

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Piano

Bass

Drums

Transmit Ch.2

Transmit Ch.3

Transmit Ch.10

Part 2

Part 3

Part 10

Piano Voice

Bass Voice

Drum Voice

Receive Ch.2

Receive Ch.3

Receive Ch.10

Song File Multi

Basics Section

1 After pressing the [MULTI] button, press the

[EDIT] button (the respective LEDs will light). You

are now in the Multi Edit mode.

n Before entering the Multi Edit mode, you need to select a

Multi for editing.

2 If the Common Edit display is shown, press the [+]

or [–] button to switch to the Part Edit display.

3 Use the [+] and [–] buttons to select Parts. Here,

you can select P2 (Part 2) for the piano, P3 (Part 3)

for bass and P10 (Part 10) for drums. First, let’s

select P2 (Part 2).

4 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons to switch to the Voice

Selection screen (PAGE 1), then specify the Voice to

be used as the piano Part.

5 Next, use the [▲] and [▼] buttons to switch to the

Volume screen (PAGE 2), then set the volume for

the piano Part as well as its Pan position, Chorus

and Reverb Send levels, if necessary. For details, see

page 56.

6 Continue using the [▲] and [▼] buttons and switch

to the Rcv Ch (MIDI Receive Channel) screen

(PAGE 6). Set the parameter to 2.

7 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons and switch to the

Mono/Poly screen (PAGE 8). Set the parameter to

“poly” (polyphonic).

n For Parts that do not require polyphony, the Mode

parameter can be set to “mono” (monophonic).

8 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons and switch to the Part

Mode screen (PAGE 9). Set the parameter to

“norm” (normal).

n In the case of a Drum Part, set the mode to “drum.”

n For details about the Part mode, see page 61.

MODE

MULTI

UTILITY

EDIT

COMPARE

JOB STORE

MIDI

VOICE DEMO

PART ELEMENT KEY

MUTE

COMMON

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

2 E

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

2 P

Common indicator

Part indicator

Total Vol

127

Volume

100

PART ELEMENT KEY

MUTE

COMMON

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

1 P 2

GrandPno

XG001

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Volume

001

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

6 P 2

Rcv Ch

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

8 P 2

Mono/Poly

poly

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

9 P 2

Part Mode

norm

Basics Section

9 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons to call up the NtLmt

(Note Limit) and VelLmt (Velocity Limit) settings,

and check whether or not the Part of the piano

Voice is set appropriately — in other words, make

sure that the Note or Velocity settings do not

prevent the Voice from being played normally.

Except in special cases, you should generally avoid

setting limits on the note and velocity ranges, in

order to ensure that notes are sounded properly and

are not cut off.

By following steps 3 to 9 above, when you play

back a song ﬁle in the sequencer, the piano track is

transmitted through MIDI channel 2. The MIDI

data is received by the S03 which then plays the

Voice for the Part assigned to MIDI channel 2.

) Repeat steps 3 to 9 above, but set up Part 3 for

bass and to receive on MIDI channel 3.

! Repeat steps 3 to 9 again, setting up Part 10 for

drums and to receive on MIDI channel 10.

n To avoid situations where the Voices of unused Parts

are suddenly played back, you should set the MIDI

receive channels for unused Parts to “off.”

n There are many other Part-speciﬁc parameters in the

Multi Edit mode. For details, see page 55.

@ Before exiting Multi Edit Mode, you need to store

the settings for the Multi. For details about storing

Multis, see page 69.

Now, when you select this Multi in the Multi Play

mode, you can play back the song ﬁle on computer

(sequencer), and the piano, bass and drum Parts will be

played back according to each track’s MIDI channel.

Performing Live

While Playing

Back a Song File

While playing back the song ﬁle with the piano, bass

and drum Parts assigned earlier, you can set up the

Multi so that you can also play another Part live.

This is the same as the Multi created earlier (page 38),

but with the addition of another Part for live playback.

Be careful to make the following important settings.

• In the Multi created earlier, Parts 2, 3 and 10 were

being used. As an example, we will now assign

another Part (Part 1) to a solo-type Voice and set the

MIDI Receive Channel to 1.

•At the Trans Ch (PAGE 4) screen in MIDI Mode,

set the MIDI Receive Channel to 1.

The Voice for Part 1 can now be played live using

the keyboard.

n Because the S03 features a fully-compatible XG tone

generator, you can play any of the wide variety of

commercially available XG/GM song software. This

ensures broad dynamic and expressive range, with a wide

variety of rich instrument sounds and effects. You can

also mute speciﬁc parts of the MIDI data — allowing you

to practice the missing parts yourself, or to use the song

data as instrumental backing for your own singing and

playing.

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

4 P 2

NtLmt-L

C-2

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Piano

Bass

Drums

Transmit Ch.2

Transmit Ch.3

Transmit Ch.10

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Solo-type Voice

Piano Voice

Bass Voice

Receive Ch.1

Receive Ch.2

Receive Ch.3

Part 10

Drums Voice

Receive Ch.10

Song File

Multi

Playback using

keyboard

Basics Section

Splitting the Keyboard —

Setting Upper and Lower

Ranges for the Voices

The illustration below shows an example in which the

keyboard has been effectively divided into two spearate

key ranges, letting you play one Voice over one range,

and a second Voice over the other. In the following

example, the Voices change at the note C3, letting you

play a string Voice in the lower range and a piano Voice

in the upper. To set up the Voices in this way, follow

the instructions below.

1 Press the [MULTI] button, followed by the [EDIT]

button (each LED will light) to enter the Multi Edit

mode.

n You need to select the Multi before entering the Multi

Edit mode (page 37).

2 If the Common Edit screen is shown, press the [+]

or [–] button to select the Part Edit display.

3 Select a Part for the lower range by using the PART

[+] and [–] buttons. For this example, select “P1

(Part 1).”

4 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons (if necessary) and call

up the Voice Selection screen (PAGE 1) to select a

strings Voice for the lower range Part.

n For details about Voice selection, see page 59.

5 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons to call up the Volume

screen (PAGE 2), then set the volume for the piano

Part as well as its Pan position, Chorus and Reverb

Send levels, if necessary. For details, see page 56.

6 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons to call up the NtLmt

screen (PAGE 4), and specify a key range for the

lower and upper Parts. Switch between the NtLmt-

L (Note Limit Low) and NtLmt-H (Note Limit

High) screens by pressing the [E] and [F]

buttons. Select “C-2” for the lowest note and “B2”

for the highest.

7 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons to call up the Rcv Ch

(MIDI Receive Channel) screen (PAGE 6). Select

“1” for “RcvCh.”

n Set the MIDI Transmit Channel to 1 from the Trans

Ch display (PAGE 4 ) in the MIDI mode. Now you

are ready to play the Part 1 Voice within the lower

range. The Voice assigned to Part 1 can be played

over MIDI Receive Channel 1.

8 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons to call up the Mono/

Poly screen (PAGE 8). Set the parameter to “poly”

(polyphonic).

(C3)

UpperLower

Part 2

Piano

Ch1

Part 1

Strings

Ch1

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Strings1

XG049

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

4 P

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

4 P

NtLmt-L

C-2

NtLmt-H

Basics Section

9 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons to call up the Part

Mode screen (PAGE 9). Set the parameter to

“norm” (normal)

With settings made in steps 3 to 9 above, you can

now play the strings voice assigned to “P1” (Part 1)

and set to MIDI Receive Channel 1 (RcvCh) — when

you play in the key range of B2 and lower.

) Make the settings for the upper Part (Part 2), in the

same manner as you did in steps 3 to 9.

For Part 2, select a piano Voice, setting the Note

Limit Low to “C3” and the Note Limit High to the

maximum of “G8.” Also set the MIDI Receive

Channel to 1, as you did with Part 1. The piano

Voice of Part 2 sounds when you play keys higher

than C3.

n In the Edit mode, the selected Part’s Voice is played

back.

n To avoid situations where the Voices of unused Parts

are suddenly played back, you should set the MIDI

receive channels for unused Parts to “off.”

n There are many other Part-speciﬁc parameters in the

Multi Edit mode. For details, see page 55.

! Before exiting the Multi Edit mode, store the above

settings to a Multi. For instructions on storing a

Multi, refer to page 69.

Now that you’ve created and stored the Multi, you can

call it up anytime within the Multi play mode — and

play a strings Voice from keys B2 and below, while

playing a piano Voice from keys C3 and above.

Layering Two Voices

(Parts) Together

The illustration below gives one application example of

combining two Voices in a layer. In this example, a

strings Voice is selected for Part 1 and a piano Voice is

selected for Part2, and the two are played together in

unison.

This Multi can be easily created and set so that both

Parts 1 and 2 are layered together across the entire

range of the keyboard.

•For both Part 1 and Part 2, set the Note Limit Low

parameter to “C-2” and the Note Limit High

parameter to “G8.”

n In the Edit mode, the selected Part’s Voice is played

back.

Saving S03 Settings to an External Device (Bulk Dump Send)

Using the Bulk Dump function, you can transmit

your S03 settings to an external device, such as a

computer, and save them. This is a fast and

convenient way to back up your important data. You

can also use this function to record important S03

data at the beginning of a song, so that all your

original settings and data are automatically reset

when your play back the song.

The following explanation shows you how to do this

using the realtime recording functions of the

sequencer software. In this example, track 1 is used

for recording the User Multi data.

n The explanations in this section apply in general to

sequencer software and are not speciﬁc to any

particular program or device. The steps in each

procedure may vary slightly, depending on your

particular computer or sequencer software. For

speciﬁc information and operation instructions,

refer to the owner’s manual (or help messages) of

your particular sequencer.

n Make sure that the S03 is properly connected to the

computer (page 13). For information on settings

for your sequencer, refer to the owner’s manual (or

help messages) of your particular sequencer.

Part 1

Part 2

Strings Piano

Basics Section

1 In the Multi mode, select the S03 Multi you want

to transmit.

2 Press [JOB] to enter the Multi Job mode.

3 From the “BlkDmp” parameter (PAGE 5) in the

Multi Job mode, select the data type for

transmitting. Here, select “Curnt” (Current) to

transmit the currently selected Multi data, then

press the [ENTER] button.

4 In the sequencer, specify track 1 for recording.

5 After starting recording on the sequencer, press

the S03’s [INC/YES] button to transmit the data.

6 When data transmission is ﬁnished, stop

recording on the sequencer. Check the list

window in your sequencer (the window that

shows recorded events in a list) to conﬁrm that

the data (shown in hexadecimal) has been

properly received and recorded by the sequencer.

n For information about recording or saving, refer to

the owner’s manual (or help messages) of your

particular sequencer.

Now, whenever you play back the song ﬁle with this

recorded data, the appropriate S03 Multi settings are

sent as System Exclusive messages (page 99) from

the sequencer.

n For best results, try to keep the playback tempo at

the same setting as was used for recording.

n When you assign the User Voice to the selected

Multi’s Part, record the User Voice as the same

manner. Select the AllUS (All User Voices) in the

BlkDmp screen (PAGE 3) in the Voice Job mode,

then transmit the bulk data using the same method

as Multi.

n If necessary, S03 system (Utility and MIDI) data

can also be recorded. In the BlkDmp screen of the

Multi Job or Voice Job mode, select “Systm.”

n To save the all S03 settings, transmit all three data

types below, and record/save them to the computer.

• All: All Multis (Multi Job mode)

• AllUs: All User Voices (Voice Job mode)

• Systm: System (Multi Job or Voice Job mode)

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

BlkDmp

Sure?

Bulk transmit start

DATA

DEC INCNO YES

Basics Section

Using Controllers

The S03 is equipped with Pitch Bend and Modulation Wheels. By connecting an optional Foot Controller or

Footswitch, you can also control a variety of parameters (such as changing the sound, changing Program Numbers,

etc.) with your feet— and leave your hands free to play the keyboard.

Pitch Bend Wheel

This wheel’s function is to control pitch. Move the

wheel upward/downward to bend the pitch upward/

downward. The effect can also be reversed.

n The Pitch Bend Range can be set for each Voice

(page 65).

Modulation Wheel

The more you move this wheel upwards, the greater

the modulation that is applied to the sound.

n The Modulation Depth can also be set. Also, the wheel

can be assigned to control different parameters, such as

Volume or Pan (page 91).

n The Modulation Wheel can also be set to control the

tone, amplitude (volume), pitch, or ﬁlter setting of the

Voice.

The Modulation Wheel can be used to control the

parameters below.

•MW Variation Control Depth

•MW Filter Control

•MW Pitch Modulation Depth

•MW Filter Modulation Depth

•MW Amplitude Modulation Depth

Controllers and External MIDI Control

Various control functions can be assigned to the

Modulation Wheel and the Assignable Controller

(page 66). Besides these other functions, the

controllers are already set to control the tone,

volume, pitch, and ﬁlter settings. When the

controller is used, it not only affects the built-in tone

generator of the S03, but also simultaneously

outputs corresponding MIDI data via the MIDI OUT

terminal.

n When the Multi mode is active, this controls the

Part for which the Transmit Channel setting of the

MIDI mode (PAGE 4) and the Receive Channel

setting of Multi Part Edit (PAGE 6) are the same.

Pitch

down

Pitch Bend

Wheel

Modulation

Wheel

Pitch Bend

Wheel

Modulation

Wheel

Deeper

Modulation Wheel

Assignable Controller 1

Voice Control

Tone

Volume

Pitch ....

MIDI OUT

Tone generator

MIDI IN

MIDI Control

Basics Section

Foot Controller

An optional Foot Controller (such as the FC7),

connected to the FOOT CONTROLLER jack (page 10)

on the rear panel, can be assigned to any one of a

number of controller parameters. By using a foot

controller for parameter control, both your hands are

left free to play the keyboard (or to operate other

controllers). This is very convenient when performing

live.

n By setting the AC1 to the same control number as the

Foot Controller, you can use the Foot Controller to

continuously control the parameters below for each Part

or Voice.

• AC1 Filter Control

• AC1 Filter Modulation Depth

• AC1 Amplitude Modulation Depth

• AC1 Variation Control Depth

The control number for AC1 can be set in the following

pages:

Multi Part Edit PAGE 19 (when controlling in the Multi

mode)

Utility PAGE 7 (when controlling in the Voice mode)

See next section below for information on setting the

control number for the Foot Controller.

Using the Foot Controller to Control

Parameters

In live performance, you can use the Foot Controller

onstage to keep your hands free to play the

keyboard, yet still be able to control various

functions necessary for your songs or performance.

In the following example, we’ll show you how to set

up the Foot Controller to function the same as (and

substitute for) the Modulation Wheel.

1 Press the [UTILITY] button to enter the Utility

mode.

2 Press the [▲] and [▼] buttons to call up the

FCTxCtlNo (FC transmit Control Number)

screen (PAGE 4).

n Select this parameter by using the [F] button

when the MWTxCtlNo screen is displayed.

3 Use the [INC/DEC] buttons to select “01”

(Modulation Wheel).

The Foot Controller can now be used to perform the

same control function as that of the Modulation

Wheel.

n For details about Control Numbers and Control

Change messages, refer to the separate Data List.

FC7

Foot Controller

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

MODE

MULTI

UTILITY

EDIT

COMPARE

JOB STORE

MIDI

VOICE DEMO

MasterTune

+0000

DATA

DEC INCNO YES

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

DATA

DEC INCNO YES

FCTxCtlNo

Basics Section

Foot Switch

An optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5 Foot Switch

connected to the rear panel FOOT SWITCH jack

(page 10) can be assigned to a range of parameters.

This is designed for switch-type (on/off) controls such

as incrementing/decrementing Voice or Multi

numbers, and cannot be used for continuous control

of a parameter. The default factory setting for this is

to control sustain (FSTxCtlNo = 64).

n See next section below for information on setting the

control number for the Foot Switch. For details about

Control Numbers and Control Change messages, refer to

the separate Data List.

Using the Foot Switch to Advance Through Programs

When performing live, you can set up the Foot

Switch to change Voices or Multis with your feet,

without having to take your hands from the

keyboard. For example, if you arrange the Voices/

Multis in memory in consecutive order (as you’ll use

them), you can easily advance through them one-by-

one by pressing the Foot Switch while you perform.

The following instruction steps show you how to do

this.

1 Press the [UTILITY] button to enter the Utility

mode.

2 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons to to call up the

FSTxCtrlNo (FS transmit Control Number)

screen (PAGE 5).

3 Press the [INC/DEC] buttons to select “96”

(PCInc). (Or, input the number 96 and press the

[ENTER] button.)

In the Voice/Multi mode, the Foot Switch can now

be used to advance through program numbers.

Foot Switch

FC4 or FC5

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

MODE

MULTI

UTILITY

EDIT

COMPARE

JOB STORE

MIDI

VOICE DEMO

MasterTune

+0000

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

DATA

DEC INCNO YES

FSTxCtlNo

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

DATA

DEC INCNO YES

FSTxCtlNo

PCInc

Basics Section

Voice Edit

The following procedure shows you the fundamentals in creating and editing Voices.

Of course, this is just one example; you are free to set any parameters in any way you like. Details about each

parameter are given in the Reference section of this manual.

n All parameter settings are stored along with the Voice itself.

1 Selecting a Voice to Edit

Enter the Voice Play mode by pressing a [VOICE]

button.

Select the Voice Number of the Voice you wish to edit

(page 34).

n When you’re creating a Voice by editing an existing one,

it helps to select a Voice with a sound that’s relatively

similar to the one you intend to create. In this way, you

can avoid having to make large changes and many

parameter edits — allowing you to create a Voice quickly

and easily. If you are creating a Voice from scratch, use

the convenient Initialize function (in the Voice Job

mode) to initialize a Voice in internal user memory. For

details, see pages 87 and 88.

2 Entering the Voice Edit

Mode

All Voice creation and editing is carried out in Voice

Edit Mode.

To enter the Voice Edit mode, press the [EDIT] button

while in the Voice Play mode.

Enter the Voice Edit mode.

In Voice Play mode, select the Voice you wish to edit.

Store the edited Voice.

Set the common parameters

● Set the parameters common to all Elements in the

Voice (volume, pitch, tone, etc.) You can also set

parameters related to the Controllers, Effects, and

so on.

Set the element parameters

● From the OSC/MIX (Oscillator/Mix) screens, select

the Waves used by the Elements in the Voice, plus

the volume, pan, note range and other basic

parameters.

● From the PITCH screens, set the tuning and other

pitch-related parameters used by the Elements.

Also set the PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator)

parameters as necessary.

● From the FILTER screens, adjust the parameters

of the filters used by the Elements. Also set the

FEG (Filter Envelope Generator) parameters as

necessary.

● From the AMP (Amplitude) screens, set the

volume and other output level-related parameters

used by the Elements. Also set the AEG

(Amplitude Envelope Generator) parameters as

necessary.

● From the LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) screens,

set the modulation-related parameters used by the

Elements.

MODE

MULTI VOICE DEMO

MODE

MULTI

UTILITY

EDIT

COMPARE

JOB STORE

MIDI

VOICE DEMO

Basics Section

Common Edit and Editing Individual

Elements

Voices can consist of up to four Elements (page 26).

Use Common Edit to edit the settings common to all

four Elements. The Voice Edit mode can be divided

into screens for Common Edit and those for editing

each Element. In the Voice Edit mode,

simultaneously press both the [–] and [+] buttons to

switch between the Common Edit screens and the

screens for editing each Element.

Common Edit screens

Element Edit screens

Switching Elements On/Off (Mute)

In Voice Edit Mode, an Element can be switched on/

off temporarily when you press the [MUTE] button.

The Element indicator which is muted will ﬂash.

This lets you mute other Elements in the Voice so

that you can listen to the changes to the Element

that you are editing.

Switching Between Screens and Entering

Settings

After selecting a Common Edit screen or an edit

screen for an Element (1 to 4), press the [▲] and [▼]

buttons to switch to other screens.

The S03 has a huge variety of available parameters.

As you change the display pages, an arrow mark on

the right side of the display points to the parameter

chart printed on the panel, indicating the parameter

type and what aspect of the instrument it’s related

to.

Use the INC/YES and DEC/NO buttons to set each

parameter value.

Some parameters have multiple “pages,” indicated

by a special arrow mark (“ﬁ”) in the top right of the

LCD (see below). Use the [E]/[F] buttons to

select these pages.

GrandPno

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Name

1 E

Common indicator

Element SW

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

1 E 1

Element indicator

PART ELEMENT KEY

MUTE

COMMON

PART ELEMENT KEY

MUTE

COMMON

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

1 E

DATA

DEC INCNO YES

Page

KEYELEMPA RT

OCTAVE

PAG E

3 E

VOICE

MIX

TONE

EFFECT

CONTROLLER

GENERAL

OSC MIX

PITCH

AMP

EFFECT

LFO

FILTER

Level

100

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

3 E

DATA

DEC INCNO YES

Level

101

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

5 E 1

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

5 E 1

DATA

DEC INCNO YES

NtLmt-L

C-2

NtLmt-H

Basics Section

3 Set the Common

Parameters

Each Voice consists of up to four Elements. Here, the

parameters common to all Elements are explained.

●

GENERAL (Common General)

In PAGES 1 to 4, you can set the Voice Name, Voice

output settings and other general parameters.

●

CONTROLLER (Common Controller)

In PAGES 5 to 10, you can assign and set various

functions for the controllers on the front (such as

the Modulation and Pitch Bend Wheels) and the

controllers connectable to the rear panel. For

example, you can assign parameters to the

Modulation Wheel so that you can change the tone

of Voice in real time. For details about different

controller uses, see page 45.

●

EFFECT (Common Effect)

In PAGES 11 to 17, you can set the Effects

parameters for the Voice. There are System Effects

(Reverb and Chorus) and Variation Effects.

4 Set the Element

Parameters

● OSC/MIX (Oscillator/Mix)

In PAGES 1 to 6, you can set the various parameters

controlling the waveforms on which the Voice is

based. You can select the Wave used for the

Element, the volume and note range of each

Element and so on.

Element Sw (Element Switch)

Determines whether each Element sounds or not.

Wave Selection

Select the Wave for each Element.

Level

Pan

Set the volume (output level) and stereo pan

position of each Element.

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

1 E

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

4 E

GrandPno

XG001

VelSnsDpt

064

1~4

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

5 E

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

10 E

Porta Sw

off

AC1 FMod

000

5~10

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

11 E

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

17 E

ReverbSend

040

AC1VerCtl

+00

11~17

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

1 E

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

4 E

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

2 E

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

5 E

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

3 E

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

6 E

Element Sw

Pan

PianoL@

W*001

NtLmt-L

C-2

Level

100

VelLmt-L

001

Basics Section

NtLmt-L/H (Note Limit Low/High)

VelLmt-L/H (Velocity Limit Low/High)

Set the note range for each Element (the range of

notes on the keyboard over which the Element will

sound) and also the velocity response (the range of

note velocities within which the Element will

sound). You can assign different settings for each

Element. With these parameters, you can layer

Elements and control their output.

For example, you could set one Element to sound in

an upper range of the keyboard, and another

Element to sound in a lower range. Thus, even

within the same Voice, you can have two different

sounds for different areas of the keyboard or you

can make the two Element ranges overlap so that

their sounds are layered over a set range.

Furthermore, you can set each Element to respond

to different velocity ranges so that one Element

sounds for lower note velocities, whereas another

Element sounds for higher note velocities.

●

PITCH

In PAGES 7 to 12, you can set the basic pitch

parameters for each Element. You can detune

Elements, apply Pitch Scaling and so on. Also, by

setting the PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator), you

can control how the pitch changes over time.

PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator)

Using the PEG, you can control the transition in

pitch from the moment a note is pressed on the

keyboard to the point at which it is released. This is

useful for creating automatic changes in pitch.

Furthermore, different PEG parameters can be set

for each Element.

In the illustration, the letters a - d indicate the

respective Rate (R) settings for Attack - Release.

The greater the value for each Rate, the faster the

pitch goes to the next set Level — in other words, the

time it takes for the pitch to change (between Level

settings) becomes shorter.

n For details about the PEG parameters, see page 75.

C-2

Element 1

Velocity

Element 4

Element 2

Element 3

Release

Level

Attack

Level

Attack

Time

Initial

Level

Decay1

Time

Decay2

Time

Release

Time

Decay1

Level

Sustain

Level

Key off

Time

Pitch

Basics Section

● FILTER

In PAGES 13 to 22, you can use the ﬁlter to change

the tonal characteristics of each Element, by

adjusting overtones (harmonic tones) included in

the waveform from the Element. The S03 employs

an LPF (low pass ﬁlter). Only frequencies below

this point are passed. You can also set the Filter

Envelope Generator (FEG) for time variance of how

the ﬁlter works, which results in a dynamic change

in tonal characteristics. Here, we’ll show you how

the FEG works.

FEG (Filter Envelope Generator)

Using the FEG, you can control the transition in

tone from the moment a note is pressed on the

keyboard to the point at which it is released. When

you press a note on the keyboard, the cutoff

frequency will change according to these envelope

settings. This is useful for creating automatic wah

effects, for example. Furthermore, different FEG

parameters can be set for each Element.

In the illustration, the letters a - d indicate the

respective Rate (R) settings for Attack - Release.

The greater the value for each Rate, the faster the

ﬁlter goes to the next set Level — in other words, the

time it takes for the ﬁlter to change (between Level

settings) becomes shorter.

n For details about the FEG parameters, see page 79.

● AMP (Amplitude)

In PAGES 23 to 31, you can set the volume of each

Element after the OSC (Oscillator), PITCH and

FILTER parameters have been applied, as well as

the ﬁnal overall volume of the signal sent to the

outputs.

The signal of each Element is sent at the speciﬁed

volume to the next Effect section.

Also, by setting the AEG (Amplitude Envelope

Generator), you can control how the volume

changes over time.

The ﬁnal volume for all Elements is set in the Total

Vol (Total Volume) parameter, Common Edit PAGE 2.

AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator)

By using the AEG, you can control the transition in

volume from the moment a note is pressed on the

keyboard to the point at which it is released. When

you press a note on the keyboard, the volume will

change according to these envelope settings.

Furthermore, different AEG parameters can be set

for each Element.

In the illustration, the letters a - d indicate the

respective Rate (R) settings for Attack - Release.

The greater the value for each Rate, the faster the

volume goes to the next set Level — in other words,

the time it takes for the volume to change (between

Level settings) becomes shorter.

n For details about the AEG parameters, see page 80.

Frequency

Cutoff Frequency

Level

Cutoff range

Range passed

Volume

Release

Level

Attack

Level

Attack

Time

Initial

Level

Decay1

Time

Decay2

Time

Release

Time

Decay1

Level

Sustain

Level Key off

Time

Level

EffectAMPFILTPITCH

OSC

Element

1~4

PEG FEG

AEGLFO

Release

Level

Attack

Level

Attack

Time

Initial

Level

Decay1

Time

Decay2

Time

Release

Time

Decay1

Level

Sustain

Level Key off

Time

Volume

Basics Section

About EG Rate and Time (Voice Mode)

The EG (Envelope Generator) processes and shapes

the output level of the tone generator from the

moment you press a key until the sound decays to

silence. The level (Y-axis in the illustrations below)

is a different aspect of the sound, depending on

which EG is being used. For the PEG, level

corresponds to Pitch. For the FEG, it corresponds to

the cutoff frequency. For the AEG, it corresponds to

the volume.

The behavior of the EG over time is controlled by

the Rate (R) parameters. Rate refers to the time it

takes to go from one level to the next (for example,

from the initial level to the attack level).

The illustrations below show how different Rate

settings affect the sound. To extend the time

between level changes and make it long, set the Rate

(R) to a small value.

● LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)

In PAGES 32 to 35, you can edit the LFO, which (as

its name suggests) produces waveforms of a low

frequency. These waveforms can be used to vary

the pitch, ﬁlter or amplitude of each Element to

create effects such as vibrato, wah and tremolo.

However, the actual available LFO parameters will

vary according to the type of Element.

The LFO is capable of producing a wide variety of

effects in various ways. By modulating the pitch

over an adjustable amount, it creates vibrato. By

modulating the ﬁlter over an adjustable range of

frequencies, it creates wah-wah and dynamic ﬁlter

sweep effects. By modulating the volume (or

“amplitude”) of the sound over an adjustable depth,

it creates tremolo.

5 Storing Edited Voices

Up to 128 new/edited Normal Voices and 2 new/edited

Drum Voices can be stored to internal user memory.

When storing a Voice, any existing data at the storage

location will be lost. You should always back up

important data to computer or some other storage

medium beforehand.

n For details about storing Voices, see page 89.

Attack

Level

Initial

Level

Attack

Time

is short.

Rate (R) is

set to a

large value.

Time

Initial

Level

Rate (R) is

set to a

small value.

Attack

Level

Attack

Time

is long.

Time

Level

EffectAMPFILTPITCH

OSC

Element

1~4

PEG FEG

AEGLFO

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

1 E

LFO Wave

tri

Normal Voice

USER

1~128

Drum Voice

USER DRUM

1~2

Voice

Store

Basics Section

Effects

In the ﬁnal stages of programming, you can set the effects parameters to further change the sound’s character. In

general, System Effects apply to the overall sound, whether it is a Voice, a Multi. Insertion Effects, on the other

hand, can be applied individually to each Voice. The S03 has two System Effect sections (Reverb and Chorus) plus a

Variation Effect section (see below).

Different effects settings can be set per Voice (in the Voice mode) and per Multi (in the Multi mode), though the

connection between the Effect sections will vary in each case.

Reverb Section

The Reverb section includes a selection of 11 different

reverb-type effects, including realistic simulations of

the natural reverberation found in various halls and

rooms. In the Multi mode, the Reverb settings will

apply to the Multi as a whole.

In the Voice mode, the Reverb Send parameter can be

set for each Voice.

Chorus Section

The Chorus section includes a selection of 11 chorus-

type effects, including a ﬂanger and others. Most of

these effects are ideal for adding thickness to the

sound. In the Multi mode, the Chorus settings will

apply to the Multi as a whole. In the Voice mode, the

Chorus Send parameter can be set for each Voice.

Variation Effects

A total of 42 different Effect types are available in the

Variation section. These range from conventional

effects such as Reverb, for enhancing the sound, to

wilder effects such as Distortion, for actively changing

the sound, or creating new sounds.

n For details about each Effect Type, refer to the Effect

Type List in the separate Data List.

System and Insertion Effects

The S03 effects sections can be designated as either

System or Insertion effects. Reverb and Chorus are

always System effects, which means they can be

applied to any or all Parts. The Variation effect can

also be a System effect, or it can be designated as an

Insertion effect, which means it can be dedicated to

a speciﬁc Part.

Basically, S03 System and Insertion effects work the

same way as in a sound mixer, as shown in the

diagram on the next page. For example, System

effects can be applied to instruments (i.e., Parts)

which are connected to the various mixer channels;

the amount of each System effect is determined by

channel “send” and system “return” level controls.

An Insertion effect can be connected (“inserted”)

into the signal ﬂow of a speciﬁc channel in order to

process the sound of that instrument (i.e., Voice/

Part) only.

In the Voice mode of the S03, the Insertion effect

(Variation) can be applied to a Voice, while in the

Multi Play mode it can only be applied to a single

Part.

The System and Insertion effect conﬁgurations can

be controlled in detail by XG song data (signiﬁed by

the XG mark) when the S03 is in the Multi Play

mode.

Effects in Voice Mode

In the Voice mode, you can set the Effect Send

parameter for the Reverb and Chorus sections, and

store them with each Voice.

For the Variation Effect, the Effect Type and the

various effect parameters can be set, as well as the

effect on/off setting for each Voice. The signals that

are processed by the Variation block are mixed and sent

to the Reverb and Chorus sections.

n Drum Voices in Voice mode have no Variation effect.

Effects in Multi Mode

Voice

Output

System Effects

Variation

Effect

Chorus

Basics Section

You can set the desired Effect type for each Effect

section as well as its parameter values for each Multi in

the Multi mode. By using Variation as an Insertion

effect, you can apply the effect to only one of the Parts

(see illustration below).

As shown in the illustration below, the Reverb section

and Chorus section function as System effects, which

process all of the Parts, according to each Part’s effect

send setting and the global effect return setting — just

like on an actual mixer. When using Variation as an

Insertion effect, the signal connection is serial, and the

effect is applied only to the selected Part — just like

patching in an outboard effect on a single instrument

channel.

Voice

* Depending on the selected effect type, the Dry/Wet parameter

may not be available. For details, refer to the Effect

Parameter List in the separate Data List booklet.

Multi

* Depending on the selected effect type, the Dry/Wet parameter

may not be available. For details, refer to the Effect

Parameter List in the separate Data List booklet.

* The default value of Dry Level is 127. This cannot be set

from the panel of the S03; however, it can be set by

transmitting appropriate MIDI messages from an external

device.

Part 1~16

Mixer

Variation Effect

Can be used as either System or

Insertion effect.

1 2 3 4 5 6 16

Insertion Effect

Reverb Effect

System Effects

Chorus Effect

Dry/Wet

Reverb (Rev)

(Fixed setting: Hall 1)

(Fixed setting: Chorus 1)

Chorus (Cho)

Chorus

Send

Total Lvl

Reverb Send

Out

SndChoRev

Variation (Var)

VOICE

Total Vol

Dry/Wet

SndChoRev

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Part 16

Rev Return

Cho Return

Chorus SendReverb Send

Var Connect=INS

Part 3 Var Send set to on

Out

Variation (Var)

Reverb (Rev)

Chorus (Cho)

Total Vol

Part 1

Part 2

Part 16

Rev

Return

Cho

Return

Var

Return

Dry Level

Var Send

Var Connect set to SYS

Out

SndVarRev

SndChoRev

SndvarCho

Chorus

Send

Reverb

Send

Variation (Var)

Reverb (Rev)

Chorus (Cho)

Total Vol

Multi Mode

Reference Section

Multi Mode

Multi Edit

In this mode, you can set Multi Edit parameters. These

can roughly be divided into Common parameters,

which apply to all Parts, and Part-speciﬁc parameters.

n You need to select the Multi before entering Multi Edit

mode (page 37). All parameters can be set and stored per

Multi.

n For details about using the Multi mode, see page 37.

n See page 28 on how to enter Multi Edit mode.

The E Indicator

If you alter any parameters in Multi Edit mode, the E

(Edit) indicator will be displayed in the PAGE

column of the screen after exiting from the Multi

Edit mode. This gives a quick indication that the

current Multi has been modiﬁed but not yet stored.

The Compar

e Function

Use this to listen to the difference between the Multi

with your edited settings and the same Multi prior to

editing.

1 Press the [COMPARE (EDIT)] button while in

Multi Edit mode. The EDIT LED will ﬂash and

the Multi settings prior to editing will temporarily

be reinstated for comparison purposes.

n While the Compare function is enabled, the DEC/NO

and INC/YES buttons cannot be used for editing.

2 Press the [EDIT] button again to disable the

Compare function and restore your recently

edited settings.

Switching Parts On/Off

In the Multi Edit mode, a Part can be switched on/

off when you press the [MUTE] button. The Part

indicator which is muted will ﬂash. This lets you

mute other Parts in the Multi so that you can listen

to the changes to the Part that you are editing.

Multi Store

The edited settings for the current Multi will be lost

if you select another Multi or mode. To avoid losing

important data, you should always use Multi Store to

store your edited Multi. For details about the Multi

Store procedure, see page 69.

n When creating a new Multi from scratch, it can be

useful, prior to editing, to clear the settings for the

current Multi using the Initialize Multi function in

the Multi Job mode (pages 67 and 68).

Common Edit and Editing Individual Parts

A Multi can consist of 16 Voice Parts (page 24). The

parameters common to all Parts are known as a

Common Edit. The Multi Edit mode can be divided

into screens for Common Edit and those for editing

each Part. In the Multi Edit mode, simultaneously

press both the [+] and [–] buttons to select the

Common Edit screens.

Init Mlt

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

MLT01

E P

KEYELEMPA RT

OCTAVE

PAG E

E P 1

Edit Indicator

GrandPno

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

XG001

1 P

Init Mlt

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Name

1 P

Part Edit screensCommon Edit screens

KEYELEMPA RT

OCTAVE

PAG E

1 P

KEYELEMPA RT

OCTAVE

PAG E

1 P 1

Part indicatorCommon indicator

Multi Mode

Common

(Settings for all Parts)

Here we explain how to edit common settings for all

Parts in a Multi. There are two types available, each of

which consists of multiple pages.

n Refer to the Function Tree chart (page 20) or the

Parameter Table (page 22).

Common General (PAGES 1 to 3)

Common Effect (PAGES 4 to 21)

1. Name

You can set a Multi Name consisting of up to 8

characters. You can also select the Category Name to

the left of the Multi Name.

n The method of setting the Multi Name is the same as for

the Voice Name. Details are given on page 71.

2. Total Vol (Total Volume)

Set the overall volume of the Multi.

❏ Settings: 0~127

3. Transpose

This determines the overall Transpose setting of the

Parts, in semitone units. It does not affect information

transmitted via MIDI.

❏ Settings: –24 (–2 octaves) ~ +24 (+2 octaves)

n This parameter has no effect for Parts set to the Drum

mode (page 61).

4. RevEF (Reverb Effect Type)

Select the Reverb Effect Type here, then set the effect’s

parameters in the following PAGES.

❏ Settings: Details are given in the Effect Type list in the

separate Data List.

5. Reverb Parameters

Set the various Reverb effect parameters.

❏ Settings: The number of parameters and the contents of each

screen will vary depending on the selected Effect

Type. Details are given in the Effect Type/

Parameter list in the separate Data List.

6. Rev Return (Reverb Return)

Set the Return level of the Reverb Effect.

❏ Settings: 0 ~ 127

Init Mlt

Name

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Total Vol

127

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Transpose

+00

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Hall 1

RevEF

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Rev Time

2.1

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Rev Return

064

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Common General/Common Effect

Multi Mode

7. Reverb Pan

Set the stereo pan position of the Reverb Effect.

❏ Settings: L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right)

n You can also enter the settings below using the numeric

keypad.

1~63: L63~L01

64: C (Center)

65~127: R01~R63

8. ChoEF (Chorus Effect Type)

Select the Chorus Effect Type here, then set the effect’s

parameters in the following PAGES.

❏ Settings: Details are given in the Effect Type list in the

separate Data List.

9. Chorus Parameters

Set the various Chorus effect parameters.

❏ Settings: The number of parameters and the contents of each

screen will vary depending on the selected Effect

Type. Details are given in the Effect Type/

Parameter list in the separate Data List.

10. Cho Return (Chorus Return)

Set the Return level of the Chorus Effect.

❏ Settings: 0 ~ 127

11. Chorus Pan

Set the stereo pan position of the Chorus Effect.

❏ Settings: L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right)

n You can also enter the settings below using the numeric

keypad.

1~63: L63~L01

64: C (Center)

65~127: R01~R63

12. SndCho➞Rev

(Send Chorus to Reverb)

Set the send level of the signal sent from the Chorus

Effect to the Reverb Effect.

❏ Settings: 0 ~ 127

13. VarEF (Variation Effect Type)

Select the Variation Effect Type here, then set the

effect’s parameters in the following PAGES.

❏ Settings: Details are given in the Effect Type list in the

separate Data List.

14. Variation Parameters

Set the various Variation effect parameters.

❏ Settings: The number of parameters and the contents of each

screen will vary depending on the selected Effect

Type. Details are given in the Effect Type/

Parameter list in the separate Data List.

Reverb Pan

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Chorus 1

ChoEF

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

LFO Freq

0.25

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Cho Return

064

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Chorus Pan

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

SndCho Rev

000

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Delay LCR

VarEF

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Common Effect

Multi Mode

15. VarConnect

(Variation Connection)

This determines how the Variation Effect is used in the

signal processing chain — as an Insertion effect or as a

System effect.

❏ Settings: INS (Insertion), SYS (System)

n The function of the Variation Effect changes depending

on this setting, as do the types of parameter changes.

n For more details on System and Insertion Effects, see

page 53.

16. Var Return (Variation Return)

Set the Return level of the Variation Effect.

❏ Settings: 0 ~ 127

n This can be set only when Variation Connection (above)

is set to “SYS.” When Variation Connection is set to

“INS,” “***” appears in the display and the setting

cannot be changed.

17. Var Pan (Variation Pan)

Set the stereo pan position of the Variation Effect.

❏ Settings: L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right)

n You can also enter the settings below using the numeric

keypad.

1~63: L63~L01

64: C (Center)

65~127: R01~R63

n This can be set only when Variation Connection (above)

is set to “SYS.” When Variation Connection is set to

“INS,” “***” appears in the display and the setting

cannot be changed.

18. SndVar➞Rev

(Send Variation to Reverb)

Set the send level of the signal sent from the Variation

Effect to the Reverb Effect.

❏ Settings: 0~127

n This can be set only when Variation Connection (above)

is set to “SYS.” When Variation Connection is set to

“INS,” “***” appears in the display and the setting

cannot be changed.

19. SndVar➞Cho

(Send Variation to Chorus)

Set the send level of the signal sent from the Variation

Effect to the Chorus Effect.

❏ Settings: 0~127

n This can be set only when Variation Connection (above)

is set to “SYS.” When Variation Connection is set to

“INS,” “***” appears in the display and the setting

cannot be changed.

20. MW VarCtl

(MW Variation Effect Control Depth)

This determines the degree to which the Modulation

wheel controls the Variation Effect.

❏ Settings: –64~+63

n This can be set only when Variation Connection (above)

is set to “INS.” When Variation Connection is set to

“SYS,” “***” appears in the display and the setting

cannot be changed.

n The particular parameter that can be controlled with the

Modulation wheel is ﬁxed for each of the Variation

effects. Refer to the separate Data List for details.

VarConnect

INS

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Var Return

064

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Var Pan

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

SndVar Rev

000

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

SndVar Cho

000

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

MW VarCtl

+00

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Common Effect

Multi Mode

21. AC1VarCtl

(AC1 Variation Effect Control Depth)

This determines the degree to which the Assignable

Controller 1 controls the Variation Effect.

❏ Settings: –64~+63

n This can be set only when Variation Connection (above)

is set to “INS.” When Variation Connection is set to

“SYS,” “***” appears in the display and the setting

cannot be changed.

n The particular parameter that can be controlled with the

Assignable Controller 1 is ﬁxed for each of the Variation

effects. Refer to the separate Data List for details.

n For information on the AC1, refer to AC1 CC No (pages

66 and 92 ) in the Multi and Utility modes.

Part

(Settings for each Part)

The following is an explanation of the Part parameters

used to edit each Multi.

n Refer to the Function Tree chart (page 20) or the

Parameter Table (page 22).

Voice Selection (PAGE 1)

Part Mix (PAGES 2 to 5)

Part General (PAGES 6 to 9)

Part Tone (PAGES 10 to 14)

Part Controller (PAGES 15 to 21)

Part Effect (PAGES 22 to 24)

1. Voice Selection

You can assign a Voice to each Part. Use the [+] and [–]

buttons to select the Part, then select its Voice. The

display will vary as follows according to the Memory

selected.

n Specify the particular Voice Memory by pressing the

appropriate Memory button: PRESET, USER or GM/XG.

n To select a Drum Voice, simultaneously hold down the

[DRUM] button and press the appropriate Memory

button: [USER] or [GM/XG].

n The Voice can be set by using the same method as with

Category Search (page 35).

n For details about Categories, refer to the Category List on

page 71. For details about using Category Search, see

page 35.

●PRESET

❏ Settings: PR001 ~ PR128

AC1VarCtl

+00

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

StPiano1

PR001

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Common Effect/Voice Selection

Multi Mode

●USER

❏ Settings: US001~US128, USDR01~USDR02

●GM/XG

Use the [E] and [F] buttons to switch among the

different banks for selecting program numbers.

❏ Settings:

Bank Select: BK*** (Refer to the XG Voice List and

XG Drum List in the separate Data List.

Program Number: XG001~XG128 (The actual number of

available programs differs depedning on

the selected bank. For details, refer to

the XG Voice List and XG Drum List in

the separate Data List.)

2. Volume

Set the output level of the Part.

❏ Settings: 0~127

3. Pan

Set the stereo pan position of the Part.

❏ Settings: Rnd (random; the pan position moves randomly

each time a key is played), L63 (Left) ~ C (Center)

~ R63 (Right)

n You can also enter the settings below using the numeric

keypad.

0: Rnd

1~63: L63~L01

64: C (Center)

65~127: R01~R63

4-1. NtLmt-L (Note Limit Low)

4-2. NtLmt-H (Note Limit High)

Set the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range

for each Part. Each Part will only sound for notes

played within its speciﬁed range.

❏ Settings: C-2 ~ G8

n You can set the lowest and highest notes in the range by

pressing notes on the keyboard while holding down the

[ENTER] button.

n For more information and some example settings, see

page 41.

5-1. VelLmt-L (Velocity Limit Low)

5-2. VelLmt-H (Velocity Limit High)

Set the minimum and maximum values of the velocity

range within which each Part will respond. Each Part

will only sound for notes played within its speciﬁed

velocity range.

❏ Settings: 1~127

Synth St

US001

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

GrandPno

XG001

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Volume

100

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Pan

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

NtLmt-L

C-2

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

NtLmt-H

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

VelLmt-L

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

VelLmt-H

127 001

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Voice Selection/Part Mix

Multi Mode

6. Rcv Ch (MIDI Receive Channel)

Set the MIDI Receive Channel for each Part. Each Part

receives MIDI messages according to the channel set

here. Select “off” for Parts that you do not want to

respond to MIDI.

❏ Settings: 1 ~ 16, off

n For information on setting the MIDI Receive channel in

the Voice mode, see page 94.

7-1. NoteShift

7-2. Detune

These parameters determine the pitch of each Part.

■ NoteShift

Set the amount (in semitones) by which the note

pitch is shifted.

❏ Settings: –24~0~+24

■ Detune

Determines the ﬁne tuning setting of the pitch. Use

this to create warm detuning effects by setting each

Part to a slightly different value.

❏ Settings: –12.8 (Hz)~0~+12.7 (Hz)

n Ignore the decimal place when inputting values from the

numeric keypad. For example, to enter the value “–1.5,”

press the following buttons in order: “–,” “1,” then “5.”

8. Mono/Poly

Select monophonic or polyphonic playback. Select

whether each Part is played back monophonically

(single notes only) or polyphonically (multiple

simultaneous notes).

❏ Settings: mono, poly

n When the Part Mode is set to “drum,” “***” appears in

the display and the parameter cannot be set.

9. Part Mode

This determines whether the Part uses Normal Voices

or Drum Voices.

❏ Settings:

norm (Normal Voice)

With this setting, Normal Voices can be assigned to

the Part.

drum (Drum Voice)

With this setting, Drum Voices can be assigned to

the Part.

drumS1/2 (Drum Setup 1/2)

Used to play commercially available song data

(switches automatically).

n The part set to a setting other than “norm” is called a

Drum Part.

n If you’ve edited a drum kit in Drum Voice Edit mode and

you wish to use that kit, set this to “drum.”

n When an XG System On message is received from an

external sequencer, this is automatically set to “drumS1.”

In order to use the settigs made in Drum Voice Edit,

record the appropriate message in the song data (Part

Mode set to Drum). Refer to the MIDI Data Format

section in the separate Data List.

F0 43 10 4C 08 nn 07 01 F7 (nn=Part number)

(hexadecimal)

Rcv Ch

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

NoteShift

+00

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Detune

-12.0

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Mono/Poly

poly

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Part Mode

norm

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Part General

Multi Mode

10-1. VelSnsDpt

(Velocity Sensitivity Depth)

10-2. VelSnsOfs

(Velocity Sensitivity Offset)

Set the Velocity Sensitivity and Velocity Offset for each

Part.

❏ Settings: 0~127

■ VelSnsDpt

As illustrated below, a large setting will cause large

changes in velocity when you play the keyboard.

Changes to velocity curve according to VelDepth

(with offset set to 64)

■ VelSnsOfs

As illustrated below, the velocity will be increased by

the speciﬁed amount.

Changes to velocity curve according to VelDepth

(with offset set to 64)

VelSnsDpt

064

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

VelSnsOfs

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

064

Offset=64

Received Velocity

Actual Velocity

for tone generator

Depth=64

Offset=64

Depth=32

Offset=64

Depth=0

Offset=64

Depth=127

Offset=64

Offset=96

Offset=32

Offset=127

Offset=64

Velocity=1

Received

Velocity

Actual Velocity

for tone generator

Depth=64

Offset=64

Depth=64

Offset=32

Depth=64

Offset=96

Depends on

offset

Depends on

offset

Part Tone

Multi Mode

11-1. Cutoff

11-2. Resonance

You can set Filter parameters to change the tonal

characteristics of each Part

Filter is the section of the tone generator that changes

the tonal qualities of a Voice by passing only a limited

frequency range and cutting signals outside that range.

The S03 employs an LPF (low pass ﬁlter).

❏ Settings: –64 ~ +63

■ Cutoff

Set the Cutoff frequency of the low pass ﬁlter. Only

frequencies below this point are passed.

■ Resonance

Set the amount of Resonance (harmonic boost)

applied to the signal around the Cutoff frequency.

This is a useful way of adding further character to

the sound.

12-1. Attack Tm (Attack Time)

12-2. Decay Tm (Decay Time)

12-3. Releas Tm (Release Time)

This determines the EG (Envelope Generator)

Parameters for each Part. There are three parameters

governing the transition in tone and output level from

the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the

moment it is released or the point at which the level

has faded to zero.

n These three parameters affect both the AEG and the

FEG.

❏ Settings: –64 ~ +63

■ Attack Tm

Determines the transition time from the moment a

key on the keyboard is pressed to the point at which

the level of the Voice reaches its peak. Positive

values will lengthen the transition time and negative

values will shorten it.

■ Decay Tm

Determines the transition time from the point at

which the level of the Voice reaches its peak to the

point at which it levels off. Positive values will

lengthen the transition time and negative values will

shorten it.

■ Releas Tm

Determines the transition time from when the key is

released to when the sound level decays to zero.

Positive values will lengthen the transition time and

negative values will shorten it.

Cutoff

+00

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Resonance

+00

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Frequency

Level

Cutoff

Cutoff range

Range passed

Frequen

Level

Cutoff

Resonance

Attack Tm

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Attack Tm

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Decay Tm

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Releas Tm

+00

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+00 +00

Key on Key off

Attack

Time

Release

Time

Decay

Time

Level

Part Tone

Multi Mode

13-1. PEGIntL (PEG Initial Level)

13-2. PEGAtkTm (PEG Attack Time)

13-3. PEGRelL (PEG Release Level)

13-4.

PEGRelTm (PEG Release Time)

You can set PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator)

Parameters for each Part. There are four parameters

that control how the pitch changes from the moment a

note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is

released or the point at which the level has faded to

zero.

❏ Settings: –64 ~ +63

■ PEGIntL

Determines the initial pitch, or the pitch that sounds

the moment the key is played.

■ PEGAtkTm

Determines the time it takes after you play the key

for the pitch to return to normal (or original), from

the pitch set in PEG Initial Level above.

■ PEGRelL

Determines the ﬁnal pitch that is reached after you

release your ﬁnger from the key.

■ PEGRelTm

Determines the time it takes for the pitch to reach

the setting made in PEG Release Level above, from

when you release your ﬁnger from the key.

14-1. Vib Rate (Vibrato Rate)

14-2. Vib Depth (Vibrato Depth)

14-3. Vib Delay (Vibrato Delay)

❏ Settings: –64 ~ +63

■ Vib Rate

Determines the speed of pitch modulation.

■ Vib Depth

Determines the depth or degree of pitch modulation.

n This Parameter is not available for Drum Parts.

■ Vib Delay

Determines the amount of time that elapses from

when a key is played to when the Vibrato effect

starts. The higher the value, the longer the delay

before the onset of the Vibrato effect.

n The Parameter is not available for Drum Parts.

PEGInitL

+00

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

PEGAtkTm

+00

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

PEGRelTm

+00

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

PEGRelL

+00

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Key off

Key on

Normal Pitch

Time

PEG

Attack

Time

PEG Initial Level

PEG

Release

Time

PEG Release Level

Vib Rate

+00

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Vib Depth

+00

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Vib Delay

+00

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Time

Rate

Key on

Delay

Depth

Part Tone

Multi Mode

15-1. Porta Sw

(Portamento Switch)

15-2. PortaTime (Portamento Time)

Set the Portamento parameters. Portamento creates a

smooth transition from the pitch of the ﬁrst note

played to the pitch of the next.

■ Porta Sw

Switch Portamento on or off.

❏ Settings: off, on

■ PortaTime

Set the pitch transition time. Higher values result in

longer transition times.

❏ Settings: 0~127

16. PB Range (Pitch Bend Range)

Set the amount (in semitones) by which the pitch of

the note is varied when you move the Pitch Bend wheel

up/down. For example, if you set a value of +12,

moving the wheel up raises the pitch by a maximum of

octave.

❏ Settings: –24~+24

17. MW FltCtl (MW Filter Control)

Set the depth of control of the Modulation wheel over

the ﬁlter cutoff frequency.

❏ Settings: –64~+63

18-1. MW PMod

(MW Pitch Modulation Depth)

18-2. MW FMod

(MW Filter Modulation Depth)

18-3. MW AMod (MW Amplitude

Modulation Depth)

These parameters let you set the depth of control the

Modulation wheel has over the pitch, ﬁlter and

amplitude modulation of the Voice.

❏ Settings: 0~127

■ MW PMod

Set the amount by which the pitch modulation

changes when the Modulation wheel is used. The

larger the setting, the greater the depth of control.

(The vibrato effect becomes deeper.)

■ MW FMod

Set the amount by which the ﬁlter Cutoff frequency

changes when the Modulation wheel is used. The

larger the setting, the greater the depth of control.

(The wah effect becomes deeper.)

■ MW AMod

Set the amount by which the amplitude modulation

changes when the Modulation Wheel is used. A

larger setting produces greater modulation depth.

(The tremolo effect becomes deeper.)

n Depending on the selected LFO wave type and the

amplitude modulation depth setting, noise may result

when the controller is moved. If this happens, reduce

the modulation depth value.

Porta Sw

off

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

15 P 1

PortaTime

000

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

15 P 1

PB Range

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+02

16 P 2

MW FltCtl

+00

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

17 P 1

MW PMod

010

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

18 P 1

MW FMod

000

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

18 P 1

MW AMod

000

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

18 P 1

Part Controller

Multi Mode

19. AC1 CC No

(AC1 Control Change Number)

Determines the Control Change number for the AC1

(Assignable Controller 1) of each Part

❏ Settings: 0~95

n The AC1 CC No parameter in the Voice mode is set in the

Utility mode (PAGE 7).

AC1 (Assignable Controller 1)

The AC1 (Assignable Controller 1) is only available

by using an external MIDI controller (such as a foot

controller connected to a MIDI keyboard). By

setting the AC1 Control Change number here to

match the controller on the connected MIDI device,

you can use that controller to change the sound,

according to the settings made in the other AC1

parameters — such as AC1FltCtl, AC1 FMod/PMod,

or the Variation Effect’s AC1VarCtl.

For example, by setting AC1 to “2” here, you can use

a breath controller to control the Voice of a Part.

If the connected MIDI controller is set to “0,” the

Part cannot be controlled, even by setting the proper

Control Change number. For best results, also make

sure that the sensitivity parameters (AC1FitCl, AC1

FMod/PMod, or the Variation Effect’s AC1VarCtl)

are set appropriately, as needed.

20. AC1FltCtl (AC1 Filter Control)

Set the amount by which the ﬁlter cutoff frequency

changes when the controller (Assignable Controller 1)

is used.

❏ Settings: –64~+63

21-1. AC1 FMod

(AC1 Filter Modulation Depth)

21-2. AC1 AMod

(AC1 Amplitude Modulation Depth)

These parameters let you set the depth of control the

Control Change messages (via Assignable Controller 1)

have over the ﬁlter and amplitude of the Part (Voice).

❏ Settings: 0~127

■ AC1 FMod

Set the amount by which the ﬁlter Cutoff frequency

changes when Assignable Controller 1 is used. The

larger the setting, the greater the depth of control.

(The wah effect becomes deeper.)

■ AC1 AMod

Set the depth of control that Assignable Controller 1

has over the amplitude modulation. A larger setting

means a larger modulation depth. (The tremolo

effect becomes deeper.)

n Depending on the selected LFO wave type and the

amplitude modulation depth setting, noise may result

when the controller is moved. If this happens, reduce

the modulation depth value.

22. ReverbSend

Set the send level of the Reverb Effect.

❏ Settings: 0~127

n In the value is too high, noise may result. If this happens,

reduce the value.

23. ChorusSend

Set the send level of the Chorus Effect.

❏ Settings: 0~127

AC1 CC No

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

19 P 1

AC1FltCtl

+00

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

20 P 1

AC1 FMod

000

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

21 P 1

AC1 AMod

000

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

21 P 1

ReverbSend

040

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

22 P 1

ChorusSend

000

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

23 P 1

Part Controller/Part Effect

Multi Mode

24. Var Send (Variation Send)

When the Variation effect is set as an Insertion effect,

this determines whether the Variation effect is applied

or not. When the Variation effect is set as an System

effect, this determines the send level for the effect.

(Make the Insertion/System setting from the Variation

Connection parameter (PAGE 15) in Multi Common

Edit; see page 58.)

❏ Settings:

When VarConnect is set to “INS”:

on (effect is applied), off (effect is not applied)

When VarConnect is set to “SYS”:

0~127

n When VarConnect is set to “INS,” this parameter

determines whether or not the Variation effect is applied

to the particular Part. In this condition, the Variation

effect cannot be used for several Parts at the same time.

Only the Part last selected will be routed through the

Variation effect. When VarConnect is set to “SYS,” this

parameter lets you adjust the send level for the Variation

effect for each Part. Also set the related Multi Common

Edit parameters (in PAGES 16 to 21) as desired.

n For more details on the Effects, see page 53.

Multi Job

You can perform various operations (Jobs) in the Multi

Job mode. For example, you can initialize Multis to

their original settings (including those currently being

edited) or copy Parts.

n Before entering the Multi Job mode and using the

Initialize or Copy function, you must select the Multi you

wish to use the particular operation on (page 37).

n For details about how to enter the Multi Job mode, see

page 28.

Performing a Job

1In the Multi Play mode, select the Multi Number you

wish to perform the Job on.

2Press the [JOB] button to enter the Multi Job mode.

3Use the [

▲][▼] buttons and switch to the screen

showing the Job you wish to perform.

4Use the [DEC/NO] and [INC/YES] buttons to select

the parameter you wish to perform the Job on.

n This step is not applicable for the Bulk Dump Job.

n Use the [+]/[–] buttons to set the Part or destination

Part when using Init Part/CpyVar/CpyCtl or Copy Part

(CpyPart).

5When you press the [ENTER] button, you will be

prompted for conﬁrmation.

6Press the [INC/YES] button to conﬁrm. A

“Completed” message appears when the Job has

been completed, and operation returns to the

original screen.

Press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel the Job.

n For Jobs that take longer to process, you will see the

message “Executing” during processing. If you switch

off the power to the S03 while this message is

displayed, you risk corrupting your data.

7Press the [Multi] button to exit the Multi Job mode

and return to the Multi Play mode.

Var Send

off

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

24 P 1

Init

multi

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Init

Sure?

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Part Effect

Multi Mode

1. Init (Initialize)

You can reset (initialize) all parameters of a Multi to

their default settings. You can also selectively initialize

certain parameters, such as Common settings, settings

for each Part, and so on. Note that this does not return

the Multi to its original state prior to editing. Instead,

it is useful when building a completely new Multi from

scratch.

■ Select Parameter Type to be Initialized

Use the [DEC/NO] and [INC/YES] buttons to select

the parameter to be initialized. When this is set to

“Part,” use the [+]/[–] buttons to select the desired

Part (1 - 16).

❏ Settings: multi (Current Multi), cmmn (Current

Common), part (Current Part 1 ~ 16)

2. CpyVar (Copy Variation Effect)

When Var Connect is set to “SYS,” this lets you copy

the Effect settings for the Voice assigned to the Current

Part.

When Var Connect is set to “INS,” this lets you copy

the Variation Effect settings for the Voice assigned to

the Part for which “Var Send” (PAGE 24 in Multi Part

Edit) was set to “on.” If all of the Parts’ Var Send

settings are “off,” the Part having the Voice Effect

settings to be copied can be selected, just as above

(when Var Connect is set to “SYS”).

❏ Settings:

P1 ~ P16 (Part 1 ~ 16) (When Var Connect is set to “SYS,”

or when Var Connect is set to “INS” and all Parts’ Var Send

settings are “off.”)

No Parameter (When Var Connect is set to “INS” and one

Part’s Var Send settings is “on.”)

n The following parameters can be copied.

• Variation Effect Type

• Variation Parameters

• MW Variation Control Depth

• AC1 Variation Control Depth

n When you copy the Variation effect data of a Drum Voice,

the 2 Band EQ effect settings are copied.

3. CpyCtl (Copy Controller)

This let you copy the Controller settings for the Voice

assigned to the Part.

❏ Settings: 1 ~ 16, A (All Parts)

n The following parameters can be copied.

• MW Filter Control

• MW Pitch Modulation Depth

• MW Filter Modulation Depth

• MW Amplitude Modulation Depth

• Pitch Bend Range

• AC1 Filter Control

• AC1 Filter Modulation Depth

• AC1 Amplitude Modulation Depth

• Portamento Switch

• Portamento Time

4. CpyPart (Copy Part)

This lets you copy Part parameter settings of the Multi

being edited to another Part in the same Part. Use the

[DEC/NO] and [INC/YES] buttons to select the source

Part. Use the [–] and [+] buttons to select the desired

destination Part (1 - 16).

❏ Settings: P1 ~ P16 (Part 1 ~ 16)

5. BlkDmp (Bulk Dump)

You can send all the parameter settings for the current

Multi or all Multis to your computer or some other

external MIDI device using Bulk Dump.

❏ Settings: Curnt (Current Multi), All (All Multis), Systm

(All Utility and MIDI data)

n To send Voice data, refer to the corresponding Bulk

Dump function in the Voice Jobs (page 88).

n In order to perform a Bulk Dump, the appropriate MIDI

Device Number must be set. For details, see page 93.

n For an application example showing how to use the Bulk

Dump function, see page 42.

Init

multi

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

CpyVar

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

CpyVar

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

2 2 P 1

Var Connect=INSVar Connect=SYS

CpyCtl

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

3 P 1

CpyPart

P 02

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

4 P 1

source Partdesired destination

Part (1 - 16)

BlkDmp

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Curnt

Multi Mode

Multi Store

You can store (save) your original parameter settings

for up to 32 Multis to User Memory. The procedure is

as follows.

n When you perform this, the settings for the destination

Multi will be overwritten. Important data should always

be backed up to computer, Yamaha MIDI Data Filer

MDF3 or some other storage device.

1Press the [STORE] button after editing a Multi.

The Multi Store screen appears.

2Use [DEC/NO] and [INC/YES] buttons to select the

destination Multi Number.

3When you press the [ENTER] button, you will be

prompted for conﬁrmation.

4Press the [INC/YES] button to conﬁrm. The

message “Executing” will be displayed while the Job

is being processed. When it has been completed, a

“Completed” message appears, and operation

returns to the Multi Play mode.

n You can press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel the Job.

This will return you to the original screen.

Store

MLT01

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Store

Sure?

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Voice Mode

Voice Edit

There are two types of Voices: Normal Voices and

Drum Voices. The following is an explanation of the

parameters used to edit each Voice.

n Details about the Voice types and the Voice Memories are

given on Page 25.

n For more information on playing Voices, see page 33.

n You need to select the Voice before entering Voice Edit

mode (Page 33). All parameters can be set and stored per

Voice.

n See page 28 on how to enter Voice Edit mode.

The E Indicator

If you alter any parameters in Voice Edit mode, the E

(Edit) indicator will be displayed in the PAGE

column of the screen after exiting from the Voice

Edit mode. This gives a quick indication that the

current Voice has been modiﬁed but not yet stored.

The Compare Function

Use this to listen to the difference between the Voice

with your edited settings and the same Voice prior to

editing.

1 Press the [COMPARE (EDIT)] button while in

Voice Edit mode. The EDIT LED will ﬂash and

the Voice settings prior to editing will temporarily

be reinstated for comparison purposes.

n While the Compare function is enabled, the DEC/

NO and INC/YES buttons cannot be used for

editing.

2 Press the [EDIT] button again to disable the

Compare function and restore your recently

edited settings.

Switching Elements On/Off

In Voice Edit Mode, an Element can be switched on/

off when you press the [MUTE] button. This lets

you mute other Elements in the Voice so that you

can listen to the changes to the Element that you are

editing.

Voice Store

The edited settings for the current Voice will be lost

if you select another Voice or mode. To avoid losing

important data, you should always use Voice Store to

store your edited Voice. For details about the Voice

Store procedure, see page 89.

n When creating a new Voice from scratch, it can be

useful, prior to editing, to clear the settings for the

current Voice using the Initialize Voice function in

the Voice Job mode (pages 87 and 88).

Normal Voice

When editing Normal Voices, there are 52 PAGES

consisting of 17 Common Edit settings (common to all

four Elements) and 35 Element-speciﬁc settings.

n For information on how to switch between the Common

Edit displays and the Element Edit displays, see page 48.

n Many parameters are the same as those for the Multis.

For details about those parameters, see page 22.

n Refer to the Function Tree chart (page 20) or the

Parameter Table (page 22).

GrandPno

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

XG001

KEYELEMPA RT

OCTAVE

PAG E

Edit indicator

PART ELEMENT KEY

MUTE

COMMON

Voice Mode

Common General (PAGES 1 to 4)

Common Controller (PAGES 5 to 10)

Common Effect (PAGES 11 to 17)

The following is an explanation of the Common

parameters used to edit each Voice.

1. Name

You can set a Voice Name consisting of up to 8

characters. You can also select the Category Name to

the left of the Voice Name.

Setting the Voice Name

1 Use the [E] and [F] buttons to move the

cursor to the position of the next character. By

assigning a Category Name, it will be easier to

identify the Voice later. The Category Search

function (page 35) can also be used to search for

it. If no Category Name is set, the Category will

be shown as two hyphens.

2 Use the [E] and [F] buttons to move the

cursor to the position of the ﬁrst character. The

selected character will ﬂash.

3 Use the [DEC/NO] and [INC/YES] buttons to

enter an alphabetic character/symbol or use the

numeric keypad to enter a numeric character.

4 Use the [E] and [F] buttons to move the

cursor to the position of the next character.

5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until all the characters have

been set for your Voice Name.

❏ Available numbers and letters

2-1. Total Vol (Total Volume)

2-2. Total Lvl (Total Level)

Set the output level of the Voice. Total Volume

determines the overall volume, including the applied

effect. Total Level determines the level of the Voice

that is sent to the effect.

❏

Settings: 0~127

3. Mono/Poly

Select monophonic or polyphonic playback. Select

whether a voice is played back monophonically (single

notes only) or polyphonically (multiple simultaneous

notes).

❏

Settings: mono, poly

GrandPno

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Name

1 E

3456789 : ; <=>?@ BCDEA

FGH I JKLMNOPQRSTUVWX

YZ gh i j k[¥]^_`abcdef

tuvwxyzl

m nopqr s { | }

!"#$%&'()

+ ,-./ 120

LCD

––

Category

Synth Comping

Chromatic Percussion

Drums

Sound Effects

Musical Effects

Combination

Musical Effects/Combination

Total Vol

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

127

2 E

Total Lvl

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

127

2 E

Mono/Poly

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

poly

3 E

Common General

Voice Mode

4-1. VelSnsDpt

(Velocity Sensitivity Depth)

4-2. VelSnsOfs

(Velocity Sensitivity Offset)

The parameters and settings are the same as those for

the Multis. For details, see page 62.

5-1. Porta Sw (Portamento Switch)

5-2. PortaTime (Portamento Time)

6. PB Range (Pitch Bend Range)

7. MW FltCtl (MW Filter Control)

8-1. MW PMod

(MW Pitch Modulation Depth)

8-2. MW FMod

(MW Filter Modulation Depth)

8-3. MW AMod

(MW Amplitude Modulation Depth)

9. AC1FltCtl (AC1 Filter Control)

10-1. AC1 FMod

(AC1 Filter Modulation Depth)

10-2. AC1 AMod

(AC1 Amplitude Modulation Depth)

The parameters and settings are the same as those for

the Multis. For details, see pages 65 and 66.

11. ReverbSend

12. ChorusSend

The parameters and settings are the same as those for

the Multis. For details, see page 66.

13. SndChoﬁRev

(Send Chorus to Reverb)

14. VarEF (Variation Effect Type)

15. Variation Parameters

The parameters and settings are the same as those for

the Multis. For details, see page 57.

16. MW VarCtl

(MW Variation Effect Control Depth)

17. AC1 VarCtl

(AC1 Variation Effect Control Depth)

The parameters and settings are the same as those for

the Multis. For details, see pages 58 and 59.

Voice Mode/Multi Mode Parameters

Normal Voice

Multi Part Owner's

Common Edit

LCD (parameter name) Edit PAGE Manual

PAGE Page

4-1 VelSnsDpt (Velocity Sensitivity Depth) 10-1 62

4-2 VelSnsOfs (Velocity Sensitivity Offset) 10-2 62

5-1 Porta Sw (Portamento Switch) 15-1 65

5-2 PortaTime (Portamento Time) 15-2 65

6 PB Range (Pitch Bend Range) 16 65

7 MW FltCtl (MW Filter Control) 17 65

8-1 MW PMod (MW Pitch Modulation Depth) 18-1 65

8-2 MW FMod (MW Filter Modulation Depth) 18-2 65

8-3 MW AMod (MW Amplitude Modulation Depth) 18-3 65

9AC1FltCtl (AC1 Filter Control) 20 65

10-1 AC1 FMod (AC1 Filter Modulation Depth) 21-1 66

10-2 AC1 AMod (AC1 Amplitude Modulation Depth) 21-2 66

11 ReverbSend 22 66

12 ChorusSend 23 66

Multi Common

Edit PAGE

13 SndChoRev (Send Chorus to Reverb) 12 57

14 VarEF (Variation Effect Type) 13 57

15 Variation Parameters 14 57

16 MW VarCtl (MW Variation Effect Control Depth) 20 58

17 AC1 VarCtl (AC1 Variation Effect Control Depth) 21 59

Common General/Common Controller/Common Effect

Voice Mode

Element Oscillator/Mixer

(PAGES 1 to 6)

Element Pitch (PAGES 7 to 12)

Element Filter (PAGES 13 to 22)

Element Amplitude (PAGES 23 to 31)

Element LFO (PAGES 32 to 35)

The following is an explanation of the Element

parameters used to edit each Voice.

n The Element settings whose Element Switch is set to

“off” can not be changed and “***” appears in the

display.

1. Element Sw (Element Switch)

This determines whether each Element sounds or not.

❏

Settings: off, on

2. Wave Selection

Select the Wave. Each Element can be assigned a

different wave (sound).

❏

Settings: 1 ~ 453

n Wave numbers indicated with an asterisk (*) and Wave

names indicated with an “at” mark (@) have ﬁxed

parameter values (depending on the sound range). For

these waves, Element editing is limited to the parameters

below. All other parameters’ values are replaced by a

series of asterisks in the LCD, indicating that they cannot

be set.

• Element Switch

• Wave Selection

• Note Shift

• Note Limit Low/High

• Velocity Limit Low/High

• Pitch Scale Sensitivity

• Pitch Scale Center Note

3. Level

Set the output level of each Element.

❏

Settings: 0 ~ 255

4. Pan

Set the Stereo Pan position for each wave.

❏

Settings: Scale, L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right)

Scale: Set the amount by which the sound is panned

left and right according to the position of the note on

the keyboard.

n You can also enter the settings below using the numeric

keypad.

0: Scale

1~63: L63~L01

64: C (Center)

65~127: R01~R63

5-1. NtLmt-L (Note Limit Low)

5-2. NtLmt-H (Note Limit High)

Set the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range

for each Element. Each Element will only sound for

notes played within its speciﬁed range.

❏

Settings: C-2~G8

n You can set the lowest and highest notes in the range by

pressing notes on the keyboard while holding down the

[ENTER] button.

Element Sw

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

1 E 1

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

PianoL@

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

W*001

2 E 1

Wave category

Wave Name

Wave Number

Level

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

240

3 E 1

Pan

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

4 E 1

NtLmt-L

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

C-2

5 E 1

NtLmt-H

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

5 E 1

Element Oscillator/Mixer

Voice Mode

6-1. VelLmt-L (Velocity Limit Low)

6-2. VelLmt-H (Velocity Limit High)

Set the minimum and maximum values of the velocity

range within which each Element will respond. Each

Element will only sound for notes played within its

speciﬁed velocity range.

❏

Settings: 1~127

7-1. NoteShift

7-2. Detune

These parameters determine the pitch of each Element.

❏

Settings: –63~0~+63

■ NoteShift

Set the amount (in semitones) by which the note

pitch is shifted.

■ Detune

Determines the ﬁne tuning setting of the pitch.

8-1. PchSclSns

(Pitch Scale Sensitivity)

8-2. PchSclCN

(Pitch Scale Center Note)

You can set the Pitch Scaling for each Element. Pitch

Scaling controls the pitch according to the positions of

the notes on the keyboard.

■ PchSclSns

Adjust the sensitivity of the Pitch Scaling for each

Element according to the position of the note on the

keyboard. The “PchSclCN” parameter (below) is

used as the basic pitch for this parameter.

The higher the value, the lower the pitch becomes

when playing low notes, and the higher the pitch

becomes when playing high notes.

❏

Settings: 0%, 5%, 10%, 20%, 50%, 100% At +100%,

adjacent notes are pitched one semitone (100

cents) apart.

■ PchSclCN

Set the basic pitch used by the PchSclSns parameter

(above).

❏ Settings: C-2~G8

n You can also set this parameter by pressing the

respective note on the keyboard while holding down

the [ENTER] button.

VelLmt-L

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

001

6 E 1

VelLmt-H

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

127

6 E 1

NoteShift

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+00

7 E 1

Detune

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+00

7 E 1

PchSclSns

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

100%

8 E 1

PchSclCN

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

8 E 1

Center(Basic Pitch)

Higher range

Lower range

Large

Small

–

Speed of

pitch change

Element Oscillator/Mixer/Element Pitch

Voice Mode

9-1. PEGAtkR (PEG Attack Rate)

9-2. PEGDcy1R (PEG Decay 1 Rate)

9-3. PEGDcy2R (PEG Decay 2 Rate)

9-4. PEGRelR (PEG Release Rate)

You can set various Rate parameters (the time it takes

for the pitch to change from one level to the next) for

the Pitch Envelope Generator (PEG). Combined with

the PEG Level settings below, these can be used control

the change in sound from the moment a note is pressed

on the keyboard to the moment it is released (see

illustration below). You can set different values for

each Element.

❏

Settings: 0~63

10-1. PEGInitL (PEG Initial Level)

10-2. PEGAtkL (PEG Attack Level)

10-3.

PEGDcy1L (PEG Decay 1 Level)

10-4. PEGSusL (PEG Sustain Level)

10-5. PEGRelL (PEG Release Level)

You can set various Level parameters for the Pitch

Envelope Generator (PEG). Combined with the Rate

settings above (PEG Atk/Dcy 1/Dcy 2/Rel R), these

can be used control the change in sound from the

moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the

moment it is released (see illustration below). You can

set different values for each Element.

❏

Settings: –2400~+2400

Pitch Envelope Generator Settings

You can set four Rate parameters (which control

how fast the pitch changes from one Level to the

next) and ﬁve Level (pitch) parameters, which

control the change in pitch from the moment you

press a note on the keyboard to the moment you

release it. The Initial Level and Attack Rate settings

determines from what pitch the note starts when it

is played and the time it takes to reach the Attack

Level pitch setting. The Decay 1 and 2 Rates control

how long it takes for the pitch to reach the Decay 1

and 2 Levels, respectively. Finally, the Release Rate

and Release Level parameters determine the ﬁnal

pitch that the sound goes to when a key is released

and how long it takes to reach that pitch.

In the illustration, the letters a - d indicate the

respective Rate (R) settings for Attack - Release.

The greater the value for each Rate, the faster the

pitch goes to the next set Level — in other words, the

time it takes for the pitch to change (between Level

settings) becomes shorter. Velocity Sensitivity and

other parameters can also be set if required.

PEGAtkR

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

9 E 1

PEGDcy1R

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

9 E 1

PEGDcy2R

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

9 E 1

PEGRelR

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

9 E 1

PEGInitL

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+0000

10 E 1

PEGAtkL

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+0000

10 E 1

PEGDcy1L

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+0000

10 E 1

PEGSusL

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+0000

10 E 1

PEGRelL

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+0000

10 E 1

Release

Level

Attack

Level

Attack

Time

Initial

Level

Decay1

Time

Decay2

Time

Release

Time

Decay1

Level

Sustain

Level Key off

Time

Pitch

Element Pitch

Voice Mode

11-1.

PEGSclSns (PEG Scale Sensitivity)

11-2.

PEGSclCN (PEG Scale Center Note)

You can set PEG scale parameters for each Element.

These parameters control the PEG speed and the

degree of pitch change according to the position of the

notes played on the keyboard.

■ PEGSclSns

This determines the sensitivity of the PEG Rates for

each element to note position. In other words, the

speed of the pitch change varies according to the

range of the keyboard that is played. The PEGSclCN

parameter below is used as the basic or central pitch

for this parameter. A positive setting will cause

slower changes for lower notes and faster changes

for higher notes. A negative setting will have the

opposite effect.

❏

Settings: –7~+7

■ PEGSclCN

This determines the basic or central pitch used by

the PEG Scale Sensitivity parameter above. When

the center note is played, the PEG behaves according

to its actual settings. The pitch change

characteristics for other notes will vary in

proportion to the EG Rate settings.

❏

Settings: C-2~G8

n You can also set this parameter by pressing the

respective note on the keyboard while holding down

the [ENTER] button.

12-1. PEGRtVel (PEG Rate Velocity)

12-2.

PEGLvlVel (PEG Level Velocity)

This determines how the Pitch Envelope Generator

(PEG) responds to note velocity.

❏

Settings: –7~+7

■ PEGRtVel

Set the velocity sensitivity of the PEG’s Rate (speed)

parameters. Positive settings will cause the pitch to

rised when you play the keyboard harder (for a large

Velocity value). A negative setting will have the

opposite effect.

■ PEGLvlVel

Set the velocity sensitivity of the PEG Level.

Positive settings will cause the pitch to rise the

harder you play the keyboard and negative settings

will cause it to fall.

PEGSclSns

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

11 E 1

PEGSclCN

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

11 E 1

Basic pitch

Higher range

Lower range

Basic pitch

Higher range

Lower range

–

Speed of PEG

pitch change

Speed of PEG

pitch change

Positive value

Negative value

–

PEGRtVel

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

12 E 1

PEGLvlVel

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

12 E 1

Element Pitch

Voice Mode

13-1. Cutoff

13-2. Resonance

You can set Filter parameters to change the tonal

characteristics of each Element.

Filter is the section of the tone generator that changes

the tonal qualities of a Voice by passing only a limited

frequency range and cutting signals outside that range.

The S03 employs an LPF (low pass ﬁlter).

■ Cutoff

Set the Cutoff frequency of the low pass ﬁlter. Only

frequencies below this point are passed.

❏

Settings: 0~2047

■ Resonance

Set the amount of Resonance (harmonic boost)

applied to the signal around the Cutoff frequency.

This is a useful way of adding further character to

the sound.

❏

Settings: 0~63

14-1. CutoffVel

(Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity)

14-2. ResoVel

(Resonance Velocity Sensitivity)

You can set Filter Sensitivity parameters for each

Element.

❏

Settings: 0~15

■ CutoffVel

Set the sensitivity of the Cutoff frequency to note

velocity. A positive setting will raise the Cutoff

frequency for notes played harder, and lower it for

notes played more softly.

■ ResoVel

Set the sensitivity of the selected Resonance

parameter to note velocity. A positive setting will

produce large Resonance changes for notes played

harder, and smaller changes for notes played more

softly.

15. FltSclFlag (Filter Scale Flag)

You can set the Filter Scaling type. Filter Scaling

controls the ﬁlter cutoff frequency according to the

positions of the notes on the keyboard. There are four

Break Points in the Flt BP screen (PAGE 16) used to

divide and assign different settings across the

keyboard. The Levels (Offsets) at each of Break Point

are set in the Flt Ofs screen (PAGE 17).

n Details about Filter Scaling are given later in the section

“Filter Scaling Settings” on page 78.

❏ Settings: brk.p (applies the BP parameter settings in the

following pages), table (applies the settings which

are preset for each voice)

n The “table” setting is effective only for XG Voices.

Cutoff

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

0000

13 E 1

Resonance

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

13 E 1

Frequency

Level

Cutoff

Cutoff range

Range passed

Resonance

CutoffVel

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

14 E 1

ResoVel

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

14 E 1

FltSclFlag

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

brk.p

15 E 1

Element Filter

Voice Mode

16-1. Flt BP1

(Filter Scale Break Point 1)

16-2. Flt BP2

(Filter Scale Break Point 2)

16-3. Flt BP3

(Filter Scale Break Point 3)

16-4. Flt BP4

(Filter Scale Break Point 4)

Set the Break Points for each Element. BP1 to BP4 will

be automatically be arranged in ascending order across

the keyboard.

❏

Settings: Flt BP1~Flt BP4: C-2 ~ G8

17-1. Flt Ofs1

(Filter Scale Offset 1)

17-2. Flt Ofs2

(Filter Scale Offset 2)

17-3. Flt Ofs3

(Filter Scale Offset 3)

17-4. Flt Ofs4

(Filter Scale Offset 4)

Set the Filter Scaling Offset Levels. These Offsets are

used by the Break Points (BP1/BP2/BP3/BP4).

n Details about Filter Scaling are given later in the section

“Filter Scaling Settings”on page 78.

❏ Settings: Flt Ofs1~Flt Ofs4: –128 ~ +127

18-1. FltSclSns

(Filter Scale Sensitivity)

18-2. FltSclVel

(Filter Scale Velocity Sensitivity)

❏ Settings: 0~15

■ FltSclSns

Determines the Time Scale (the speed of change in

the FEG over the range of the keyboard) for each

Element. The higher the value, the slower the

change for lower notes and the faster the change for

higher notes.

■ FltSclVel

Determines the velocity sensitivity of the FEG Level.

For higher values, the more strongly you play the

keys, the greater the sound change (FEG Level)

becomes.

Filter Scaling Settings

By way of example, you could set the Levels (Offsets)

and Break Points (BP1 to BP4) as follows.

Here, the current Cutoff setting is 64. The Offsets

are –4 at BP1 (set to note E1), +10 at BP2 (set to

note B2), +17 at BP3 (set to note G4) and +4 at

BP4 (set to A5). That is, the Cutoff frequencies at

each Break Point are 60, 74, 81 and 68, respectively.

For other notes, the Cutoff frequencies will be on the

straight line connecting the two adjacent Break

Points.

n The Break Point Levels are Offsets used to increase

or decrease the current Cutoff setting at the

speciﬁed notes. Regardless of the size of these

Offsets, the minimum and maximum Cutoff limits

(values of 0 and 127, respectively) cannot be

exceeded.

n A note set below the BP1 will become the BP1

Level. A note set above BP4 will become the BP4

Level.

Flt BP1

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

16 E 1

Flt BP2

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

16 E 1

Flt BP3

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

16 E 1

Flt BP4

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

16 E 1

Flt Ofs2

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+010

17 E 1

Flt Ofs1

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

-004

17 E 1

Flt Ofs3

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+017

17 E 1

Flt Ofs4

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+004

17 E 1

FltSclSns

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

18 E 1

FltSclVel

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

18 E 1

1234

E1 B2 G4 A5

–4

Ofs

+10 +17 +4

Element Filter

Voice Mode

19-1. FEGHoldR (FEG Hold Rate)

19-2. FEGAtkR (FEG Attack Rate)

19-3.

FEGDcy1R (FEG Decay 1 Rate)

19-4.

FEGDcy2R (FEG Decay 2 Rate)

19-5. FEGRelR (FEG Release Rate)

You can set various Rate parameters (the time it takes

to get from one Level to the next) for the Filter

Envelope Generator (FEG). Combined with the FEG

Level settings, these can be used control the change in

sound from the moment a note is pressed on the

keyboard to the moment it is released (see illustration

below). You can set different values for each Element.

❏

Settings: 0~127

20-1. FEGInitL (FEG Initial Level)

20-2. FEGAtkL (FEG Attack Level)

20-3.

FEGDcy1L (FEG Decay 1 Level)

20-4. FEGSusL (FEG Sustain Level)

20-5. FEGRelL (FEG Release Level)

You can set the Level parameters for the Filter

Envelope Generator (FEG). Combined with the Rate

settings above (FEG Hold/Atk/Dcy1/Dcy2/Rel R),

these can be used control the change in sound from the

moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the

moment it is released (see illustration below). You can

set different values for each Element.

❏

Settings: –2047~+2047

Filter Envelope Generator Settings

There are ﬁve Rate settings (controlling the speed of

changes to the sound) and ﬁve Level settings

(controlling the amount of ﬁltering applied). As

soon as a note is played, the ﬁlter is ﬁxed at the

Initial Level setting, and maintains that level for the

length of time set in Hold Rate. The degree to which

the ﬁlter changes after that is determined by the

Attack Level and Decay 1 and 2 Levels; the time it

takes between those changes is determined by the

Attack Rate and Decay 1 and 2 Rates. When the

note is released, the change in tone is determined by

the Release Rate/Level settings.

In the illustration, the letters a - d indicate the

respective Rate (R) settings for Attack - Release.

The greater the value for each Rate, the faster the

ﬁlter goes to the next set Level — in other words, the

time it takes for the ﬁlter to change (between Level

settings) becomes shorter. Velocity Sensitivity and

other parameters can also be set if required.

21.

FEGSclSens (FEG Scale Sensitivity)

You can set the FEG Scale parameters for each

Element. This parameter controls the Filter Cutoff and

FEG behavior according to the position of the notes

played on the keyboard.

n The availability of the FEG Scale parameter depends on

the Break Point and Offset settings in the Flt BP/Flt Ofs

PAGES above.

❏ Settings: 0~15

FEGHoldR

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

127

19 E 1

FEGDcy1R

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

000

19 E 1

FEGDcy2R

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

000

19 E 1

FEGRelR

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

000

19 E 1

FEGAtkR

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

127

19 E 1

FEGInitL

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+0000

20 E 1

FEGAtkL

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+0000

20 E 1

FEGDcy1L

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+0000

20 E 1

FEGSusL

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+0000

20 E 1

FEGRelL

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+0000

20 E 1

Release

Level

Attack

Level

Attack

Time

Initial

Level

Decay1

Time

Decay2

Time

Release

Time

Decay1

Level

Sustain

Level

Key off

Time

Level

FEGSclSens

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

21 E 1

Center(Basic Pitch) Higher rangeLower range

Large

Small

–

Speed of AEG

level change

Element Filter

Voice Mode

22-1. FEGAtkVel

(FEG Attack Velocity)

22-2. FEGOthVel

(FEG Other Velocity)

You can set parameters controlling the sensitivity of

the Filter Envelope Generator (FEG) to note velocity.

■ FEGAtkVel

Determines the velocity sensitivity of the FEG

Attack Rate.

❏

Settings: –7~+7

■ FEGOthVel

Determines the velocity sensitivity of all FEG Rates,

other than Attack Rate.

❏ Settings: –7~+7

23-1. AEGAtkR (AEG Attack Rate)

23-2. AEGDcy1R

(AEG Decay 1 Rate)

23-3. AEGDcy2R

(AEG Decay 2 Rate)

23-4. AEGRelR

(AEG Release Rate)

You can set various Rate parameters (the time it takes

for the volume to change from one level to the next) for

the Amplitude Envelope Generator (AEG). Combined

with the AEG Level settings below, these can be used

control the change in output level from the moment a

note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is

released (see illustration below). You can set different

values for each Element.

❏

Settings: 0~127

n For example, if the AEG Release Rate is set to a small

value, the sustain becomes long.

24-1. AEGInitL (AEG Initial Level)

24-2. AEGDcy1L

(AEG Decay 1 Level)

24-3. AEGSusL (AEG Sustain Level)

You can set various Level parameters for the

Amplitude Envelope Generator (AEG). Combined

with the Rate settings above (AEG Atk/Dcy 1/Dcy 2/

Rel R), these can be used control the change in output

level from the moment a note is pressed on the

keyboard to the moment it is released (see illustration

below). You can set different values for each Element.

❏

Settings: 0~255

Amplitude Envelope Generator Settings

There are four Rate settings (which control how fast

the volume changes from one Level to the next) and

three Level settings (which control the actual

volume). When you play a key, the volume goes to

the Initial Level, at the speed set in Attack Rate.

From there it goes to the Decay and Sustain Levels,

at speeds set in Decay 1 and 2 Rates, respectively.

When the note is released, the volume goes down to

zero, at the speed set in Release Rate.

In the illustration below, the letters a - d indicate the

respective Rate (R) settings for Attack - Release.

The greater the value for each Rate, the faster the

ﬁlter goes to the next set Level — in other words, the

time it takes for the volume to change (between

Level settings) becomes shorter. Velocity Sensitivity

and other parameters can also be set if required.

FEGAtkVel

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

22 E 1

FEGOthVel

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

22 E 1

AEGAtkR

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

127

23 E 1

AEGDcy1R

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

000

23 E 1

AEGDcy2R

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

000

23 E 1

AEGRelR

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

000

23 E 1

AEGInitL

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

255

24 E 1

AEGDcy1L

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

255

24 E 1

AEGSusL

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

255

24 E 1

Release

Level

Attack

Level

Init

Level

Attack

Time

Decay1

Time

Decay2

Time

Release

Time

Decay1

Level

Sustain

Level

Key off

Time

Volume

Element Filter/Element Amplitude

Voice Mode

25. AEGSclSens

(AEG Scale Sensitivity)

This determines the AEG scaling parameters for each

Element. This parameter controls the degree of the

AEG according to the positions of notes on the

keyboard.

n The availability of the AEG Scale parameter depends on

the Break Point and Offset settings in the LvlScl display.

❏ Settings: 0~15

26-1. AEGLvlVel

(AEG Level Velocity Sensitivity)

26-2. AEGAtkVel

(AEG Attack Velocity Sensitivity)

This determines the sensitivity of the Amplitude

Envelope Generator (AEG) to note velocity.

❏

Settings: 0~15

■ AEGLvlVel

This determines the sensitivity of the AEG Level to

note velocity. For higher values, the more strongly

you play the keys, the greater the change in volume

(AEG Level).

■ AEGAtkVel

This determines the velocity sensitivity of the AEG’

Attack Rate. For higher values, the Attack Rate

becomes faster the harder you play the keyboard.

27. LvlSclFlag

(AEG Level Scale Flag)

You can set four Amplitude Scaling Break Points for

each Element. Amplitude Scaling controls the

amplitude according to the positions of the notes on

the keyboard. There are four Break Points used to

divide and assign different settings across the

keyboard. The Levels (Offsets) at each of Break Point

are set in the Level Offset display (PAGE 30).

n Details about Amplitude Scaling are given later in the

section “Amplitude Scaling Settings” below.

n The Levels of the Elements themselves are set in the

Level (PAGE 3) display (page 73).

❏ Settings: brk.p (applies the BP parameter settings in the

following PAGES), table (applies the settings which

are preset for each voice)

28-1. Lvl BP1 (Level Break Point 1)

28-2. Lvl BP2 (Level Break Point 2)

28-3. Lvl BP3 (Level Break Point 3)

28-4. Lvl BP4 (Level Break Point 4)

Set the Break Points for each Element. BP1 to BP4 will

be automatically be arranged in ascending order across

the keyboard.

❏

Settings: Lvl BP1~Lvl BP4: C-2~G8

AEGSclSens

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

25 E 1

AEGLvlVel

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

26 E 1

AEGAtkVel

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

26 E 1

LvlSclFlag

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

brk.p

27 E 1

Lvl BP1

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

28 E 1

Lvl BP2

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

G#0

28 E 1

Lvl BP3

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

28 E 1

Lvl BP4

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

28 E 1

Element Amplitude

Voice Mode

29-1. Lvl Ofs1 (Level Offset 1)

29-2. Lvl Ofs2 (Level Offset 2)

29-3. Lvl Ofs3 (Level Offset 3)

29-4. Lvl Ofs4 (Level Offset 4)

Set the Amplitude Scaling Offset Levels. These Offsets

are used by the Break Points (BP1/BP2/BP3/BP4).

n Details about Amplitude Scaling are given later in the

section “Amplitude Scaling Settings” below.

❏ Settings: Lvl Ofs1~Lvl Ofs4:–128~+127

Amplitude Scaling Settings

By way of example, you could set the Levels (Offsets)

and Break Points (BP1 to 4) as follows.

Here, the current amplitude is 80. The Offsets are

–4 at BP1 (set to note E1), +10 at BP2 (set to note

B2), +17 at BP3 (set to note G4) and +4 at BP4 (set

to A5). That is, the amplitudes at each Break Point

are 76, 90, 97 and 84, respectively. For other notes,

the amplitudes will be on the straight line

connecting the two adjacent Break Points.

n The Break Point Levels are Offsets used to increase

or decrease the current amplitude at the speciﬁed

notes. Regardless of the size of these Offsets, the

minimum and maximum amplitude limits (values

of 0 and 127, respectively) cannot be exceeded.

n A note set below the BP1 will become the BP1

Level. A note set above BP4 will become the BP4

Level.

30. LvlSclSens

(Level Scale Sensitivity)

Determines the Time Scale (how fast the volume

changes across the range of the keyboard) for each

Element. The higher the value, the slower the change

for lower notes and the faster the change for higher

notes.

❏

Settings: 0~15

31. KeyonDelay

Determines the time (delay) between the moment you

press a note on the keyboard and the point at which the

sound is played. You can set different delay times for

each Element.

❏

Settings: 0~15

32-1. LFO Wave

32-2. LFO Phase

(LFO Phase Initialize)

There are various settings for the LFO. The LFO is

used to generate low frequency signals and can be used

to create vibrato, wah, tremolo and other effects when

applied to pitch/ﬁlter/amplitude/etc. parameters. For

example, it can be applied simultaneously to both pitch

and ﬁlter, or to speciﬁc parameters of individual

Elements.

■ LFO Wave

Determines

the LFO Wave. Depending on the Wave

selected, you can create different kinds of modulated

sounds. The following three LFO waveforms are

available.

❏ Settings: saw, tri, S&H

n S&H = Adds random changes to the pitch. Tri

(Triangle) waves will be applied for the LFO AMod

and LFO FMod. Triangle wave is applied even if you

select S&H for LFO PMod, when controlling the LFO

PMod with the Modulation Wheel.

Lvl Ofs1

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+000

29 E 1

Lvl Ofs2

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+000

29 E 1

Lvl Ofs3

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+000

29 E 1

Lvl Ofs4

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+000

29 E 1

1234

E1 B2 G4 A5

–4

Ofs

+10 +17 +4

LvlSclSens

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

30 E 1

KeyonDelay

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

31 E 1

LFO Phase

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

32 E 1

LFO Wave

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

tri

32 E 1

Element Amplitude/Element LFO

Voice Mode

■ LFO Phase

Determines whether or not the LFO is reset each

time a note is pressed.

❏ Settings: off, on

33. LFO Speed

Determines the speed of the LFO waveform. A larger

setting produces a faster speed.

❏

Settings: 0~63

34-1. LFO PMod

(LFO Pitch Modulation)

34-2. LFO FMod

(LFO Filter Modulation)

34-3. LFO AMod

(LFO Amplitude Modulation)

Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform

controls the pitch/ﬁlter/amplitude.

❏

Settings: 0~127

■ LFO PMod

Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO

waveform varies (modulates) the pitch of the sound.

The larger the setting, the greater the depth of

control.

■ LFO FMod

Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO

waveform varies (modulates) the Filter Cutoff

frequency. The larger the setting, the greater the

depth of control.

■ LFO AMod

Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO

waveform varies (modulates) the amplitude of the

sound. A larger setting means a larger modulation

depth.

35-1. PLFODelay (Pitch LFO Delay)

35-2.

PLFO Fade (Pitch LFO Fade Time)

❏ Settings: 0~127

saw

tri

S&H

LFO Speed

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

33 E 1

LFO PMod

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

000

34 E 1

LFO AMod

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

000

34 E 1

LFO FMod

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

000

34 E 1

PLFODelay

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

000

34 E 1

PLFO Fade

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

000

35 E 1

Element LFO

Voice Mode

■ PLFODelay

Determines the delay time before the LFO comes

into effect. A higher value produces a longer delay

time.

Short Delay

Long Delay

■ PLFO Fade

Determines the time it takes for the LFO effect to

fade in (after the Delay time has elapsed). A higher

value means a slower fade-in.

Low Fade time value

High Fade time value

Drum Voices

With Drum Voices, different drum and percussion

sounds are assigned to notes across the keyboard (from

C0 to C6), forming an entire drum kit. For editing

Drum Voices, there are ﬁve Common Edit screens

(affecting all the Drum Voices together) and the ﬁve

Drum Key screens.

When you select a Drum Voice and enter the Voice Edit

mode, the Drum Voice Edit screen in which you were

previously editing appears.

n An overview of the Drum Voices is given on page 26.

Drum Common Edit and Drum Key Edit

Each Drum Voice consists of multiple Voices

assigned to notes across the keyboard (C#–1 ~ G5)

(page 26). You can use Drum Common Edit for

settings that apply to all Drum Keys in the Drum

Voice. For the settings of individual Voices, Drum

Key Edit consists of Edit screens for each Wave.

With Drum Voice Edit, you can use the [+]/[–]

buttons to switch between the Drum Common Edit

and Drum Key Edit screens.

Key on

FadeIn

Max

Delay

Time

Key on

FadeIn

Delay

Key on

Time

Max

Level

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

115

Drum Key screensDrum Common screens

StandKit

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

OrgKt

KEYELEMPA RT

OCTAVE

PAG E

2 0

KEYELEMPA RT

OCTAVE

PAG E

Drum Key indicatorDrum Common indicator

Element LFO

Voice Mode

Drum Common General

(PAGES 1 to 2)

For Drum Voices, there are two Common General

parameters, shown below.

1. Name

The parameters and settings are the same as for

Normal Voices. Details are given on Page 71.

2. OrgKt (Original Kit)

This selects the Original Kit (the Wave set in which a

different sound is assigned to each key).

n The sound-to-key assignments for the Kit are ﬁxed and

cannot be changed.

❏ Settings: See the separate Data List.

Drum Key Oscillator/Mix

(PAGES 1 to 5)

Drum Key Pitch (PAGE 6)

Drum Key Filter (PAGE 7)

Drum Key Amplitude (PAGE 8)

Drum Key Effect (PAGES 9 to 10)

The following is an explanation of the Key Parameters

used to edit each Drum Key. Each key can have its own

independent settings. Select the desired Drum Key by

pressing the appropriate key on the keyboard.

1. Level

This can be used to adjust the output of each Drum

Key. Select the desired Drum Key by pressing the

appropriate key on the keyboard.

❏

Settings: 0 ~ 127

2. Pan

Set the Pan position for each sound in a Drum Voice

(Drum Kit).

❏

Settings: Rnd (random; the pan position moves randomly

each time a key is played), L63 (Left) ~ C (Center)

~ R63 (Right)

n The numeric keypad can also be used to enter the value,

as shown below.

0: Rnd

1 ~ 63: L63 ~ L01

64: C (Center)

65 ~ 127: R01 ~ R63

3. Alt.Group (Alternate Group)

Determines the Alternate Group to which the Wave is

assigned. In a real drum kit, some drum sounds cannot

physically be played simultaneously, such as open and

closed hi-hats. You can prevent different sounds from

playing back simultaneously by assigning them to the

same Alternate Group. Up to 127 Alternate Groups

can be deﬁned. You can also select “off” here if you

wish to allow the simultaneous playback of sounds.

❏

Settings: off, 1 ~ 127

n To specify the “off” value, press the [0] button on the

numeric keypad, then press the [ENTER] button.

4. Key Assign

Set Key Assign to “sngl” (single) to prevent the

doubled playback of the same received notes. Select

“multi” to consecutively assign each instance of the

same received note to a separate channel.

❏

Settings: sngl, multi

StandKit

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

OrgKt

Level

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

115

Pan

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

L37

Alt.Group

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

off

Key Assign

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

sngl

Drum Common General/Drum Key Oscillator/Mix

Voice Mode

5-1. RxNoteOff (Receive Note Off)

5-2. RxNote On (Receive Note On)

❏ Settings: off, on

■ RxNoteOff

Select whether MIDI Note Off messages are received

by each Drum Key.

■ RxNote On

Select whether MIDI Note On messages are received

by each Drum Key.

6-1. PitchCors (Pitch Coarse)

6-2. PitchFine

❏ Settings: –64 ~ +63

■ PitchCors

Adjust the pitch of each Drum Key sound in

semitones.

■ PitchFine

Fine-tune the pitch of each Drum Key sound.

7-1. Cutoff

7-2. Resonance

These let you apply ﬁlter settings to each Drum Key.

n The parameters are the same as for Normal Voices.

Details are given on page 77.

n Unlike in the editing of a Normal Voice, the available

Cutoff and Resonance settings are 0 to 127.

8-1. EG Attack (EG Attack Rate)

8-2. EG Decay1 (EG Decay1 Rate)

8-3. EG Decay2 (EG Decay2 Rate)

The Amplitude Envelope Generator controls the

change in amplitude from the moment a note in

pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is released.

These settings let you determine how fast the sound

reaches its peak amplitude and how fast it fades out.

Parameters can be set for each Drum Key.

❏

Settings: 0 ~ 127

■ EG Attack

This determines the Attack Rate (speed) of the EG

(Envelope Generator), or how long it takes for the

sound of the selected drum sound to reach full

volume when a note is played. Depending on the

sound and the Attack Rate set, some sounds may

decay before the EG has a chance to bring the sound

up. In other words, setting this value too high (slow

attack) may result in an unnatural sound or no

sound at all. Higher values result in a shorter Attack

Time.

■ EG Decay 1

This determines the Decay 1 Rate (speed) the EG, or

how rapidly the sound dies down to the next Decay

level. Higher values result in a shorter Decay time.

■ EG Decay 2

This determines the Decay 2 Rate (speed) of the EG,

or how rapidly the sound dies out completely.

Higher values result in a shorter Decay time.

RxNoteOff

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

RxNote On

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

PitchCors

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+00

PitchFine

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

+00

OCTAVE

PAG E

Resonance

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

064

Cutoff

KEYELEMPAR T

064

EG Attack

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

064

EG Decay1

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

064

EG Decay2

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

064

EG Attack

EG Decay1

EG Decay 2

Key on

Decay Level

Drum Key Oscillator/Mix/Drum Key Pitch/Drum Key Filter/Drum Key Amplitude

Voice Mode

9. ReverbSend

Determines the send level of the Reverb Effect.

❏

Settings: 0 ~ 127

10. ChorusSend

Determines the send level of the Chorus Effect.

❏

Settings: 0 ~ 127

Voice Job

You can perform various operations (Jobs) in the Voice

Job mode. For example, you can initialize Voices to

their original settings (including those currently being

edited) or copy Elements.

n Before entering Voice Job mode and using the Initialize

or Copy function, you must select the Voice for which

you wish to use the operations (page 33).

n For details about how to enter the Voice Job mode, see

page 28.

Performing a Job

1In the Voice Play mode, select the Voice Number for

which you wish to perform the Job.

2Press the [JOB] button to enter the Voice Job mode.

3Use the [▼][▲] buttons and switch to the screen

showing the Job you wish to perform.

4Use the [DEC/NO] and [INC/YES] buttons to select

the parameter for which you wish to perform the

Job.

n This step is not applicable for the Bulk Dump Job.

n Use the [+]/[–] buttons to set the destination Element

or Drum Key when using Copy Element (CpyElm) or

Copy Drum Key (CpyKey).

5When you press the [ENTER] button, you will be

prompted for conﬁrmation.

6Press the [INC/YES] button to conﬁrm. A

“Completed” message appears when the Job has

been completed, and operation returns to the

original screen.

Press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel the Job.

n For Jobs that take longer to process, you will see the

message “Executing” during processing. If you switch

off the power to your synthesizer while this message

is displayed, you risk corrupting your data.

7Press the [VOICE] button to exit the Voice Job mode

and return to the Voice Play mode.

ReverbSend

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

127

ChorusSend

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

127

Init

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

voice

Init

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Sure?

Drum Key Effect

Voice Mode

1. Init (Initialize)

You can reset (initialize) all parameters of a Voice to

their default settings. You can also selectively initialize

certain parameters, such as Common settings, settings

for each Element/Drum Key, and so on. Note that this

does not return the Voice to its original state prior to

editing. Instead, it is useful when building a

completely new Voice from scratch.

■ Select Parameter Type to be Initialized

Use the [DEC/NO] and [INC/YES] buttons to select

the parameter to be initialized. The parameters

available for initialization will vary depending on

the type of Voice currently selected (Normal/Drum).

❏ Settings:

Normal Voice:

voice (Current Voice), cmmn (Current Common), elmnt

(Current Element 1 ~ 4)

n When this is set to “elmnt,” use the [+]/[–]

buttons to select the desired Element (1 - 4).

Drum Voice:

kit (all Current Drum Voice), cmmn (data common to all

Drum Keys), key (Drum Key C#-1 ~ G5)

n When this is set to “key,” you can select the desired

Drum Key by pressing the appropriate key on the

keyboard (from C#-1 to G5).

2. CpyElm (Copy Element)/

CpyKey (Copy Drum Key)

This lets you copy Element/Drum Key parameter

settings of the Voice being edited to another Element/

Drum Key in the same Voice.

■ (1) Source Element/Drum Key

Select the source Element/Drum Key (the data to be

copied) of the Voice.

❏

Settings:

Normal Voice:

elm1 ~ elm4

Drum Voice:

C#-1 ~ G5 (Drum Key C#-1 ~ G5)

■ (2) Destination Element/Drum Key

Set the Element/Drum Key of the Voice that is to be

the destination for the copy.

❏ Settings:

Normal Voice:

E1 ~ E4

Drum Voice:

C#-1 ~ G5 (Drum Key C#-1 ~ G5)

3. BlkDmp (Bulk Dump)

You can send all the parameter settings for the current

Voice or all user Voices to your computer or some other

external MIDI device using Bulk Dump.

❏

Settings: Curnt (Current Voice), AllUs (all user voices),

Systm (All Utility and MIDI data)

n To send Multi data, refer to the corresponding Bulk

Dump function in the Multi Jobs (page 68).

n For an application example showing how to use the Bulk

Dump function, see page 42.

n In order to perform a Bulk Dump, the appropriate MIDI

Device Number must be set. For details, see page 93.

Init

KEYELEMPA RT

OCTAVE

PAG E

kit

Init

KEYELEMPA RT

OCTAVE

PAG E

voice

CpyElm

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

elm1

2 E

CpyKey

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

D-1

(1)(2) (1)(2)

BlkDmp

KEYELEMPA RT

OCTAVE

PAG E

Curnt

Voice Mode

Voice Store

You can store (save) your original parameter settings

for up to 128 Normal Voices and 2 Drum Voices to

User Memory. The procedure is as follows.

n When you perform this, the settings for the destination

Voice will be overwritten. Important data should always

be backed up to computer, Yamaha MIDI Data Filer

MDF3 or some other storage device.

1Press the [STORE] button after editing a Voice.

The Voice Store screen appears.

2Use [DEC/NO] and [INC/YES] buttons to select the

destination Voice Number

3When you press the [ENTER] button, you will be

prompted for conﬁrmation.

4Press the [INC/YES] button to conﬁrm. The

message “Executing” will be displayed while the Job

is being processed. When it has been completed, a

“Completed” message appears, and operation

returns to the Voice Play mode.

n You can press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel the Job.

This will return you to the original screen.

Store

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

US001

Store

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Sure?

Utility Mode

The Utility mode contains eight parameter pages,

including global settings for the entire S03 system, as

well as certain controller settings.

n For instructions on how to enter the Utility mode, see

page 28.

n MIDI settings are made from the MIDI mode (page 93).

n Refer to the Function Tree chart (page 20) or the

Parameter Table (page 22).

Tone Generator (PAGE 1)

Keyboard (PAGES 2 to 3)

Controller (PAGES 4 to 7)

Effect (PAGE 8)

1. Master Tune

Adjust the keyboard tuning (in 0.1 cent steps).

❏

Settings: –1024 ~ +1023

n A value of 100 cents is equal to one semitone.

2. Kbd Trans (Keyboard Transpose)

Transpose the pitch of the keyboard up or down (in

semitones). This affects information transmitted via

MIDI.

❏

Settings: –11 ~ +11

3-1. Vel Curve (Velocity Curve)

3-2. Fixed Vel (Fixed Velocity)

■ Vel Curve

Set the Velocity Curve determining how the strength

of the notes played will affect the sound output.

The Vel Curve parameter is only available if Fixed

Velocity below is set to “off.”)

❏

Settings:

norm (Normal)

The velocity is in proportion to playing strength

(how hard you play the keyboard).

soft1

A softer playing style increases the volume level.

This is suitable for people with a soft key touch.

soft2

A softer playing style increases the volume level; the

response is between Soft1 and Normal.

MasterTune

+0000

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Kbd Trans

+00

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Vel Curve

norm

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Fixed Vel

off

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Keyboard playing strength

Volume

Keyboard playing strength

Volume

Keyboard playing strength

Volume

Tone Generator/Keyboard

Utility Mode

easy

This curve is also designed to increase the volume

level with a softer playing style. However, the

volume level is stable in all registers since the

velocity curve in the mid range is close to Normal.

wide

A softer playing style lowers the volume level and a

stronger playing style increases the volume level.

This results in a wider apparent dynamic range.

hard

A stronger playing style increases the volume level.

This is suitable for people with a strong key touch.

■ Fixed Vel

The velocity is ﬁxed at this setting. The sound

output is always the same, regardless of how strongly

or softly you play the keyboard.

❏

Settings: off, 1 ~ 127

4-1. MWTxCtlNo

(MW Transmit Control Number)

4-2. FCTxCtlNo (Foot Controller

Transmit Control Number)

This determines the MIDI Control Change numbers

assigned to the Modulation Wheel and Foot Controller.

❏ Settings: 0 ~ 95 (0/32=off), AT (After Touch)

n For details about Control Numbers and Control Change

messages, see the separate Data List.

5. FSTxCtlNo (Footswitch Transmit

Control Number)

This determines the MIDI Control Change numbers

assigned to the Footswitch.

❏ Settings: 0 ~ 95 (0/32=off), 96 (PCInc: Program Change

INC), 97 (PCDec: Program Change DEC)

n For details about Control Numbers and Control Change

messages, see the separate Data List.

n The default factory setting for this is to control sustain

(64).

6. Ctl Reset (Controller Reset)

Select whether or not the controller (Modulation

Wheel, Foot Controller) state/position is maintained

(“hold”) or reset when you switch between Voices.

❏

Settings: hold, reset

If you select “reset,” the controllers will be reset to the

following states/positions:

Pitch Bend Center

Modulation Wheel Minimum

Foot Controller Maximum

Foot Switch Off

Keyboard playing strength

Volume

Keyboard playing strength

Volume

Keyboard playing strength

Volume

Keyboard playing strength

Volume

MWTxCtlNo

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

FCTxCtlNo

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

FSTxCtlNo

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Ctl Reset

reset

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Keyboard/Controller

Utility Mode

7. AC1 CC No

(AC1 Control Change Number)

In the Voice mode, this determines which Control

Change number is assigned to the AC1 (Assignable

Controller 1).

❏

Settings: 0~95

n For details about Assignable Controller 1, see page 66.

n The AC1 CC No parameter in the Multi mode is set in

the Multi Part Edit mode (page 66).

8. V EfBypass (Voice Effect Bypass)

This determines whether or not effects in the Voice

Mode can be bypassed. Only System effects can be

bypassed.

❏

Settings: off (not bypassed), on

Utility Job

In the Utility Job mode, you can restore your

synthesizer’s factory default settings of the S03

(Factory Set).

Factory Set (Restore

Factory Defaults)

This lets you restore the synthesizer’s default Internal

Voices (User Memory) and Multis, as well as its System

and other settings.

Once you edit any settings, the corresponding factory

defaults will be overwritten and lost.

Use the procedure below to restore the factory default

settings.

When you restore the factory default settings, all the

current settings for the all the Multis and User Voices

will be overwritten with the factory defaults. Make sure

you are not overwriting any important data. You should

back up any important data to your computer or to some

external device beforehand.

1Press the [JOB] button in Utility Mode. The Factory

Set display appears.

2Press the [ENTER] button. A conﬁrmation message

appears.

3Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Factory

Set job. After the job has been completed, a

“Completed!” message appears. To cancel a job

while it is being executed, press the [DEC/NO]

button.

4Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Utility

mode.

AC1 CC No

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

V EfBypass

off

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

FactorySet

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

MODE

MULTI

UTILITY

EDIT

COMPARE

JOB STORE

MIDI

VOICE DEMO

Controller/Effect

MIDI Mode

The MIDI mode contains seven parameter pages,

including global settings for the entire S03 system, as

well as certain controller settings.

n For instructions on how to enter the MIDI mode, see

page 28.

n Refer to the Function Tree chart (page 20) or the

Parameter Table (page 22).

MIDI Channel (PAGES 1 to 4)

MIDI Filter (PAGES 5 to 7)

1. Device No (Device Number)

This determines the MIDI Device Number. This

number must match the Device Number of the external

MIDI device when transmitting/receiving bulk data,

parameter changes or other system exclusive messages

to/from it.

❏

Settings: 1 ~ 16, all, off

2. Local Sw (Local On/Off Switch)

If you set Local to “off,” the keyboard and controllers

are internally disconnected from the synthesizer’s tone

generator section so that no sound is output when you

play the keyboard or use the controllers. However, the

data will be transmitted through the MIDI OUT. Also,

the tone generator section will respond to messages

received at the MIDI IN.

❏

Settings: off, on

Local On/Off — When Connected to a

Computer

When connecting the S03 to a computer, the

keyboard performance data is generally sent to the

computer, and then returned from the computer to

play the tone generator or sound source. If the Local

Switch is set to “on,” a “double” sound may result,

since the tone generator is receiving performance

data from both the keyboard directly and the

computer. Use the setting suggestions below as a

guideline; speciﬁc instructions may differ depending

on your computer and the software used.

When MIDI “Echo” is enabled on the software/

computer, set the S03 Local Switch to “off.”

n When transmitting or receiving System Exclusive

data (such as with the Bulk Dump function, pages

68 and 88), use the setting example below, making

sure that MIDI “Echo” on the computer software is

set to “off.”

When MIDI “Echo” is disabled on the software/

computer, set the S03 Local Switch to “on.”

n Although not indicated in the illustration above,

the S03 actually receives and responds to MIDI

data from the computer application (sequencer),

regardless of the Local Sw setting on the S03.

* MIDI “Echo” is a function on sequencers that

takes any data received via the MIDI IN and

“echoes” it (or sends it as is) through the MIDI OUT.

In some software, this function is also called “MIDI

Thru.”

n Refer to the owner’s manual of your particular

software for speciﬁc instructions.

Device No

all

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Local Sw

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

External MIDI Device

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

Local Off

Keyboard

Tone

Generator

Echo Back On

Local Off

Computer with

Application Software

Tone

Generator

Keyborad

S03 Local Sw=off

IN OUT

TO HOST

OUT

Echo Back Off

Local On

Computer with

Application Software

S03 Local Sw=on

OUTTO HOST

Tone

Generator

Keyborad

MIDI Channel

MIDI Mode

3. Rcv Ch

(Voice Mode MIDI Receive Channel)

Set the MIDI Receive channel for using the S03 (in the

Voice mode) with an external sequencer, computer and

so on, and for using it as a MIDI tone generator.

❏

Settings: 1 ~ 16, omni (all channels)

n For information on setting the MIDI Receive channel for

each Part in the Multi mode, see page 61.

4. Trans Ch (MIDI Transmit Channel)

Set the MIDI Transmit channel for transmitting MIDI

from the keyboard, controllers and so on.

❏ Settings: 1 ~ 16

5-1. RxPgmChng

(Receive Program Change On/Off)

5-2. RxBankSel

(Receive Bank Select On/Off)

Set to enable or disable reception of Program Change/

Bank Select messages between the S03 and an external

MIDI device.

❏

Settings: off (disable), on (enable)

6-1. TxPgmChng

(Transmit Program Change On/Off)

6-2. TxBankSel

(Transmit Bank Select On/Off)

Determines whether Program Change/Bank Select

messages executed from the S03’s panel are

transmitted via MIDI or not. Set this to “on” when

you want to change programs on a connected MIDI

device.

❏

Settings: off (disable), on (enable)

7. Thru Port

You can connect the S03 to a computer via a dedicated

serial cable on the TO HOST connector. In this

situation, MIDI messages received via the TO HOST

connector can be passed through the MIDI OUT

connector of the S03 to other connected devices. Set

the port number here.

❏

Settings: 1 ~ 8

Rcv Ch

omni

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Trans Ch

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

RxPgmChng

off

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

RxBankSel

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

TxPgmChng

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

TxBankSel

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

Thru Port

KEYELEMPAR T

OCTAVE

PAG E

MIDI Channel/MIDI Filter

Appendix

About MIDI

MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical

instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program

Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages.

The S03 can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and various types of controller data. The S03

can be controlled by the incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine tone generator mode, select MIDI

channels, voices and effects, change parameter values, and of course play the voices speciﬁed for the various Parts.

Many MIDI messages are expressed in hexadecimal or

binary numbers. Hexadecimal numbers may include

the letter “H” as a sufﬁx. The letter “n” indicates a

certain whole number.

The chart below lists the corresponding decimal

number for each hexadecimal/binary number.

MIDI channels

MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen

MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 - 16, the

performance data for sixteen different instrument

parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable.

Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV

station transmits its broadcasts over a speciﬁc channel.

Your home TV set receives many different programs

simultaneously from several TV stations and you select

the appropriate channel to watch the desired program.

MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The

transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a speciﬁc

MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single

MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the

receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive

Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving

instrument will sound according to the data sent by the

transmitting instrument.

The S03 is a fully multi-timbral tone generator,

allowing you to sound several different instrument

parts simultaneously — from just the S03 — by

assigning a different MIDI channel to each part.

Decimal Hexadecimal Binary

0000 0000

0000 0001

0000 0010

0000 0011

0000 0100

0000 0101

0000 0110

0000 0111

0000 1000

0000 1001

0000 1010

0000 1011

0000 1100

0000 1101

0000 1110

0000 1111

0001 0000

0001 0001

0001 0010

0001 0011

0001 0100

0001 0101

0001 0110

0001 0111

0001 1000

0001 1001

0001 1010

0001 1011

0001 1100

0001 1101

0001 1110

0001 1111

0010 0000

0010 0001

0010 0010

0010 0011

0010 0100

0010 0101

0010 0110

0010 0111

0010 1000

0010 1001

0010 1010

0010 1011

0010 1100

0010 1101

0010 1110

0010 1111

0011 0000

0011 0001

0011 0010

0011 0011

0011 0100

0011 0101

0011 0110

0011 0111

0011 1000

0011 1001

0011 1010

0011 1011

0011 1100

0011 1101

0011 1110

0011 1111

Decimal Hexadecimal Binary

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

0100 0000

0100 0001

0100 0010

0100 0011

0100 0100

0100 0101

0100 0110

0100 0111

0100 1000

0100 1001

0100 1010

0100 1011

0100 1100

0100 1101

0100 1110

0100 1111

0101 0000

0101 0001

0101 0010

0101 0011

0101 0100

0101 0101

0101 0110

0101 0111

0101 1000

0101 1001

0101 1010

0101 1011

0101 1100

0101 1101

0101 1110

0101 1111

0110 0000

0110 0001

0110 0010

0110 0011

0110 0100

0110 0101

0110 0110

0110 0111

0110 1000

0110 1001

0110 1010

0110 1011

0110 1100

0110 1101

0110 1110

0110 1111

0111 0000

0111 0001

0111 0010

0111 0011

0111 0100

0111 0101

0111 0110

0111 0111

0111 1000

0111 1001

0111 1010

0111 1011

0111 1100

0111 1101

0111 1110

0111 1111

Weather Report

News

MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2

MIDI

cable

Appendix

MIDI Messages Transmitted/

Received by the S03

MIDI messages can be divided into two groups:

Channel messages and System messages. Below is an

explanation of the various types of MIDI messages

which the S03 can receive/transmit.

CHANNEL MESSAGES

Channel messages are the data related to the

performance on the keyboard for the speciﬁc channel.

■

Note On/Note Off (Key On/Key Off)

Messages which are generated when the keyboard is

played.

Reception note range = C-2 (0) - G8 (127), C3 = 60

Velocity range = 1 - 127 (Only the Note On velocity is

received)

Note On: Generated when a key is pressed.

Note Off: Generated when a key is released.

Each message includes a speciﬁc note number which

corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity

value based on how hard the key is struck.

■ Control Change

Control Change messages let you select a voice bank,

control volume, panning, modulation, portamento time,

brightness and various other controller parameters,

through speciﬁc Control Change numbers which

correspond to each of the various parameters.

Bank Select MSB (Control #000)

Bank Select LSB (Control #032)

Messages which select variation voice bank numbers by

combining and sending the MSB and LSB from an

external device.

MSB and LSB functions differently depending on the

tone generator mode.

MSB numbers select voice type (Normal Voice or Drum

Voice), and LSB numbers select voice banks.

(For more information about Banks and Programs, see

Voice List in the “Data List” book.)

A new bank selection will not become effective until the

next Program Change message is received.

Modulation (Control #001)

Messages which control vibrato depth using the

Modulation Wheel.

Setting the value to 127 produces maximum vibrato and 0

results in vibrato off.

Portamento Time (Control #005)

Messages which control the duration of portamento, or a

continuous pitch glide between successively played notes.

When the parameter Portamento Switch (page 96) is set

to on, the value set here can adjust the speed of pitch

change.

Setting the value to 127 produces maximum portamento

time and 0 results in minimum portamento time.

Data Entry MSB (Control #006)

Data Entry LSB (Control #038)

Messages which set the value for the parameter speciﬁed

by 1.2.23RPN MSB/LSB and 1.2.22 NRPN MSB/LSB.

Parameter value is determined by combining MSB and

LSB.

Main Volume (Control #007)

Messages which control the volume of each Part.

Setting the value to 127 produces maximum volume and

0 results in volume off.

Pan (Control #010)

Messages which control the stereo panning position of

each Part (for stereo output).

Setting the value to 127 positions the sound to the far

right and 0 positions the sound to the far left.

Expression (Control #011)

Messages which control intonation expression of each

Part during performance.

Setting the value to 127 produces maximum volume and

0 results in volume off.

Hold1 (Control #064)

Messages which control sustain on/off.

Setting the value between 64 - 127 turns the sustain on,

between 0 - 63 turns the sustain off.

Portamento Switch (Control #065)

Messages which control portamento on/off.

Setting the value between 64 -127 turns the portamento

on, between 0 - 63 turns the portamento off.

Sostenuto (Control #066)

Messages which control sostenuto on/off.

Holding speciﬁc notes and then pressing and holding the

sostenuto pedal will sustain those notes as you play

subsequent notes, until the pedal is released.

Setting the value between 64 -127 turns the sostenuto on,

between 0 - 63 turns the sostenuto off.

Soft Pedal (Control #067)

Messages which control soft pedal on/off.

Notes played while holding the soft pedal will be

dampened.

Setting the value between 64 -127 turns the soft pedal on,

between 0 - 63 turns the soft pedal off.

Appendix

Harmonic Content (Control #071)

Messages which adjust the ﬁlter resonance set for each

voice.

The value set here is an offset value which will be added

to or subtracted from the voice data.

Higher values will result in a more characteristic,

resonant sound.

Depending on the voice, the effective range may be

narrower than the range available for adjustment.

Release Time (Control #072)

Messages which adjust the EG release time set for each

voice.

The value set here is an offset value which will be added

to or subtracted from the voice data.

Attack Time (Control #073)

Messages which adjust the EG attack time set for each

voice.

The value set here is an offset value which will be added

to or subtracted from the voice data.

Brightness (Control #074)

Messages which adjust the ﬁlter cutoff frequency set for

each voice.

The value set here is an offset value which will be added

to or subtracted from the voice data.

Lower values will result in a softer sound.

Depending on the voice, the effective range may be

narrower than the range available for adjustment.

Portamento Control (Control #084)

Messages which apply a portamento between the

currently-sounding note and the subsequent note.

Portamento Control is transmitted specifying the note-on

key of the currently-sounding note.

Specify a Portamento Source Key number between 0 -

127.

When a Portamento Control message is received, the

currently sounding pitch will change with a Portamento

Time of 0 to the next note-on key on the same channel.

For example, the following settings would apply a

portamento from note C3 to C4.

90H 3CH 7FH ......... C3 Note on

B0H 54H 3CH......... Source key number set to C3

90H 48H 7FH.......... C4 Note on (When C4 is on, C3 is

raised by a portamento to C4.)

Effect1 Depth (Reverb Send Level)

(Control #091)

Messages which adjust the send level for the Reverb

effect.

Effect3 Depth (Chorus Send Level)

(Control #093)

Messages which adjust the send level for the Chorus

effect.

Effect4 Depth (Variation Effect Send Level)

(Control #094)

Messages which adjust the send level for the Variation

effect.

If Variation effect uses System effect, this message sets

the send level for the Variation effect. If it uses Insertion

effect, this setting is invalid.

Data Increment (Control #096)

Decrement (Control #097) for RPN

Messages which increase or decrease the MSB value of

pitch bend sensitivity, ﬁne tune, or coarse tune in steps of

1. You are required to assign one of those parameters

using the RPN in the external device in advance.

The data byte is ignored.

When the maximum value or minimum value is reached,

the value will not be incremented or decremented further.

(Incrementing the ﬁne tune will not cause the coarse

tune to be incremented.)

NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter Number)

LSB (Control #098)

NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter Number)

MSB (Control #099)

Messages which adjust a voice’s vibrato, ﬁlter, EG, drum

setup or other parameter settings.

First send the NRPN MSB and NRPN LSB to specify the

parameter which is to be controlled. Then use Data Entry

(page 96) to set the value of the speciﬁed parameter.

Note that once the NRPN has been set for a channel,

subsequent data entry will be recognized as the same

NRPN’s value change. Therefore, after you use the

NRPN, you should set a Null (7FH, 7FH) value to avoid

an unexpected result.

The following NRPN numbers can be received.

*rr=Note number for each drum voice instrument.

PARAMETER

Vibrato Rate

Vibrato Depth

Vibrato Delay

Filter Cutoff Frequency

Filter Resonance

EG Attack Time

EG Decay Time

EG Release Time

Drum Filter Cutoff Frequency

Drum Filter Resonance

Drum EG Attack Rate

Drum EG Decay Rate

Drum Instrument Pitch Coarse

Drum Instrument Pitch Fine

Drum Instrument Level

Drum Instrument Panpot

Drum Instrument Reverb Send Level

Drum Instrument Chorus Send Level

Drum Instrument Variation Send Level

NRPN MSB NRPN LSB

01 08

01 09

01 0A

01 20

01 21

01 63

01 64

01 66

14 rr

15 rr

16 rr

17 rr

18 rr

19 rr

1A rr

1C rr

1D rr

1E rr

1F rr

Appendix

RPN (Registered Parameter Number)LSB

(Control #100)

RPN (Registered Parameter Number)MSB

(Control #101)

Messages which offset, or add or subtract values from a

Part’s pitch bend sensitivity, tuning, or other parameter

settings.

First send the RPN MSB and RPN LSB to specify the

parameter which is to be controlled. Then use Data

Increment/Decrement (page 97) to set the value of the

speciﬁed parameter.

Note that once the RPN has been set for a channel,

subsequent data entry will be recognized as the same

RPN’s value change. Therefore after you use the RPN,

you should set a Null (7FH, 7FH) value to avoid an

unexpected result.

The following RPN numbers can be received.

■ Channel Mode Messages

The following Channel Mode Messages can be received.

All Sounds Off (Control #120)

Clears all sounds currently sounding on the speciﬁed

channel. However, the status of channel messages such as

Note On and Hold On is maintained.

Reset All Controllers (Control #121)

The values of the following controllers will be reset to the

defaults.

All Notes Off (Control #123)

Clears all notes currently on for the speciﬁed channel.

However, if Hold1 or Sostenuto is on, notes will continue

sounding until these are turned off.

Mono (Control #126)

Performs the same function as when an All Sounds Off

message is received, and if the 3rd byte (mono number) is

in the range of 0 - 16, sets the corresponding channel to

Mono Mode (Mode 4 : m = 1).

Poly (Control #127)

Performs the same function as when an All Sounds Off

message is received, and sets the corresponding channel

to Poly Mode.

■ Program Change

Messages which determine which voice to select for each

Part.

With a combination of Bank Select, you can select not

only basic voice numbers, but also variation voice bank

numbers.

■ Channel Aftertouch

Messages which let you control the sounds by the

pressure you apply to the keys after the initial striking of

the keys, over the entire channel.

The S03 does not transmit this data from the keyboard;

however, the S03 does properly respond to this data when

received from an external device.

■ Polyphonic Aftertouch

Messages which let you control the sounds by the

pressure you apply to the keys after the initial striking of

the keys, for each individual key.

The S03 does not transmit this data from the keyboard;

however, the S03 does properly respond to this data when

received from an external device.

■ Pitch Bend

Pitch Bend messages are continuous controller messages

that allow the pitch of designated notes to be raised or

lowered by a speciﬁed amount over a speciﬁed duration.

RPN MSB RPN LSB PARAMETER

00 00 Pitch Bend Sensitivity

00 01 Fine Tune

00 02 Coarse Tune

7F 7F Null

2nd BYTE 3rd BYTE MESSAGE

120 0 All Sounds Off

121 0 Reset All Controllers

123 0 All Notes Off

126 0 ~ 16 Mono

127 0 Poly

CONTROLLER VALUE

Pitch Bend Change 0 (center)

Aftertouch 0 (off)

Polyphonic Aftertouch

0 (off)

Modulation 0 (off)

Expression 127 (max)

Hold1 0 (off)

Portamento 0 (off)

Sostenuto 0 (off)

Soft Pedal 0 (off)

Portamento Control Cancels the Portamento source key number

RPN

Number not specified; internal data will not change

NRPN

Number not specified; internal data will not change

Appendix

SYSTEM MESSAGES

System messages are the data related to the overall system

of the device.

■ System Exclusive Messages

System Exclusive messages control various functions of

the S03, including master volume and master tuning,

tone generator mode, effect type and various other

parameters.

General MIDI Mode On

When General MIDI mode on is received, the tone

generator mode will be changed to XG mode.

When this happens, the S03 will receive the MIDI

messages which are compatible with GM System Level 1,

and consequently will not receive NRPN and Bank Select

messages.

Since approximately 50ms is required to execute this

message, be sure to leave an appropriate interval before

the subsequent message. The S03 responds to this

message only when it is set to the Multi mode.

F0 7E 7F 09 01 F7 (Hexadecimal)

Master Volume

When received, the Volume MSB will be effective for the

System Parameter.

F0 7F 7F 04 01 ll mm F7 (Hexadecimal)

* mm(MSB) = appropriate volume value, ll(LSB) =

ignored

XG System On

When this data is received, the S03 will switch to XG

mode and all the parameters will be initialized

accordingly, and XG-compatible messages such as NRPN

and Bank Select messages can be received.

Since approximately 50ms is required to execute this

message, be sure to leave an appropriate interval before

the subsequent message. The S03 responds to this

message only when it is set to the Multi mode.

F0 43 1n 4C 00 00 7E 00 F7 (Hexadecimal)

*n = device number (normally set to “0”)

Multi Mode On

F0 43 1n 6C 0A 00 00 01 F7 (Hexadecimal)

*n = device number (normally set to “0”)

n There are some operating conditions in which the

S03 does not respond to MIDI data, such as when

using the Compare function or when in the Demo

mode.

■ Active Sensing (Receive only)

Once FE (Active Sensing) has been received, if no MIDI

data is subsequently received for longer than an interval

of approximately 300msec, the S03 will perform the same

function as when All Sounds Off, All Notes Off, and

Reset All Controllers messages are received, and will then

return to a status in which FE is not monitored.

Refer to the MIDI Data Format in the “Data List” book

for more information on the various messages.

100

Appendix

Display Messages

Message Meaning

Bulk Tx... ...................MIDI Bulk data being transmitted.

Bulk Rx... ...................MIDI Bulk data being received.

Executing ...................Operation is being executed.

Completed!.................Operation has been completed.

!Buff Full....................Failed to process the MIDI data because too much data was received at once.

!MIDI Data ................Error occurred when receiving MIDI data.

!Checksum .................Error occurred when receiving bulk data.

!DeviceNum...............Bulk data cannot be transmitted/received because the device number does not

match or is set to “off.”

Sure?...........................Final conﬁrmation.

Host:MIDI..................HOST SELECT switch has been set to “MIDI.”

Host:PC2 ....................HOST SELECT switch has been set to “PC2.”

Host:Mac....................HOST SELECT switch has been set to “Mac.”

Host:off ......................HOST SELECT switch has been set to “off.”

!BatteryLo..................The memory-backup battery is low; memory cannot be backed up. Store the

necessary data to a MIDI data storage device such as Yamaha MIDI Data Filer

MDF3, and have the battery changed by your local Yamaha dealer or any other

authorized Yamaha service personnel.

101

Appendix

Troubleshooting

The following table provides troubleshooting hints and page references for some common problems. Most problems

may be simply the result of incorrect settings. Before calling for professional service, refer to the troubleshooting

advice below to see if you can ﬁnd and correct the cause of the problem.

In particular, when you have trouble getting sound out of the S03, check the points below as you try to pinpoint the

cause of the trouble.

1 Connect a set of headphones to check whether the S03 is properly producing sound. If you can hear the sound in the

headphones but not from your connected audio system, you can assume that the problem is in the cable connections to

the audio system.

2 If no sound can be heard through the headphones, try selecting different Voices or Multis to see whether the problem

persists or not. If selecting another Voice or Multi clears up the problem, you can assume that the settings of the

original Voice or Multi were at fault.

n When song data settings, such as volume or expression (page 96) cause a decrease in volume, selecting a different Voice or Multi

will restore the volume.

3 If the problem still persists even after changing the Voice or Multi, check the master volume setting of the S03. Increase

the volume with the VOLUME slider and, if a foot controller is connected, press it down to the maximum.

4 If still no sound is output after step 3 above, the problem may be in the global settings of the S03 (UTILITY/MIDI), the

settings of any connected MIDI device, and/or the connecting MIDI cable.

No sound.

Relevant Volume Settings

● Is the volume set appropriately? (Pages 8 and 15)

● With the S03, if a Foot Controller has been connected to the FOOT CONTROLLER jack and set up for volume/

expression control, has it been fully depressed? (Page 14)

Relevant Voice and Multi Settings

● Have the Volume or Level parameters below been set appropriately?

Voice Element Edit “Level” (Page 73)

Voice Key Edit “Level” (Page 85)

Voice Common Edit “Total Vol” (Page 71)

Voice Common Edit “Total Lvl” (Page 71)

Multi Part Edit “Volume” (Page 60)

Multi Common Edit “Total Vol” (Page 56)

● Are any of the Parts or Elements muted? (Pages 48 and 55)

● Has the “Element Sw” been set to off? (Page 73)

● Have the ﬁlters been set so that almost all the sound is muted? (Pages 63, 77, 86)

● Have the effects parameters been set appropriately? (Pages 56, 67, 72)

● Has the effect type been set to something other than “No Effect”? (Pages 56 and 57)

● Have the Velocity Sensitivity parameters been set appropriately? (Pages 62 and 72)

● Have the Note Limit (Part/Voice) and Velocity Limit parameters been set appropriately? (Pages 60 and 73)

If Note/Velocity Limit Low is set to a value above Note/Velocity Limit High, no sound is output.

102

Appendix

Relevant Global Settings of the S03 (UTILITY or MIDI)

● Have the MIDI receive channels been set correctly? (Pages 61 and 94)

● Has the Local switch been set to off? (Page 93)

● Has the HOST SELECT switch (page 10) been set appropriately? (Pages 12 to 14)

● Is either the Demo mode (page 16) or the Compare function (pages 55 and 70) active? When either of these are active,

incoming MIDI data is ignored.

Relevant Settings in the Song Data and on Connected MIDI Devices

● When playing Multis using an external MIDI sequencer, have the transmit channels for each sequencer track and the

receive channels for each Part in the Multi been set correctly? (Page 61)

● Has the computer’s “MIDI Echo” or “MIDI Thru” been set appropriately? (Page 93)

● When playing back a song using an external MIDI sequencer, have the volume and expression (page 96) parameters

been set appropriately?

Cable and Connection Problems

● Has the audio equipment been connected correctly? (Page 11)

● Is the MIDI cable intact and connected properly?

The sound is distorted.

● Have the effects been set appropriately? (Pages 56 and 72)

● Has the volume been set too high? (Pages 8 and 15)

The sound is too soft.

● Has MIDI volume or MIDI expression (page 96) been set too low?

● Has the ﬁlter cutoff frequency been set too low? (Pages 63, 77, 86)

The pitch is wrong.

● Has the Master Tune parameter in Utility Mode been set correctly? (Page 90)

● Has the KbdTrans parameter in Utility Mode been set correctly? (Page 90)

● Is the Octave Up/Down setting appropriate? (Page 36)

● Have the pitch related parameters in PITCH menu been set appropriately? (Page 74)

● Has the Pitch Modulation Depth in the LFO screen (Voice Edit Mode) been set too high? (Page 83)

● For Parts or Voices, has the Note Shift parameter been set to a value other than 0? (Pages 61 and 74)

● Has the Detune parameter for each Part or Voice been set to a value other than 0? (Pages 61 and 74)

103

Appendix

Sound is choppy and intermittent.

● Has the maximum polyphony been exceeded? (Page 18)

Only one note sounds at a time.

● Has the Mono/Poly parameter been set to “mono”? (Pages 61 and 71)

No effects are applied.

● Has the V EfBypass (Voice Effect Bypass) been set to off? (Page 92)

● In the case of a Multi, has Var Send in Part Edit been set to off or a value too close to 0? (Page 67)

● Has the effect type been set to something other than “Thru” or “No Effect” ? (Pages 56 and 57)

● In the case of a Multi, have the Insertion Effect Parts been speciﬁed? (Page 67)

Edits related to Scale Sensitivity, Velocity Sensitivity and Scale (of Pan

setting parameter) made to the Voice have no effect.

● Depending on the selected Voice or the settings of related parameters, changes to these parameters may have little or no

audible effect.

Cannot ﬁnd the Drum Voice.

● Drum Voices are selected differently than Normal Voices. (Page 34)

Edits made to the Drum Voice have no effect.

● Has the Part Mode parameter been set correctly? (Page 61)

Editing can’t be done.

● Has the Category Search function been turned on? If Category Search is active, the Edit Mode can’t be enabled.

(Page 35)

● Have you selected a Wave (001 - 029) whose parameter settings are ﬁxed? (Page 73)

● Is the Utility mode or MIDI mode active?

● For the Voice mode, are you attempting to edit? Remember that Chorus and Reverb effect settings are ﬁxed for the

Voices and cannot be changed. (Page 54)

104

Appendix

Cannot receive bulk data.

● Has the Device Number parameter been set correctly? When receiving data with the S03’s Bulk Dump function, you

must set the S03 to the same device number as that speciﬁed on the transmitting device. (Page 93)

● Has the HOST SELECT switch (page 10) been set appropriately? (Pages 12 to 14)

Cannot properly receive or respond to data from the connected

device.

● Has the HOST SELECT switch (page 10) been set appropriately? (Pages 12 to 14)

● Is either the Demo mode (page 16) or the Compare function (pages 55 and 70) active? When either of these are active,

incoming MIDI data is ignored.

● Is the MIDI cable intact and connected properly?

Checking the MIDI Cable

Here’s a quick way to check a MIDI cable, to make sure it’s properly conducting signals.

n Before starting this, set the S03 to Voice mode and make sure that the S03 is properly outputting sound when you play the

keyboard.

1 Disable keyboard control over the tone generator by setting Local Sw (PAGE 2 in the MIDI mode) to “off.” In this

condition, playing the keyboard does not produce any sound. (Page 93)

2 Directly connect the MIDI cable in question — one end to the MIDI IN terminal of the S03, the other to the MIDI

OUT. This sets up an external MIDI “loop,” routing the keyboard of the S03 to its tone generator, by way of the

MIDI cable (and not by Local Switch).

3 Set the HOST SELECT switch on the rear panel to “MIDI.” (Page 10)

4 Set the Receive Channel parameter (PAGE 3 in the MIDI mode) to “omni” (all channels). This allows the Voice to

respond to the incoming MIDI data, regardless of the MIDI Transmit Channel setting for the keyboard.

5 Play the keyboard. If you’ve made all the above settings correctly and you hear the Voice, the MIDI cable is intact.

n Keep in mind that the cable or connections could still be faulty, even if you hear sound — especially if the sound is

intermittent or cuts in and out.

n After conducting this check, make sure to reset the Local Sw (PAGE 2 in the MIDI mode) to “on,” if necessary. If you leave

this set to “off,” the S03 keyboard will not control its own sounds.

105

Appendix

Speciﬁcations

KEYBOARD 61 keys with Initial Touch

TONE GENERATOR AWM2

POLYPHONY 64 notes

MULTI TIMBRE 16

VOICE Normal Voice Preset 128

User 128

XG 480

Drum Voice User 2

XG 20 (including 8 Original Voices)

MULTI User 32

EFFECT Reverb 11

Chorus 11

Variation 42

CONTROLS STANDBY/ON, HOST SELECT, VOLUME, Pitch Bend, Modulation, MULTI,

VOICE, DEMO, UTILITY, MIDI, EDIT/COMPARE, JOB, STORE, EXIT,

E/F, ▲ / ▼, PART (ELEMENT/KEY) –/+, MUTE, OCTOVE UP/

DOWN, INC/YES, DEC/NO, PRESET, USER, XG/GM, CATEGORY

SEARCH, Numeric Keypad, ENTER

CONNECTORS & TERMINALS PHONES (Stereo Phone), OUTPUT (Phone): L (MONO)/R, DC IN, FOOT

CONTROLLER, FOOT SWITCH, TO HOST, MIDI IN/OUT/THRU

DISPLAY LCD (Back Lit)

POWER SUPPLY Yamaha AC adaptor PA-3C (included)*

* May not be included in your area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer.

POWER CONSUMPTION 7W (120V), 7.5W (230V)

MAXIMUM OUTPUT LEVEL OUTPUT: +9 ±2dbm (10k ohms), PHONES: +0 ±2dbm (33 ohms)

DIMENSIONS 976 (W) x 285 (D) x 87 (H) mm

WEIGHT 6kg

Speciﬁcations and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp.

reserves the right to change or modify products or speciﬁcations at any time without prior notice. Since

speciﬁcations, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your

Yamaha dealer.

106

Index

Symbols

[+]/[–] buttons (The Controls & Connectors) .................................8

[+]/[–] buttons (Basic Operations) ................................................30

[ ▲ ]/[ ▼ ] buttons (Basic Operations) .........................................30

[ ▲ ]/[ ▼ ] buttons (The Controls & Connectors) ..........................9

[E]/[F] buttons (Basic Operations) ......................................30

[E]/[F] buttons (The Controls & Connectors) .......................9

About EG Rate and Time (Voice Mode) ......................................52

About MIDI ..................................................................................95

About the Modes ..........................................................................19

About the Tone Generator ............................................................18

Absolute ........................................................................................32

AC1 (Assignable Controller 1) .....................................................66

AC1 (Foot Controller) ..................................................................45

AC1 AMod (AC1 Amplitude Modulation Depth) .................66, 72

AC1 Amplitude Modulation Depth ........................................66, 72

AC1 CC No (AC1 Control Change Number) (Multi) ..................66

AC1 CC No (AC1 Control Change Number) (Voice) .................92

AC1 Control Change Number (Multi) ..........................................66

AC1 Control Change Number (Voice) .........................................92

AC1 Filter Control ..................................................................66, 72

AC1 Filter Modulation Depth ................................................66, 72

AC1 FMod (AC1 Filter Modulation Depth) ..........................66, 72

AC1 VarCtl (AC1 Variation Effect Control Depth) .....................72

AC1 Variation Effect Control Depth ......................................59, 72

AC1FltCtl (AC1 Filter Control) .............................................66, 72

AC1VarCtl (AC1 Variation Effect Control Depth) ......................59

AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator) (Basics) ..........................51

AEG Attack Rate ..........................................................................80

AEG Attack Velocity Sensitivity .................................................81

AEG Decay 1 Level ......................................................................80

AEG Decay 1 Rate .......................................................................80

AEG Decay 2 Rate .......................................................................80

AEG Initial Level .........................................................................80

AEG Level Scale Flag ..................................................................81

AEG Level Velocity Sensitivity ...................................................81

AEG Release Rate ........................................................................80

AEG Scale Sensitivity ..................................................................81

AEG Sustain Level .......................................................................80

AEGAtkR (AEG Attack Rate) .....................................................80

AEGAtkVel (AEG Attack Velocity Sensitivity) ..........................81

AEGDcy1L (AEG Decay 1 Level) ...............................................80

AEGDcy1R (AEG Decay 1 Rate) ................................................80

AEGDcy2R (AEG Decay 2 Rate) ................................................80

AEGInitL (AEG Initial Level) .....................................................80

AEGLvlVel (AEG Level Velocity Sensitivity) ............................81

AEGRelR (AEG Release Rate) ....................................................80

AEGSclSens (AEG Scale Sensitivity) ..........................................81

AEGSusL (AEG Sustain Level) ...................................................80

Alt.Group (Alternate Group) ........................................................85

Alternate Group ............................................................................85

AMP (Amplitude) (Basics) ...........................................................51

Amplitude (Basics) .......................................................................51

Amplitude Envelope Generator (Basics) ......................................51

Amplitude Envelope Generator Settings ......................................80

Amplitude Scaling Settings ..........................................................82

Assignable Controller 1 ................................................................66

Attack Time ..................................................................................63

Attack Tm (Attack Time) .............................................................63

AWM2 ..........................................................................................18

Before Use ....................................................................................11

Binary ...........................................................................................95

BlkDmp (Bulk Dump) (Multi Job) ...............................................68

BlkDmp (Bulk Dump) (Voice Job) ..............................................88

Bulk Dump (Multi Job) ................................................................68

Bulk Dump (Voice Job) ................................................................88

Bulk Dump Send (Saving S03 Settings to an External Device) ...42

Category .......................................................................................71

Category Search (Using Voice Category Search) ........................35

[CATEGORY SEARCH/DRUM] button ......................................9

Cho Return (Chorus Return) ........................................................57

ChoEF (Chorus Effect Type) .......................................................57

Chorus Effect Type ......................................................................57

Chorus Pan ...................................................................................57

Chorus Parameters ........................................................................57

Chorus Return ..............................................................................57

Chorus Section .............................................................................53

ChorusSend (Drum Voice) ...........................................................87

ChorusSend (Multi) ......................................................................66

ChorusSend (Normal Voice) ........................................................72

Common Controller (Basics) .......................................................49

Common Controller (Reference) ..................................................71

Common Edit and Editing Individual Elements ..........................48

Common Edit and Editing Individual Parts .................................55

Common Effect (Basics) ..............................................................49

Common Effect (Multi) ................................................................56

Common Effect (Voice) ............................................................... 71

Common General (Basics) ...........................................................49

Common General (Multi) .............................................................56

Common General (Voice) ............................................................71

Compare Function (Multi Mode) .................................................55

Compare Function (Voice Mode) ................................................70

Connecting Controllers ................................................................14

Connecting External MIDI Equipment ........................................12

Connecting to a Personal Computer .............................................13

Connecting to External Audio Equipment ...................................11

Connections ..................................................................................11

Connectors ......................................................................................8

CONTROLLER (Common Controller) (Basics) .........................49

Controller (Overview of the S03) .................................................17

Controller (Utility) .......................................................................90

Controller Reset ............................................................................91

Controllers and External MIDI Control .......................................44

Controls & Connectors ...................................................................8

Copy Controller ............................................................................68

Copy Drum Key ...........................................................................88

Copy Element ...............................................................................88

Copy Part ......................................................................................68

Copy Variation Effect ..................................................................68

CpyCtl (Copy Controller) .............................................................68

CpyElm (Copy Element) ..............................................................88

CpyKey (Copy Drum Key) ..........................................................88

CpyPart (Copy Part) .....................................................................68

CpyVar (Copy Variation Effect) ..................................................68

Ctl Reset (Controller Reset) .........................................................91

Cutoff (Drum Voice) ....................................................................86

Cutoff (Multi) ...............................................................................63

Cutoff (Normal Voice) ................................................................. 77

Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity ...........................................................77

CutoffVel (Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity) .......................................77

DATA buttons ................................................................................ 9

DC IN terminal ............................................................................. 10

[DEC/NO] button (Basic Operations) .......................................... 31

[DEC/NO] button (The Controls & Connectors) ........................... 9

Decay Time .................................................................................. 63

Decay Tm (Decay Time) .............................................................. 63

Decimal ........................................................................................ 95

DEMO Mode ................................................................................ 19

Demo Mode (Selecting a Mode) .................................................. 29

Demo Playback ............................................................................ 16

Demo Song Selection ................................................................... 16

Detune (Multi) .............................................................................. 61

Detune (Voice) ............................................................................. 74

Device No (Device Number) .......................................................93

Device Number ............................................................................ 93

[DOWN] button ............................................................................. 8

[DRUM] button .............................................................................. 9

Drum Common Edit and Drum Key Edit .................................... 84

Drum Common General ............................................................... 85

Drum Key Amplitude ................................................................... 85

Drum Key Effect .......................................................................... 85

Drum Key Filter ........................................................................... 85

Drum Key Oscillator/Mix ............................................................ 85

Drum Key Pitch ........................................................................... 85

Drum Voice (Basics) .................................................................... 26

Drum Voices (Reference) ............................................................84

E Indicator (Multi Mode) ............................................................. 55

E Indicator (Voice Mode) ............................................................ 70

Echo ............................................................................................. 93

Edit Modes (Selecting a Mode) ................................................... 28

Effect ............................................................................................ 92

EFFECT (Common Effect) (Basics) ............................................ 49

Effect Bypass (Voice Effect Bypass) ........................................... 92

Effects (Basics) ............................................................................ 53

Effects in Multi Mode .................................................................. 54

Effects in Voice Mode .................................................................54

EG (Envelope Generator) ............................................................. 52

EG Attack (EG Attack Rate) ........................................................ 86

EG Attack Rate ............................................................................ 86

EG Decay1 (EG Decay1 Rate) ..................................................... 86

EG Decay1 Rate ........................................................................... 86

EG Decay2 (EG Decay2 Rate) ..................................................... 86

EG Decay2 Rate ........................................................................... 86

Element Amplitude ...................................................................... 73

[ELEMENT] button ....................................................................... 8

Element Filter ............................................................................... 73

Element LFO ................................................................................ 73

Element Oscillator/Mixer ............................................................. 73

Element Pitch ............................................................................... 73

Element Sw (Element Switch) ..................................................... 73

Element Switch ............................................................................ 73

[ENTER] button (Basic Operations) ............................................ 32

[ENTER/KEYBOARD] button (The Controls & Connectors) ...... 9

Entering Data ............................................................................... 31

[EXIT] button ............................................................................... 31

[EXIT] button (The Controls & Connectors) ................................. 9

Factory Set ................................................................................... 92

FCTxCtlNo (Foot Controller Transmit Control Number) ........... 91

FEG (Filter Envelope Generator) (Basics) ................................... 51

FEG Attack Level ........................................................................ 79

FEG Attack Rate .......................................................................... 79

FEG Attack Velocity .................................................................... 80

FEG Decay 1 Level ...................................................................... 79

FEG Decay 1 Rate ........................................................................ 79

FEG Decay 2 Rate ........................................................................ 79

FEG Hold Rate ............................................................................. 79

FEG Initial Level ......................................................................... 79

FEG Other Velocity ..................................................................... 80

FEG Release Level ....................................................................... 79

FEG Release Rate ........................................................................ 79

FEG Scale Sensitivity .................................................................. 79

FEG Sustain Level ....................................................................... 79

FEGAtkL (FEG Attack Level) ..................................................... 79

FEGAtkR (FEG Attack Rate) ...................................................... 79

107

FEGAtkVel (FEG Attack Velocity) .............................................80

FEGDcy1L (FEG Decay 1 Level) ................................................79

FEGDcy1R (FEG Decay 1 Rate) ..................................................79

FEGDcy2R (FEG Decay 2 Rate) ..................................................79

FEGHoldR (FEG Hold Rate) .......................................................79

FEGInitL (FEG Initial Level) .......................................................79

FEGOthVel (FEG Other Velocity) ...............................................80

FEGRelL (FEG Release Level) ....................................................79

FEGRelR (FEG Release Rate) .....................................................79

FEGSclSens (FEG Scale Sensitivity) ...........................................79

FEGSusL (FEG Sustain Level) ....................................................79

FILTER (Basics) ..........................................................................51

Filter Envelope Generator (Basics) ..............................................51

Filter Envelope Generator Settings ...............................................79

Filter Scale Break Point 1~4 .........................................................78

Filter Scale Flag ............................................................................77

Filter Scale Offset 1~4 ..................................................................78

Filter Scale Sensitivity ..................................................................78

Filter Scale Velocity Sensitivity ...................................................78

Filter Scaling Settings ...................................................................78

Fixed Vel (Fixed Velocity) ...........................................................90

Fixed Velocity ..............................................................................90

Flt BP1~4 (Filter Scale Break Point 1~4) .....................................78

Flt Ofs1~4 (Filter Scale Offset 1~4) .............................................78

FltSclFlag (Filter Scale Flag) .......................................................77

FltSclSns (Filter Scale Sensitivity) ...............................................78

FltSclVel (Filter Scale Velocity Sensitivity) ................................78

Foot Controller (Using Controllers) .............................................45

FOOT CONTROLLER jack .........................................................10

Foot Controller Transmit Control Number ...................................91

Foot Switch (Using Controllers) ..................................................46

FOOT SWITCH jack ....................................................................10

Footswitch Transmit Control Number ..........................................91

Front Panel ......................................................................................8

FSTxCtlNo (Footswitch Transmit Control Number) ...................91

Function Tree chart .......................................................................20

GENERAL (Common General) (Basics) .....................................49

GM System Level 1 ........................................................................4

[GM/XG/(OTHER)] button ............................................................9

H (Hexadecimal) ...........................................................................95

HOST SELECT switch .................................................................10

[INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons (Basic Operations) ...............31

[INC/YES] button (The Controls & Connectors) ...........................9

Init (Initialize) (Multi) ..................................................................68

Init (Initialize) (Voice) ..................................................................88

Initialize (Multi) ...........................................................................68

Initialize (Voice) ...........................................................................88

Insertion Effects ............................................................................53

Job (Multi) ....................................................................................67

Job (Utility) ..................................................................................92

Job (Voice) ...................................................................................87

Job Modes (Selecting a Mode) .....................................................29

Kbd Trans (Keyboard Transpose) ................................................90

Key Assign ...................................................................................85

[KEY] button ..................................................................................8

Key On/Key Off ...........................................................................96

Keyboard ......................................................................................90

[KEYBOARD] button (The Controls & Connectors) ....................9

Keyboard Transpose .....................................................................90

KeyonDelay ..................................................................................82

Layering Two Voices (Parts) Together ........................................42

LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) ........................................................8

Level (Drum Voices) ....................................................................85

Level (EG) ....................................................................................52

Level (Normal Voice) ..................................................................73

Level Break Point 1~4 ..................................................................81

Level Offset 1~4 ...........................................................................82

Level Scale Sensitivity .................................................................82

LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) (Basics) ...................................52

LFO AMod (LFO Amplitude Modulation) ..................................83

LFO Amplitude Modulation .........................................................83

LFO Filter Modulation .................................................................83

LFO FMod (LFO Filter Modulation) ...........................................83

LFO Phase (LFO Phase Initialize) ...............................................82

LFO Phase Initialize .....................................................................82

LFO Pitch Modulation .................................................................83

LFO PMod (LFO Pitch Modulation) ...........................................83

LFO Speed ....................................................................................83

LFO Wave ....................................................................................82

Local On/Off — When Connected to a Computer .......................93

Local On/Off Switch ....................................................................93

Local Sw (Local On/Off Switch) .................................................93

Low Frequency Oscillator (Basics) ..............................................52

Lvl BP1~4 (Level Break Point 1~4) ............................................81

Lvl Ofs1~4 (Level Offset 1~4) ....................................................82

LvlSclFlag (AEG Level Scale Flag) ............................................81

LvlSclSens (Level Scale Sensitivity) ...........................................82

Master Tune ..................................................................................90

masters ..........................................................................................15

Maximum Polyphony ...................................................................18

MIDI .............................................................................................95

MIDI “Echo” ................................................................................ 93

MIDI Channel (MIDI Mode) .......................................................93

MIDI channels (About MIDI) ......................................................95

MIDI Filter ...................................................................................93

MIDI IN/OUT/THRU terminals ..................................................10

MIDI Mode (About the Modes) ................................................... 19

MIDI Mode (Reference) ...............................................................93

MIDI Mode (Selecting a Mode) ...................................................29

MIDI OUT terminal .....................................................................10

MIDI Receive Channel (Multi) ....................................................61

MIDI Receive Channel (Voice) ...................................................94

MIDI THRU terminal ...................................................................10

MIDI Transmit Channel ............................................................... 94

MODE buttons ...............................................................................8

MODULATION wheel (The Controls & Connectors) ..................8

Modulation Wheel (Using Controllers) ........................................44

Mono/Poly (Multi) .......................................................................61

Mono/Poly (Voice) .......................................................................71

Moving the Cursor Position .........................................................32

Multi Edit (Reference) .................................................................55

Multi Edit Mode (About the Modes) ............................................19

Multi Edit Mode (Selecting a Mode) ...........................................28

Multi Job ......................................................................................67

Multi Job Mode (About the Modes) .............................................19

Multi Job Mode (Selecting a Mode) ............................................29

Multi Mode (About the Modes) ...................................................19

Multi Mode (Reference) ...............................................................55

Multi Play Mode (About the Modes) ...........................................19

Multi Play Mode (Selecting a Mode) ...........................................28

Multi Store ....................................................................................69

Multis ...........................................................................................24

[MUTE] button ...............................................................................8

MW AMod (MW Amplitude Modulation Depth) ..................65, 72

MW Amplitude Modulation Depth ........................................65, 72

MW Filter Control ..................................................................65, 72

MW Filter Modulation Depth ................................................65, 72

MW FltCtl (MW Filter Control) ............................................65, 72

MW FMod (MW Filter Modulation Depth) ...........................65, 72

MW Pitch Modulation Depth .................................................65, 72

MW PMod (MW Pitch Modulation Depth) ...........................65, 72

MW Transmit Control Number ....................................................91

MW VarCtl (MW Variation Effect Control Depth) ...............58, 72

MW Variation Effect Control Depth ......................................58, 72

MWTxCtlNo (MW Transmit Control Number) ...........................91

Name (Drum Voice) ..................................................................... 85

Name (Multi) ................................................................................ 56

Name (Normal Voice) .................................................................. 71

Normal Voice (Basics) ................................................................. 26

Normal Voice (Reference) ........................................................... 70

Note Limit High (Multi) .............................................................. 60

Note Limit High (Voice) .............................................................. 73

Note Limit Low (Multi) ............................................................... 60

Note Limit Low (Voice) .............................................................. 73

Note Limit Low/High (Basics) .................................................... 50

Note On/Note Off ......................................................................... 96

NoteShift ................................................................................ 61, 74

NtLmt-H (Note Limit High) (Multi) ............................................ 60

NtLmt-H (Note Limit High) (Voice) ........................................... 73

NtLmt-L (Note Limit Low) (Multi) ............................................. 60

NtLmt-L (Note Limit Low) (Voice) ............................................73

NtLmt-L/H (Note Limit Low/High) (Basics) ..............................50

Numeric keypad (Basic Operations) ............................................ 32

Numeric keypad (The Controls & Connectors) ............................. 9

OCTAVE [DOWN] ....................................................................... 8

OCTAVE [UP] and [DOWN] buttons ........................................... 8

offset ............................................................................................. 32

OrgKt (Original Kit) .................................................................... 85

Original Kit .................................................................................. 85

OSC/MIX (Oscillator/Mix) (Basics) ............................................ 49

Oscillator/Mix (Basics) ................................................................ 49

Other Modes (Selecting a Mode) ................................................. 29

OUTPUT L/MONO and R jack ................................................... 10

Overview of the S03 .................................................................... 17

Overview of Voices/Waves ......................................................... 26

Package Contents ........................................................................... 4

Pan (Drum Voice) ........................................................................ 85

Pan (Multi) ................................................................................... 60

Pan (Normal Voice) ..................................................................... 73

Parameter Table ...........................................................................22

Parameter Type List ....................................................................... 8

Part ............................................................................................... 59

Part Controller .............................................................................. 59

Part Effect .................................................................................... 59

Part General .................................................................................. 59

Part Mix ........................................................................................ 59

Part Mode ..................................................................................... 61

Part Tone ...................................................................................... 59

[PART/ELEMENT/KEY] buttons ................................................. 8

PB Range (Pitch Bend Range) ............................................... 65, 72

PchSclCN (Pitch Scale Center Note) ........................................... 74

PchSclSns (Pitch Scale Sensitivity) ............................................. 74

PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator) (Basics) ................................... 50

PEG Attack Level ........................................................................ 75

PEG Attack Rate .......................................................................... 75

PEG Attack Time ......................................................................... 64

PEG Decay 1 Level ...................................................................... 75

PEG Decay 1 Rate ........................................................................ 75

PEG Decay 2 Rate ........................................................................ 75

PEG Initial Level (Multi) ............................................................. 64

PEG Initial Level (Voice) ............................................................ 75

PEG Level Velocity ..................................................................... 76

PEG Rate Velocity ....................................................................... 76

PEG Release Level (Multi) .......................................................... 64

PEG Release Level (Voice) .........................................................75

PEG Release Rate ........................................................................ 75

PEG Release Time ....................................................................... 64

PEG Scale Center Note ................................................................ 76

PEG Scale Sensitivity .................................................................. 76

PEG Sustain Level ....................................................................... 75

PEGAtkL (PEG Attack Level) ..................................................... 75

PEGAtkR (PEG Attack Rate) ...................................................... 75

PEGAtkTm (PEG Attack Time) .................................................. 64

PEGDcy1L (PEG Decay 1 Level) ............................................... 75

PEGDcy1R (PEG Decay 1 Rate) ................................................. 75

PEGDcy2R (PEG Decay 2 Rate) ................................................. 75

PEGInitL (PEG Initial Level) ...................................................... 75

PEGIntL (PEG Initial Level) .......................................................64

PEGLvlVel (PEG Level Velocity) ............................................... 76

PEGRelL (PEG Release Level) (Multi) ....................................... 64

PEGRelL (PEG Release Level) (Voice) ...................................... 75

PEGRelR (PEG Release Rate) ..................................................... 75

PEGRelTm (PEG Release Time) ................................................. 64

PEGRtVel (PEG Rate Velocity) .................................................. 76

PEGSclCN (PEG Scale Center Note) .......................................... 76

PEGSclSns (PEG Scale Sensitivity) ............................................ 76

PEGSusL (PEG Sustain Level) .................................................... 75

108

Performing Live While Playing Back a Song File .......................40

PHONES jack ...............................................................................10

PITCH (Basics) ............................................................................50

Pitch Bend Range ...................................................................65, 72

PITCH bend wheel (The Controls & Connectors) .........................8

Pitch Bend Wheel (Using Controllers) .........................................44

Pitch Coarse ..................................................................................86

Pitch Envelope Generator (Basics) ...............................................50

Pitch Envelope Generator Settings ...............................................75

Pitch LFO Delay ...........................................................................83

Pitch LFO Fade Time ...................................................................83

Pitch Scale Center Note ................................................................74

Pitch Scale Sensitivity ..................................................................74

PitchCors (Pitch Coarse) ..............................................................86

PitchFine .......................................................................................86

Play Modes (Selecting a Mode) ....................................................28

Playing in Multi Mode ..................................................................37

Playing the S03 .............................................................................33

Playing the Voices ........................................................................33

PLFO Fade (Pitch LFO Fade Time) .............................................83

PLFODelay (Pitch LFO Delay) ....................................................83

Porta Sw (Portamento Switch) ...............................................65, 72

Portamento Switch ..................................................................65, 72

Portamento Time ....................................................................65, 72

PortaTime (Portamento Time) ................................................65, 72

Power Supply ................................................................................11

Powering Up .................................................................................15

Power-on Procedure .....................................................................15

[PRESET/(DRUM/PERC)] button .................................................9

Program Change ...........................................................................98

Rcv Ch (MIDI Receive Channel) .................................................61

Rcv Ch (Voice Mode MIDI Receive Channel) ............................94

Rear Panel .....................................................................................10

Receive Bank Select On/Off .........................................................94

Receive Note Off ..........................................................................86

Receive Note On ...........................................................................86

Receive Program Change On/Off .................................................94

Relative .........................................................................................32

Releas Tm (Release Time) ...........................................................63

Release Time ................................................................................63

Resonance (Drum Voice) .............................................................86

Resonance (Multi) ........................................................................63

Resonance (Normal Voice) ..........................................................77

Resonance Velocity Sensitivity ....................................................77

ResoVel (Resonance Velocity Sensitivity) ...................................77

Rev Return (Reverb Return) .........................................................56

RevEF (Reverb Effect Type) ........................................................56

Reverb Effect Type .......................................................................56

Reverb Pan ....................................................................................57

Reverb Parameters ........................................................................56

Reverb Return ...............................................................................56

Reverb Section ..............................................................................53

ReverbSend (Drum Voice) ...........................................................87

ReverbSend (Multi) ......................................................................66

ReverbSend (Normal Voice) ........................................................72

RxBankSel (Receive Bank Select On/Off) ...................................94

RxNote On (Receive Note On) .....................................................86

RxNoteOff (Receive Note Off) ....................................................86

RxPgmChng (Receive Program Change On/Off) ........................94

S&H ..............................................................................................83

Saving S03 Settings to an External Device ..................................42

saw ................................................................................................83

Selecting a Mode ..........................................................................28

Selecting a Screen ........................................................................30

Selecting XG Banks .....................................................................35

Send Chorus to Reverb (Multi) ....................................................57

Send Chorus to Reverb (Voice) ...................................................72

Send Variation to Chorus .............................................................58

Send Variation to Reverb .............................................................58

Setting the Voice Name ................................................................71

slaves ............................................................................................15

SndChoﬁRev (Send Chorus to Reverb) (Multi) .........................57

SndChoﬁRev (Send Chorus to Reverb) (Voice) .........................72

SndVarﬁCho (Send Variation to Chorus) ...................................58

SndVarﬁRev (Send Variation to Reverb) ...................................58

Splitting the Keyboard .................................................................41

STANDBY/ON switch .................................................................10

Store (Multi) .................................................................................69

Store (Voice) ................................................................................89

Store Mode ...................................................................................19

Store Mode (Selecting a Mode) ...................................................29

sustain (AEG Release Rate) .........................................................80

sustain (Foot Switch) ....................................................................46

Switching Between Screens and Entering Settings ......................48

Switching Elements On/Off (Mute) .............................................48

Switching Parts On/Off ................................................................55

System and Insertion Effects ........................................................53

System Effects ..............................................................................53

System Exclusive Messages .........................................................99

Thru Port ......................................................................................94

To call up the GM/XG Drum memory .........................................34

To call up the User Drum memory (USDR1/USDR2) ................34

To call up the XG SFX Kit memory ............................................34

TO HOST terminal .......................................................................10

Tone Generator (Overview of the S03) ........................................17

Tone Generator (Utility) ...............................................................90

Total Level ...................................................................................71

Total Lvl (Total Level) .................................................................71

Total Vol (Total Volume) (Multi) ................................................56

Total Vol (Total Volume) (Normal Voice) ..................................71

Total Volume (Multi) ...................................................................56

Total Volume (Normal Voice) .....................................................71

Trans Ch (MIDI Transmit Channel) .............................................94

Transmit Bank Select On/Off .......................................................94

Transmit Program Change On/Off ...............................................94

Transpose .....................................................................................56

Transposing the Octave ................................................................36

tri ..................................................................................................83

TxBankSel (Transmit Bank Select On/Off) .................................94

TxPgmChng (Transmit Program Change On/Off) .......................94

Types of Parameters (Absolute and Relative) ..............................32

[UP] button .....................................................................................8

USB ..............................................................................................14

[USER/(SE)] button .......................................................................9

Using Controllers .........................................................................44

Using Multi Mode ........................................................................37

Using the Foot Controller to Control Parameters .........................45

Using the Foot Switch to Advance Through Programs ................46

Using the S03 as a Multitimbral Tone Generator ........................38

Using Voice Category Search ......................................................35

Utility Job .....................................................................................92

Utility Mode (About the Modes) ..................................................19

Utility Mode (Reference) .............................................................90

Utility Mode (Selecting a Mode) .................................................29

V EfBypass (Voice Effect Bypass) .............................................. 92

Var Pan (Variation Pan) ............................................................... 58

Var Return (Variation Return) ..................................................... 58

Var Send (Variation Send) ........................................................... 67

VarConnect (Variation Connection) ............................................ 58

VarEF (Variation Effect Type) .............................................. 57, 72

Variation Connection ................................................................... 58

Variation Effect Type ............................................................. 57, 72

Variation Effects .......................................................................... 53

Variation Pan ................................................................................ 58

Variation Parameters .............................................................. 57, 72

Variation Return ........................................................................... 58

Variation Send .............................................................................. 67

Vel Curve (Velocity Curve) ......................................................... 90

VelLmt-H (Velocity Limit High) (Multi) .................................... 60

VelLmt-H (Velocity Limit High) (Voice) ................................... 74

VelLmt-L (Velocity Limit Low) (Multi) ..................................... 60

VelLmt-L (Velocity Limit Low) (Voice) ..................................... 74

VelLmt-L/H (Velocity Limit Low/High) (Basics) ....................... 50

Velocity Curve ............................................................................. 90

Velocity Limit High (Multi) ........................................................ 60

Velocity Limit High (Voice) ........................................................ 74

Velocity Limit Low (Multi) ......................................................... 60

Velocity Limit Low (Voice) ........................................................ 74

Velocity Limit Low/High (Basics) .............................................. 50

Velocity Sensitivity Depth ..................................................... 62, 72

Velocity Sensitivity Offset ..................................................... 62, 72

VelSnsDpt (Velocity Sensitivity Depth) ................................ 62, 72

VelSnsOfs (Velocity Sensitivity Offset) ................................ 62, 72

Vib Delay (Vibrato Delay) ........................................................... 64

Vib Depth (Vibrato Depth) .......................................................... 64

Vib Rate (Vibrato Rate) ............................................................... 64

Vibrato Delay ............................................................................... 64

Vibrato Depth ............................................................................... 64

Vibrato Rate ................................................................................. 64

Voice (Basics) .............................................................................. 25

Voice (Reference) ........................................................................ 70

Voice Edit (Basics) ...................................................................... 47

Voice Edit (Reference) ................................................................. 70

Voice Edit Mode (About the Modes) ........................................... 19

Voice Edit Mode (Selecting a Mode) .......................................... 29

Voice Effect Bypass ..................................................................... 92

Voice Job ...................................................................................... 87

Voice Job Mode (About the Modes) ............................................ 19

Voice Job Mode (Selecting a Mode) ............................................ 29

Voice Mode (About the Modes) ..................................................19

Voice Mode (Reference) .............................................................. 70

Voice Mode MIDI Receive Channel ........................................... 94

Voice Play Mode (About the Modes) .......................................... 19

Voice Play Mode (Selecting a Mode) .......................................... 28

Voice Selection ............................................................................ 59

Voice Store ................................................................................... 89

Voices ........................................................................................... 25

Volume ......................................................................................... 60

[VOLUME] slider .......................................................................... 8

Wave Selection ............................................................................ 73

Waves ........................................................................................... 27

XG .................................................................................................. 4

MEMO

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized

distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au

distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el

distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

NORTH AMERICA

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.

Av. Reboucas 2636-Pinheiros CEP: 05402-400

Sao Paulo-SP. Brasil

Tel: 011-3085-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

EUROPE

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY/SWITZERLAND

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

THE NETHERLANDS

Yamaha Music Central Europe,

Branch Nederland

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Belgium

Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels,

Belgium

Tel: 02-726 6032

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Combo Division

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 8B

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120

IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

AFRICA

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

MIDDLE EAST

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone

P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

ASIA

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),

Jingan, Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto

Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,

Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3770-0660

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 ﬂoor

Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan

Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2626

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

OCEANIA

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.

146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,

Auckland, New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2445

SY34

NEDERLAND / THE NETHERLANDS

• Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up.

• This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up.

• Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het

moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur afdankt of

de volgende Yamaha Service Afdeiing:

Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing

Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT

Tel. 030-2828425

• For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the end of

the service life please consult your retailer or Yamaha Service Center as

follows:

Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center

Address : Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT

Tel: 030-2828425

• Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA.

• Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small chemical

waste.

(lithium disposal)

ADVARSEL!

Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må

kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri

tilbage til leverandoren.

VARNING

Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en

ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt

batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.

VAROITUS

Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo

ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo

valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.

(lithium caution)

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in

this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modiﬁcations not expressly

approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use

the product.

2. IMPORTANT:

When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use

only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions

could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE:

This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements

listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance

with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your

use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful

interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses

radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the

instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to

the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations

does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined

by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by

using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the

interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse)

circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the

antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type

cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please

contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you

can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation

of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena

Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

Yamaha Web Site (English only)

http://www.yamahasynth.com

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

V654540 404MWCP2.3-03C0

Printed in Japan

This document is printed on chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink.

OWNER’S MANUAL

Documenttranscriptie

OWNER’S MANUAL SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! IF you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number ,the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Model NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. Serial No. Purchase Date ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-BP (bottom) PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Use the specified adaptor (PA-3C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the outlet. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multipleconnector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televisions, radios, or speakers, since this might cause interference which can affect proper operation of the other products. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Also, do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. • Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. ■ REPLACING THE BACKUP BATTERY • This instrument contains a non rechargeable internal backup battery which permits internal data to remain stored even when the power is off. When the backup battery needs replacing, the message “!BatteryLo” will display in the LCD. When this happens, immediately back up your data (using an external device such as the floppy disk-based Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3), then have qualified Yamaha service personnel replace the backup battery. • Do not attempt to replace the backup battery yourself, in order to prevent the possible serious hazards. Always have qualified Yamaha service personnel replace the backup battery. • Never place the backup battery in a location that a child can reach, since a child might accidentally swallow the battery. If this should happen, consult a physician immediately. ■ SAVING USER DATA • Save all data to an external device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3, in order to help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. (3)-6 Introduction Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha S03 Music Synthesizer. In order to get the most out of your new S03 and its sophisticated functions, we suggest you read through this manual thoroughly. Also keep it in a safe, convenient place so that you can regularly refer to it when necessary. Package Contents • PA-3C AC Adaptor * n Since the PA-3C has the same specifications as the PA-3B, the PA-3C can be used as the AC adapter for any product requiring the PA-3B. • Owner’s Manual • Data List * May not be included in your area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. Main Features • Exceptionally high-quality dynamic Voices — including many sounds from Yamaha’s top-of-the-line S80 Music Synthesizer (page 18). • Wide variety of pro-quality digital effects (page 53). • Category Search function for quickly calling up Voices in a desired instrument group (page 35). • A total of 480 Normal Voices and 20 Drum Voices, all XG-compatible — in addition to Preset Voices and User Voices (page 25). • Comprehensive, detailed editing features for customizing your Voices (page 70). • Convenient TO HOST terminal for direct, easy connection to computer — with just one cable (page 13). GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is a standard specification that defines the arrangement of voices in a tone generator and its MIDI functionality, ensuring that data can be played back with substantially the same sounds on any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of its manufacturer or model. Tone generators and song data that meet the “GM System Level 1” bear this GM logo. XG “XG” is a tone generator format that expands the voice arrangement of the “GM System Level 1” specification to meet the ever-increasing demands of today’s computer peripheral environment, providing richer expressive power while maintaining upward compatibility of data. “XG” greatly expands “GM System Level 1” by defining the ways in which voices are expanded or edited and the structure and type of effects. When commercially available song data bearing the XG logo is played back on a tone generator which bears the XG logo, you will enjoy a full musical experience that includes unlimited expansion voices and effect functions. 4 About This Manual This manual is basically divided into two sections: ■ Basics Section (Page 8) Explains how to get started with the S03, it’s overall structure, and how to use its main features and functions. ■ Reference Section (Page 55) Explains the parameters of the S03’s various modes. About the “Page” References in this Manual PAGE xx ..... Refers to a display “page” in the LCD page xx ........ Refers to an actual page in this manual. Many of the functions and parameters of the S03 are shown on various display “pages,” each of which is numbered within each mode and indicated in the display. Searching for a function or parameter is made more convenient and fast by the use of these page numbers. To distinguish these display page references from actual pages in the manual, we’ve applied the following convention: “PAGE” (all capital letters) refers to the display page. Unless indicated otherwise, the PAGE reference is for display pages within the same mode (as described for other parameters in the same section). Throughout the manual, parameter names are prefaced by numbers, such as “13-2 Resonance.” This, for example, indicates that the Resonance parameter is on display PAGE 13 in the selected mode. When one display page contains two or more related parameters, use the [E]/[F] buttons (page 30) to scroll through the available parameters. These related parameters selected by the [E]/[F] buttons are indicated by hyphenated numbers (e.g., 13-1, 13-2, etc.). In the example above, you can select the Resonance parameter by using the [E]/[F] buttons to move to the second page. n For a full listing of the parameters and their corresponding display pages, refer to the Function Tree chart (page 20) or the Parameter Table (page 22). ● Copying of the commercially available music sequence data and/or digital audio files is strictry prohibited except for your personal use. ● The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. ● The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. 5 Table of Contents Basics Section............................8 Reference Section ....................55 The Controls & Connectors ................................................ 8 Multi Mode ......................................................................... 55 Front Panel ................................................................................... 8 Rear Panel .................................................................................. 10 Multi Edit................................................................................... 55 Common (Settings for all Parts) ........................................... 56 Part (Settings for each Part).................................................. 59 Multi Job.................................................................................... 67 Performing a Job................................................................... 67 Multi Store................................................................................. 69 Before Use ........................................................................... 11 Power Supply ............................................................................. 11 Connections................................................................................ 11 Powering Up .............................................................................. 15 Demo Playback................................................................... 16 Voice Mode ......................................................................... 70 About the Modes ................................................................ 19 Voice Edit .................................................................................. 70 Normal Voice ....................................................................... 70 Drum Voices......................................................................... 84 Voice Job ................................................................................... 87 Performing a Job................................................................... 87 Voice Store ................................................................................ 89 Function Tree chart ........................................................... 20 Utility Mode........................................................................ 90 Overview of the S03 ........................................................... 17 Controller ................................................................................... 17 Tone Generator .......................................................................... 17 Effects ........................................................................................ 18 Parameter Table................................................................. 22 Utility Job .................................................................................. 92 Factory Set (Restore Factory Defaults) ................................ 92 Multis .................................................................................. 24 MIDI Mode......................................................................... 93 Voices .................................................................................. 25 Overview of Voices/Waves ....................................................... 26 Waves......................................................................................... 27 Appendix ................................95 Basic Operations ................................................................ 28 About MIDI ........................................................................ 95 Selecting a Mode........................................................................ 28 Selecting a Screen ...................................................................... 30 Entering Data ............................................................................. 31 Display Messages.............................................................. 100 Playing the S03 ................................................................... 33 Playing the Voices ..................................................................... 33 Using Multi Mode .............................................................. 37 Playing in Multi Mode ............................................................... 37 Using the S03 as a Multitimbral Tone Generator (Multi Edit) .. 38 Performing Live While Playing Back a Song File..................... 40 Splitting the Keyboard — Setting Upper and Lower Ranges for the Voices .... 41 Layering Two Voices (Parts) Together...................................... 42 Using Controllers ............................................................... 44 Pitch Bend Wheel ...................................................................... 44 Modulation Wheel ..................................................................... 44 Foot Controller........................................................................... 45 Foot Switch ................................................................................ 46 Voice Edit............................................................................ 47 Effects.................................................................................. 53 Effects in Voice Mode ............................................................... 53 Effects in Multi Mode ................................................................ 53 6 Troubleshooting ............................................................... 101 Specifications.................................................................... 105 Index.................................................................................. 106 This convenient, easy-to-use index is divided to general categories to help you when you want to find information on a specific topic or function. Multi Mode Listening/Playing • Listening to Demo songs ........................................................................................................................................ Demo Playback (Page 16) • Playing the voices............................................................................................................................................................................... (Page 33) • Calling up Voices in a desired instrument group .............................................................................Using Voice Category Search (Page 35) • Performing live while playing back a Song file ................................................................................................................................ (Page 40) • Splitting the keyboard — Setting upper and lower ranges for the Voices In Multi mode .................................................................................................................................................................................... (Page 41) In Voice mode.................................................................................................................................................................. Note Limit (Page 73) • Layering two voices (Parts together) ................................................................................................................................................ (Page 42) Basics Section Application Index Using controllers • Connecting controllers ...................................................................................................................................................................... (Page 14) • Using a Foot Controller to control parameters................................................................................................................................. (Page 45) • Using a Footswitch to advance through Voice or Multi programs .................................................................................................. (Page 46) • Maintaining the controller state/position when you switch between voices..................................................... Controller Reset (Page 91) • Setting the AC1 (Assignable Controller 1) Controller ..........................................................................................Foot Controller (Page 45) AC1 (Assignable Controller 1) (Page 66) Voice Mode Copying • Copying the Voice Variation Effect settings to the Multi mode ..................................................................Copy Variation Effect (Page 68) • Copying the Controller settings of the Voice mode to the Multi mode ...............................................................Copy Controller (Page 68) • Copying Part parameter settings of the Multi being edited to another Part in the same Multi..................................................... (Page 68) • Copying Element parameter settings of the Voice being edited to another Element in the same Voice ....................................... (Page 88) • Backing up your S03 data............................................................................................Saving S03 Settings to an External Device (Page 42) Utility Mode MIDI Mode Changing the sound • Editing a Voice ................................................................................................................................................................. Voice Edit (Page 47) • Effect structure and signal flow ............................................................................................................................................ Effects (Page 53) • Details on the parameters of the modes .............................................................................................................Reference Section (Page 55) Saving data • Storing the edited Voice to the S03 internal (USER) memory.....................................................................................Voice Store (Page 89) • Storing the edited Multi to the S03 internal (USER) memory ................................................................................... Multi Store (Page 69) • Saving S03 settings (Voice/Multi/MIDI/Utility) to an external device such as a computer .......... Saving S03 Settings to an External Device (Page 42) Resetting parameters (Initializing) • Initializing Multi parameters ............................................................................................................................................ Initialize (Page 68) • Initializing Voice parameters............................................................................................................................................. Initialize (Page 88) • Resetting the S03 to its default settings............................................................................Factory Set (Restore Factory Defaults) (Page 92) Quick solutions • Global functions of the S03.............................................................................................................................Function Tree chart (Page 20) • S03 parameter structure and the LCD PAGES..................................................................................................... Parameter Table (Page 22) • General information on MIDI......................................................................................................................................About MIDI (Page 95) • Meaning of the display messages ...................................................................................................................... Display Messages (Page 100) • Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................................................................(Page 101) 7 Appendix Connecting the S03 to other devices • Connecting a computer............................................................................................................... Connecting a Personal computer (Page 13) • Setting Local On/Off .................................................................................................................................................. Local On/Off (Page 93) • Using the S03 as a multitimbral tone generator............................................................................................................................... (Page 38) • Sending the S03 data using the Bulk Dump function ...............................................Saving S03 Settings to an External Device (Page 42) Basics Section Basics Section The Controls & Connectors Font Panel 1 PHONES OUTPUT L MONO R DC IN STANDBY ON FOOT CONTROLLER FOOT SWITCH 2 TO HOST HOST SELECT 5 IN MIDI OUT 6 7 8 9)! $ THRU EDIT VOLUME UTILITY MIDI MULTI PART VOICE COMMON MODE MULTI VOICE PART ELEMENT KEY DEMO CATEGORY SEARCH DRUM PAGE MUSIC SYNTHESIZER ELEM KEY KEY PART ELEM MIDI OCTAVE VOICE OSC MIX TG MIX PITCH KEYBOARD GENERAL FILTER MIDI CHANNEL TONE AMP MIDI FILTER CONTROLLER LFO CONTROLLER EFFECT EFFECT EFFECT UP DATA UTILITY MIDI EDIT JOB COMPARE 3 4 1 OCTAVE [UP] and [DOWN] buttons (Page 36) Press either of these buttons to shift the note range of the keyboard up or down in octaves. Press them together to restore the normal range (0). 2 [VOLUME] slider (Page 15) Adjusts the master volume output from the OUTPUT L/R jacks and the PHONES jack. Move the slider upwards to raise the level. 3 PITCH bend wheel (Page 44) Controls the pitch bend effect. 4 MODULATION wheel (Page 44) Controls the modulation effect. You can also assign other parameters and functions to this controller. 5 LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) This backlit LCD displays various operation messages and information. 6 Parameter Type List (Page 30) Follow the arrow in the LCD across to the appropriate column in the list; the arrow indicates the type of the currently selected parameter. 8 8 9 ORGAN 5 GUITAR 6 COMMON DEC NO OCTAVE DOWN 7 PIANO 4 MUTE ELEMENT PRESET UTILITY STORE INC YES DRUM/PERC USER SE GM XG OTHER @# BASS 1 STRINGS 2 BRASS 3 REED/PIPE 0 SYN LEAD SYN PAD ENTER SYN COMP CHROMATIC KEYBOARD PERCUSSION EXIT %^ 7 MODE buttons (Page 19) Press these to buttons to select one of the modes: Multi, Voice, Utility, or another mode. 8 [PART/ELEMENT/KEY] buttons These buttons are used to select Parts/Elements/ Drum keys in the Multi Edit or Voice Edit Mode. 8-1 [+]/[–] buttons (Page 30) In the Multi Mode, these buttons select Parts 1 to 16. In the Multi Part Edit mode, press both of these buttons simultaneously to call up the Common Edit screens. To return to the Part Edit screens, press only one of these buttons, [–] or [+]. In the Voice Edit Mode, these buttons select Elements 1 to 4 or the Drum keys. In the Voice Element Edit mode, press both of these buttons simultaneously to call up the Common Edit screens. To return to the Element Edit screens, press only one of these buttons, [–] or [+]. 8-2 [MUTE] button (Page 48, 55) In the Multi Mode, this button mutes the selected Parts. In the Voice Edit Mode, this button mutes the selected Elements or Drum keys. 9-1 [DEC/NO] button (Page 31) Use this to decrease the value of the selected parameter. To decrease the value by 10, simultaneously hold down this button and press the [INC/YES] button. The button can also be used to cancel a Job or Store operation. 9-2 [INC/YES] button (Page 31) Use this to increase the value of the selected parameter. To increase the value by 10, simultaneously hold down this button and press the [DEC/NO] button. The button can also be used to execute a Job or Store operation. 9-3 [ ▲ ]/[ ▼ ] buttons (Page 30) Use these to select the screen “pages” in each Mode. 9-4 [E]/[F] buttons (Page 30) Use these to select the value to be set in the LCD, or to display continuous parts of the page (on the left and right), for pages that consist of several parts. ) [CATEGORY SEARCH/DRUM] button (Pages 34, 35) Turns on the Category Search function (page 35). This function allows you to instantly select a desired Voice category from the numeric keypad or the Memory buttons. You can also assign the drum bank of each memory by simultaneously pressing this button and the [USER/(SE)] button or the [GM/XG /(OTHER)] button. ! [PRESET/(DRUM/PERC)] button (Page 33) In the Multi and Voice modes, this lets you select the Preset Memory programs. When the Category Search function (page 35) is active, this is used to specify the DRUM/PERC Voice category. @ [USER/(SE)] button (Page 33) In the Multi and Voice modes, this lets you select the User Memory programs. You can also specify a User Memory Drum bank by simultaneously pressing both this button and the [CATEGORY SEARCH/DRUM] button. When the Category Search function (page 35) is active, this is used to specify the SE Voice category. # [GM/XG/(OTHER)] button (Page 33) In the Multi and Voice modes, this lets you select the GM/XG Memory programs. You can also specify a GM/XG Memory Drum bank by simultaneously pressing both this button and the [CATEGORY SEARCH/DRUM] button. When the Category Search function (page 35) is active, this is used to specify the OTHER: CO, ME Voice categories. $ Numeric keypad (Pages 32, 35) This is used to select specific Multi or Program numbers. In the Edit mode, it is used to input parameter data values. The selected value is actually entered or executed only after pressing the [ENTER] button. This is also used to select the various Voice categories (page 70) when the Category Search function (page 35) is set to ON. % [ENTER/KEYBOARD] button This is used to enter or execute the value typed in from the numeric keypad. This can also be used to set parameters whose values are expressed as a note (from C-2 - G8); simultaneously hold this button and press the desired key on the keyboard. It is also used for executing various jobs and store operations. & [EXIT] button (Page 31) During editing or when in a mode other than Multi/ Voice Play, pressing this button exits from the mode and returns to the Multi/Voice Play mode. 9 Basics Section 9 DATA buttons (Page 30) These are used during editing for selecting various pages and for setting parameter values. Basics Section Rear Panel THRU MIDI OUT 1 IN HOST SELECT PC-2 Mac MIDI OFF TO HOST 2 3 FOOT SWITCH 4 5 1 MIDI IN/OUT/THRU terminals (Page 12) MIDI IN receives MIDI messages from an external MIDI device. Use this connector to control the S03 from an external MIDI device. MIDI OUT sends out MIDI messages generated by the S03 (including notes played on the keyboard and panel control movements) to an external MIDI sound module or device. MIDI THRU simply relays the MIDI messages received at MIDI IN. Connect other devices here. 2 HOST SELECT switch (Page 12) For selecting the type of computer connected to the S03 via the TO HOST connector. When using the MIDI IN/OUT/THRU terminals, set this switch to MIDI. 3 TO HOST terminal (Page 13) For connection to a computer, using an optional serial computer cable. 4 FOOT SWITCH jack (Pages 14, 46) For connecting an optional footswitch (FC4 or FC5). Depending on the assigned function, you can use the footswitch to turn specific functions on and off. 10 FOOT CONTROLLER STANDBY ON DC IN 6 7 R OUTPUT L MONO PHONES 8 9 5 FOOT CONTROLLER jack (Pages 14, 45) For connecting an optional foot controller (FC7, etc.). This gives you real-time control over various aspects of the sound, such as tone, pitch, and volume. 6 STANDBY/ON switch (Page 15) Use this to turn the S03 on or off. Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not using the S03 for an extended period of time, be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. 7 DC IN terminal (Page 11) For connecting an appropriate AC power adaptor (PA-3C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) to supply power to the S03. 8 OUTPUT L/MONO and R jack (Page 11) Line level audio signals are output from the S03 via these phone jacks (1/4" mono phone plug). For monophonic output, use just the L/MONO jack. 9 PHONES jack (Page 11) For connection to a pair of stereo headphones. This section explains how to connect to an AC power source, audio and MIDI devices, and a computer system. Only switch the S03 on after you have made all the necessary connections. We strongly recommended you read this section BEFORE using the S03. Power Supply Connections S03 Rear Panel STANDBY ON DC IN R OUTPUT L MONO PHONES DC IN To electrical outlet 1 Make sure that the S03’s STANDBY/ON switch is at the STANDBY (off) position. 2 Connect the PA-3C’s DC plug to the S03’s DC IN terminal on the instrument’s rear panel. 3 Connect the adaptor’s AC plug to the nearest electrical outlet. Do not attempt to use an AC adaptor other than the Yamaha PA-3C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha. The use of an incompatible adaptor may cause irreparable damage to the S03, and may even pose a serious shock hazard! ALWAYS UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTOR FROM THE AC POWER OUTLET WHEN THE S03 IS NOT IN USE. Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not using the S03 for an extended period of time, be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. Connecting to External Audio Equipment Since the S03 has no built-in speakers, you need to monitor its sound output via external audio equipment. Alternatively, you could use a pair of headphones. There are several methods of connecting to external audio equipment, as described in the following illustrations. Connecting Stereo Powered Speakers A pair of powered speakers can accurately produce the S03’s rich sounds with their own pan and effect settings. Connect your powered speakers to the OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks on the rear panel. Powered speaker (Left) Powered speaker (Right) Stereo headphones INPUT OUTPUT L / MONO INPUT OUTPUT R PHONES S03 n When using just one powered speaker, connect it to the OUTPUT L/MONO jack on the rear panel. 11 Basics Section Before Use Basics Section Connecting to a Mixer If you want to integrate the S03 into a larger system with other instruments and additional audio processing capabilities, connect it to a mixer, amplifier and stereo monitor system as shown below. Speaker Connecting External MIDI Equipment You can connect an external MIDI device using a MIDI cable (available separately) and control it from the S03. You can also use an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer to control the S03’s internal sounds. This section introduces several different MIDI applications. Amplifier L R Mixer OUTPUT L R Stereo headphones 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 OUTPUT L / MONO L n The HOST SELECT switch on the rear panel should be set to “MIDI” Otherwise, MIDI data will not be transmitted from the S03’s MIDI OUT connector. Controlling the S03 from an External MIDI Keyboard R OUTPUT R HOST SELECT PC-2 Mac PHONES MIDI OFF MIDI IN S03 n Connecting a pair of headphones does not affect audio output from the OUTPUT (L/MONO and R) jacks. The audio output at the PHONES jack and the OUTPUT jacks is exactly the same. S03 MIDI OUT External MIDI keyboard or synthesizer Controlling an External MIDI Keyboard with the S03 HOST SELECT PC-2 Mac MIDI OFF MIDI IN S03 MIDI OUT External MIDI keyboard or synthesizer 12 MIDI IN HOST SELECT MIDI OUT PC-2 Mac MIDI OFF External MIDI sequencer MIDI OUT S03 Controlling Another MIDI Device via MIDI THRU HOST SELECT 1: Serial connection (the computer’s serial port to the S03’s TO HOST terminal) 2: MIDI connection (the computer’s MIDI interface or external MIDI interface to the S03’s MIDI IN and OUT) Depending on your particular computer, the connections may differ. (See below.) n You may also want to change the Local On/Off setting (page 93), depending on how you are using the S03 in your MIDI system. External MIDI synthesizer MIDI OUT PC-2 Mac MIDI You can use a connected computer to control the S03 and to transfer S03 data to/from computer via MIDI. There are two ways to connect your S03 to a computer: MIDI IN External MIDI sequencer Connecting to a Personal Computer MIDI IN 1: Serial Port to TO HOST OFF MIDI IN MIDI THRU IBM-PC/AT MIDI OUT HOST SELECT 8-pin MINI DIN to D-SUB 9-pin Cable PC-2 Mac MIDI OFF TO HOST S03 PS/V Personal System/V Personal System/V IBM MIDI IN RS-232C (DB9) External MIDI synthesizer With the above MIDI connections, you can send MIDI data from the S03’s MIDI OUT terminal, while sending MIDI data from the external sequencer to an external MIDI synthesizer via the S03’s MIDI THRU terminal. n The MIDI cable should be no greater than 15 meters in length, and there should be no more than three devices in a MIDI chain (chained in series via each unit’s MIDI THRU). To connect more units, use a MIDI Thru Box for parallel connections. You may encounter errors if the MIDI cables are too long or if too many devices are chained together via their MIDI THRU connectors. S03 IBM-PC/AT and compatibles mini DIN 8-pin D-SUB 9-pin Macintosh HOST SELECT PC-2 Mac MIDI OFF Macintosh Peripheral Cable (M0197) TO HOST S03 mini DIN 8-pin Macintosh mini DIN 8-pin 13 Basics Section Recording and Playback using an External MIDI Sequencer Basics Section 2: MIDI Interface to MIDI IN and OUT Connecting Controllers Using the computer’s MIDI interface The S03 has controller jacks on the rear panel, including FOOT SWITCH and FOOT CONTROLLER. You can connect optional controllers such as a footswitch (the FC4 or FC5) and foot controller (the FC7) to control tone, volume, pitch and other parameters. HOST SELECT PC-2 PC-1 MIDI Mac MIDI IN MIDI OUT n Details about how to use these controllers are given on page 45. NEC MultiSync MIDI OUT MIDI IN S03 PC-9821 AS NEC Computer with MIDI interface S03 HOST SELECT PC-2 Mac DI Using an external MIDI interface OFF TO HOST FOOT SWITCH FOOT CONTROLLER STANDBY ON DC IN R OUTPUT L MONO PHONES ■ Connection to serial port MIDI Interface HOST SELECT MIDI OUT PC-2 Mac MIDI OFF FOOT CONTROLLER FC7 MIDI IN MIDI IN MIDI OUT FOOT SWITCH FC4 or FC5 Computer S03 ■ Connection to USB terminal USB-MIDI interface (UX256, etc.) MIDI OUT HOST SELECT PC-2 Mac MIDI OFF MIDI IN MIDI IN S03 MIDI OUT Computer n You will also need the appropriate MIDI application (sequencer, editor, etc.), compatible with your computer platform. 14 Turning on the S03 Power-on Procedure In order to avoid possible damage to the speakers or other connected electronic equipment, always switch on the power of the S03 before switching on the power of the amplified speakers or mixer and amplifier. Likewise, always switch off the power of the S03 after switching off the power of the amplified speakers or mixer and amplifier. When you have made all the necessary connections between your S03 and any other devices, make sure that all volume settings are turned down all the way to zero. Then turn on every device in your setup in the order of MIDI masters (senders), MIDI slaves (receivers), then the audio equipment (mixers, amplifiers, speakers, etc.). This ensures smooth MIDI operation and prevents speaker damage. When powering down the setup, first turn down the volume for each audio device, then switch off each device in the reverse order (first audio devices, then MIDI). Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not using the S03 for an extended period of time, be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. n Before you switch your S03 on or off, first turn down the volume of any connected audio equipment. 1 Press the STANDBY/ON switch When using the S03 as MIDI slave: H FOOT CONTROLLER STANDBY ON DC IN R OUTPUT L MONO PHONES MIDI master (transmitting device) POWER ON!! S03 as MIDI slave (MIDI receiving device) 2 A splash screen (“Welcome to S03”) is displayed briefly. 3 The Multi or Voice Play Mode screen appears next. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 L R PAGE Audio equipment (first mixer, then amplifier) GrandPno XG001 PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE 4 Turn up the amplifier’s volume as necessary. 5 Adjust the S03’s [VOLUME] slider to set an appropriate volume level. VOLUME 15 Basics Section Powering Up Basics Section Demo Playback The S03 features a variety of demo songs, showcasing its dynamic sound and sophisticated functions. n Make sure synthesizer is ready for playback. Details are given in the section “Before Use” on page 11. At the “Demo” screen, any data in the instrument’s User Voice memory will be overwritten by the data for the demo song. Important data should be saved to the external MIDI device or computer beforehand. At the “DEMO” screen, the Master Tune parameter (in Utility) will be overwritten and set to “0.” 1 Press the [DEMO] button. The following screen appears. MODE MULTI VOICE EraseUserV OK? DEMO PART ELEM KEY PAGE OCTAVE 2 Press the [INC/YES] button to call up the Demo screen and automatically start playback of the Demo song. 3 To stop Demo playback, press one of the following buttons: [MULTI], [VOICE], or [EXIT]. This exits from the Demo mode and automatically returns to the Multi mode, Voice mode, or the mode previously selected. n Demo song playback continues indefinitely until stopped. MODE MULTI VOICE PART ELEMENT KEY DEMO 7 8 9 PRESET PIANO 4 ORGAN 5 GUITAR 6 DRUM/PERC USER BASS 1 STRINGS 2 BRASS 3 REED/PIPE 0 SYN LEAD SYN PAD ENTER SYN COMP CHROMATIC KEYBOARD PERCUSSION CATEGORY SEARCH DRUM MUTE COMMON DATA UTILITY MIDI EDIT JOB DEC NO INC YES SE GM XG STORE COMPARE OTHER EXIT Demo Song Selection While the Demo song is playing back, you can select the particular Demo song that you wish to hear. Enter the desired Demo song category from the numeric keypad to call up the song. 7 8 9 PRESET PIANO 4 ORGAN 5 GUITAR 6 DRUM/PERC USER BASS 1 STRINGS 2 BRASS 3 REED/PIPE 0 SYN LEAD SYN PAD ENTER SYN COMP CHROMATIC KEYBOARD PERCUSSION CATEGORY SEARCH DRUM SE GM XG OTHER Select the category EXIT For example, you can play the piano song by pressing button 7 (PIANO) in the numeric keypad. If you don’t select a particular song, an ensemble (OTHER) song will play back automatically. n When there are several Demo songs contained in one category, you can select from among the available songs by using the [DEC/NO] and [INC/YES] buttons. 16 Basics Section Overview of the S03 The S03 has a wide variety of advanced and convenient features. This section gives you an overview of these features. The following diagram shows the various component sections or “blocks” of the S03. Controller keyboard controllers Tone Generator Effect Controller This block consists of the keyboard, Pitch Bend and Modulation wheels and so on. The keyboard itself doesn’t generate sounds, but instead sends note, velocity and other information to the S03’s tone generator section for the notes you play. The controllers also send non-note performance data. Information from the keyboard and controllers can be transmitted to other external MIDI devices through the MIDI OUT connector. Tone Generator This block plays back sounds according to information received from the keyboard and controllers. The following example illustrates the path taken by the signal from an Element in the Voice Mode. Controls the pitch of each Element output from the OSC section. Controls the output level (amplitude) of each Element output from the FILTER section. The signals are then sent at this level to the Effects Units. Tone Generator OSC (Oscillator) PITCH Outputs the waveform of each Element. Each Voice consists of up to four Elements. FILTER AMP (Amplitude) To Effects Units Changes the tonal quality of each Element output from the PITCH section. 17 Basics Section About the Tone Generator The tone generator of the S03 utilizes the sophisticated AWM2 system. AWM2 (Advanced Wave Memory 2) is a synthesis system based on the use of sampled waveforms, and is used in many Yamaha synthesizers. For extra realism, each AWM2 Voice uses multiple samples of a real instrument’s waveform. Furthermore, a wide variety of envelope generator, filter, modulation, and other parameters can be applied to the basic waveform. n AWM2 is not just limited to conventional pitched instruments (Normal Voices), but also produces various drum and percussion instruments (Drum Voices). For details about Normal and Drum Voices, see page 26. Maximum Polyphony The maximum polyphony of the S03 is 64 notes. However, the actual note polyphony will vary depending on the number of Elements in the Voice. To calculate the actual polyphony, divide the total polyphony of 64 by the number of Elements in the Voice. For instance, if a Voice consists of two Elements, the maximum note polyphony for the Voice is 32. Effects The effects can be used to change or enhance the sound of a Multi or Voice. These include the effects of the Reverb section (11 types) for adding ambient after-tones to the sound, the Chorus section (11 types) that add animation and depth, and the Variation section (42 types) which features a wealth of additional effects. n For more details about the effects, see page 53. 18 Basics Section About the Modes The S03 has various modes, each covering a different set of operations and functions. Voice Mode Multi Mode Multi Play Mode Multi Edit Mode Multi Job Mode Voice Play Mode Voice Edit Mode Voice Job Mode MODE MULTI VOICE DEMO DEMO Mode UTILITY MIDI Utility Mode MIDI Mode EDIT JOB STORE Store Mode COMPARE Multi Mode (Page 55) Voice Mode (Page 70) DEMO Mode (Page 16) Multi Play Mode Voice Play Mode Select this mode when you want to use the S03 as a multi-timbral tone generator. In this mode, you can use an external MIDI sequencer to play several different instrument parts simultaneously. This mode can also be used to combine several different Voices together in a layer. Normal Voices and Drum Voices can be played in this mode. You can select from the Preset Voices (128 Normal Voices), User Voices (128 Normal Voices plus two Drum Kits) and XG Voices (480 Normal Voices plus 20 Drum Kits). The S03 also features a convenient Category Search function that lets quickly select a Voice according to its instrument type. In this mode, you can play the Demo songs contained in internal memory. The various Demo songs play back continuously. Multi Edit Mode In this mode, you can edit and create Multis. You can save up to 32 Multis to internal memory. Multi Job Mode In this mode, you can copy and initialize Multis, and perform other similar operations (Jobs). Voice Edit Mode Normal Voices and Drum Voices can be created and edited in this mode. You can save up to 128 edited Normal Voices and two edited Drum Kits as User Voices in internal memory. Voice Job Mode In this mode, you can copy Elements and initialize Voices, and perform other similar operations (Jobs). Utility Mode (Page 90) This mode contains global settings related to the entire system of the S03, such as master tuning and controller-related settings. MIDI Mode (Page 93) In this mode, you can make MIDIrelated settings, such as the MIDI transmit/receive channels and device number. Store Mode (Pages 69, 89) In this mode, you can store your original Voices and Multis to internal memory. 19 Basics Section Function Tree chart LCD Display (parameter name) Multi Edit Common GENERAL Name Total Vol (Total Volume) Transpose EFFECT RevEF (Reverb Effect Type) Reverb Parameters Rev Return (Reverb Return) Reverb Pan ChoEF (Chorus Effect Type) Chorus Parameters Cho Return (Chorus Return) Chorus Pan SndCho Rev (Send Chorus to Reverb) VarEF (Variation Effect Type) Variation Parameters VarConnect (Variation Connection) Var Return (Variation Return) Var Pan SndVar Rev (Send Variation to Reverb) SndVar Rev (Send Variation to Chorus) MW VarCtl (MW Variation Effect Control Depth) AC1VarCtl (AC1 Variation Effect Control Depth) Part VOICE Voice Selection MIX Volume Pan NtLmt-H (Note Limit Low/High) VelLmt-L (Velocity Limit Low/High) GENERAL Rcv Ch (MIDI Receive Channel) NoteShift/Detune Mono/Poly Part Mode TONE VelSnsDpt/Ofs (Velocity Sensitivity Depth/Offset) Cutoff/Resonance Attack/Decay/Releas Tm (Attack/Decay/Release Time) PEG L/Tm (PEG Level/Time) Vib Rate/Depth/Delay (Vibrato Rate/Depth/Delay) CONTROLLER Porta Sw/Time (Portamento Switch/Time) PB Range (Pitch Bend Range) MW FltCtl (MW Filter Control) MW PMod (MW Pitch Modulation Depth) MW FMod (MW Filter Modulation Depth) MW AMod (MW Amplitude Modulation Depth) AC1 CC No (AC1 Control Change Number) AC1FltCtl (AC1 Filter Control) AC1 FMod (AC1 Filter Modulation Depth) AC1 AMod (AC1 Amplitude Modulation Depth) EFFECT ReverbSend ChorusSend Var Send (Variation Send) Multi Job Init (Initialize) CpyVar (Copy Variation Effect) CpyCtl (Copy Controller) CpyPart (Copy Part) BlkDmp (Bulk Dump) 20 LCD PAGE Owner's Manual Page 56 1 2 3 56 56 56 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 56 56 56 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 58 58 58 58 58 58 59 1 59 2 3 4 5 60 60 60 60 6 7 8 9 61 61 61 61 10 11 12 13 14 62 63 63 64 64 15 16 17 18 18 18 19 20 21 21 65 65 65 65 65 65 66 66 66 66 22 23 24 66 66 67 1 2 3 4 5 67 68 68 68 68 68 LCD Display (parameter name) Voice Edit Common GENERAL Name Total Vol/Lvl (Total Volume/Level) Mono/Poly VelSnsDpt/Ofs (Velocity Sensitivity Depth/Offset) CONTROLLER Porta Sw/Time (Portamento Switch/Time) PB Range (Pitch Bend Range) MW FltCtl (MW Filter Control) MW PMod (MW Pitch Modulation Depth) MW FMod (MW Filter Modulation Depth) MW AMod (MW Amplitude Modulation Depth) AC1FltCtl (AC1 Filter Control) AC1 FMod (AC1 Filter Modulation Depth) AC1 AMod (AC1 Amplitude Modulation Depth) EFFECT ReverbSend ChorusSend SndCho Rev (Send Chorus to Reverb) VarEF (Variation Effect Type) Variation Parameters MW VarCtl (MW Variation Effect Control Depth) AC1 VarCtl (AC1 Variation Effect Control Depth) Element OSC/MIX (Oscillator/Mixer) Element Sw (Element Switch) Wave Selection Level Pan NtLmt-L/H (Note Limit Low/High) VelLmt-L/H (Velocity Limit Low/High) PITCH NoteShift/Detune PchSclSns (Pitch Scale Sensitivity) PchSclCN (Pitch Scale Center Note) PEG R (PEG Rate) PEG L (PEG Level) PEGSclSns (PEG Scale Sensitivity) PEGSclCN (PEG Scale Center Note) PEGRtVel (PEG Rate Velocity) PEGLvlVel (PEG Level Velocity) FILTER Cutoff/Resonance CutoffVel (Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity) ResoVel (Resonance Velocity Sensitivity) FltSclFlag (Filter Scale Flag) Flt BP1~4 (Filter Scale Break Point 1~4) Flt Ofs1~4 (Filter Scale Offset 1~4) FltSclSns (Filter Scale Sensitivity) FltSclVel (Filter Scale Velocity Sensitivity) FEG R (FEG Rate) FEG L (FEG Level) FEGSclSens (FEG Scale Sensitivity) FEGAtkVel (FEG Attack Velocity) FEGOthVel (FEG Other Velocity) AMP (Amplitude) AEG R (AEG Rate) AEG L (AEG Level) AEGSclSens (AEG Scale Sensitivity) AEGLvlVel (AEG Level Velocity Sensitivity) AEGAtkVel (AEG Attack Velocity Sensitivity) LvlSclFlag (AEG Level Scale Flag) Lvl BP1~4 (Level Break Point 1~4) Lvl Ofs1~4 (Level Offset 1~4) LvlSclSens (Level Scale Sensitivity) KeyonDelay LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) LFO Wave LFO Phase (LFO Phase Initialize) LFO Speed LFO PMod (LFO Pitch Modulation) LFO FMod (LFO Filter Modulation) LFO AMod (LFO Amplitude Modulation) PLFODelay (Pitch LFO Delay) PLFO Fade (Pitch LFO Fade Time) LCD PAGE Owner's Manual Page 71 1 2 3 4 71 71 71 72 5 6 7 8 8 8 9 10 10 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 1 2 3 4 5 6 73 73 73 73 73 74 7 8 8 9 10 11 11 12 12 74 74 74 75 75 76 76 76 76 13 14 14 15 16 17 18 18 19 20 21 22 22 77 77 77 77 78 78 78 78 79 79 79 80 80 23 24 25 26 26 27 28 29 30 31 80 80 81 81 81 81 81 82 82 82 32 32 33 34 34 34 35 35 82 82 83 83 83 83 83 83 Voice Job Init (Initialize) CpyElm (Copy Element)/CpyKey (Copy Drum Key) BlkDmp (Bulk Dump) LCD PAGE Owner's Manual Page 84 1 2 85 85 1 2 3 4 5 85 85 85 85 86 6 86 7 86 8 86 9 10 87 87 1 2 3 87 88 88 88 DEMO Mode Demo Song Play 16 16 Utility Mode TG (Tone Generator) MasterTune KEYBOARD Kbd Trans (Keyboard Transpose) Vel Curve (Velocity Curve) Fixed Vel (Fixed Velocity) CONTROLLER MWTxCtlNo (MW Transmit Control Number) FCTxCtlNo (Foot Controller Transmit Control Number) FSTxCtlNo (Footswitch Transmit Control Number) Ctl Reset (Controller Reset) AC1 CC No (AC1 Control Change Number) EFFECT V EfBypass (Voice Effect Bypass) 90 MIDI Mode MIDI CHANNEL Device No (Device Number) Local Sw (Local On/Off Switch) Rcv Ch (Voice Mode MIDI Receive Channel) Trans Ch (MIDI Transmit Channel) MIDI FILTER RxPgmChng (Receive Program Change On/Off) RxBankSel (Receive Bank Select On/Off) TxPgmChng (Transmit Program Change On/Off) TxBankSel (Transmit Bank Select On/Off) Thru Port Basics Section LCD Display (parameter name) Voice Edit (Drum) Common GENERAL Name OrgKt (Original Kit) Key OSC/MIX (Oscillator/Mixer) Level Pan Alt.Group (Alternate Group) Key Assign RxNoteOff/On (Receive Note On/Off) PITCH PitchCors/Fine (Pitch Coarse/Fine) FILTER Cutoff/Resonance AMP (Amplitude) EG Attack/Decay1/Decay2(EG Attack/Decay1/Decay2 Rate) EFFECT ReverbSend ChorusSend 1 90 2 3 3 90 90 90 4 4 5 6 7 91 91 91 91 92 8 92 1 2 3 4 93 93 94 94 5 5 6 6 7 94 94 94 94 94 93 n For details about the Multi Store procedure, see page 69; for details about the Voice Store procedure, see page 89. 21 Basics Section Parameter Table The numbers in each column indicate the display PAGE corresponding to the parameter at left (with the exception of the column on the far right, which indicates the corresponding manual page). For example, you can see that the Reverb Send parameter is found on three separate display pages: PAGE 22 of Multi Part Edit, PAGE 11 of Normal Voice Common Edit, and PAGE 9 of Drum Voice Key Edit. This table is helpful in locating the corresponding display pages in different modes. This is handy when you want to make the same or similar settings to the same parameter in a different mode — for example, setting the Reverb Send in the Multi mode to the same value as Reverb Send in the Voice mode. It’s also handy for cross-checking same parameters for programming complex sound changes — such as setting the Voice’s Filter Cutoff to a certain value, then going to Cutoff in the Multi mode and tweaking it further. Since the owner’s manual page reference is also provided, you can quickly find the corresponding explanation by checking the currently selected mode and PAGE number on the S03, and referring to this table. n When the parameter is the same for both the Voice mode and Multi mode, the manual page reference is generally for the explanation in the Multi mode. Multi Edit Parameter Type LCD Display (parameter name) GENERAL Name Total Vol (Total Volume) Total Lvl (Level) Transpose Rcv Ch (MIDI Receive Channel) NoteShift/Detune Mono/Poly Part Mode OrgKt (Original Kit) RevEF (Reverb Effect Type) Reverb Parameters Rev Return (Reverb Return) Reverb Pan ChoEF (Chorus Effect Type) Chorus Parameters Cho Return (Chorus Return) Chorus Pan SndCho Rev (Send Chorus to Reverb) VarEF (Variation Effect Type) Variation Parameters VarConnect (Variation Connection) Var Return (Variation Return) Var Pan Snd Var Rev (Send Variation to Reverb) Snd Var Cho (Send Variation to Chorus) MW VarCtl (MW Variation Effect Control Depth) AC1VarCtl (AC1 Variation Effect Control Depth) ReverbSend ChorusSend Var Send (Variation Send) V EfBypass (Voice Effect Bypass) Voice Selection Volume Pan NtLmt-H (Note Limit Low/High) VelLmt-L (Velocity Limit Low/High) VelSnsDpt/Ofs (Velocity Sensitivity Depth/Offset) Cutoff/Resonance Attack/Decay/Release Tm (Attack/Decay/Release Time) PEG L/Tm (PEG Level/Time) Vib Rate/Depth/Delay (Vibrato Rate/Depth/Delay) Porta Sw/Time (Portamento Switch/Time) PB Range (Pitch Bend Range) MW FltCtl (MW Filter Control) MW PMod (MW Pitch Modulation Depth) MW FMod (MW Filter Modulation Depth) MW AMod (MW Amplitude Modulation Depth) AC1 CC No (AC1 Control Change Number) AC1FltCtl (AC1 Filter Control) AC1 FMod (AC1 Filter Modulation Depth) AC1 AMod (AC1 Amplitude Modulation Depth) MWTxCtlNo (MW Transmit Control Number) FCTxCtlNo (Foot Controller Transmit Control Number) FSTxCtlNo (Footswitch Transmit Control Number) Ctl Reset (Controller Reset) EFFECT* VOICE MIX TONE CONTROLLER* 22 Common Part 1 2 Voice Edit Common Element/Key Normal Drum Normal Drum 1 1 2 2 3 1 UTILITY MIDI 3 6 7 8 9 3 7 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 13 14 15 22 23 24 16 17 11 12 9 10 8 1 2 3 4 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 18 18 19 20 21 21 4 5 6 2 13 7 4 5 6 7 8 8 8 7 9 10 10 4 4 5 6 Owner's Manual Page 56, 71 56, 71 71, 73, 85 56 61, 94 61, 74 61, 71 61 85 56 56 56 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 58 58 58 58 58 58 66 66 66 67 92 59 60 60, 73, 85 60, 73 60, 74 62 63, 77, 86 63 64 64 65 65 65 65 65 65 66, 92 66 66 66 91 91 91 91 LCD Display (parameter name) OSC/MIX (Oscillator/Mixer) Element Sw (Element Switch) Wave Selection Level Alt.Group (Alternate Group) Key Assign RxNoteOff/On (Receive Note On/Off) NoteShift/Detune PchSclSns (Pitch Scale Sensitivity) PchSclCN (Pitch Scale Center Note) PEG R (PEG Rate) PEG L (PEG Level) PEGSclSns (PEG Scale Sensitivity) PEGSclCN (PEG Scale Center Note) PEGRtVel (PEG Rate Velocity) PEGLvlVel (PEG Level Velocity) PitchCors/Fine (Pitch Coarse/Fine) Cutoff/Resonance CutoffVel (Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity) ResoVel (Resonance Velocity Sensitivity) FltSclFlag (Filter Scale Flag) Flt BP1~4 (Filter Scale Break Point 1~4) Flt Ofs1~4 (Filter Scale Offset 1~4) FltSclSns (Filter Scale Sensitivity) FltSclVel (Filter Scale Velocity Sensitivity) FEG R (FEG Rate) FEG L (FEG Level) FEGSclSens (FEG Scale Sensitivity) FEGAtkVel (FEG Attack Velocity) FEGOthVel (FEG Other Velocity) AEG R (AEG Rate) AEG L (AEG Level) AEGSclSens (AEG Scale Sensitivity) AEGLvlVel (AEG Level Velocity Sensitivity) AEGAtkVel (AEG Attack Velocity Sensitivity) LvlSclFlag (AEG Level Scale Flag) Lvl BP1~4 (Level Break Point 1~4) Lvl Ofs1~4 (Level Offset 1~4) LvlSclSens (Level Scale Sensitivity) KeyonDelay EG Attack/Decay1/Decay2(EG Attack/Decay1/Decay2 Rate) LFO Wave LFO Phase (LFO Phase Initialize) LFO Speed LFO PMod (LFO Pitch Modulation) LFO FMod (LFO Filter Modulation) LFO AMod (LFO Amplitude Modulation) PLFODelay (Pitch LFO Delay) PLFO Fade (Pitch LFO Fade Time) MasterTune Kbd Trans (Keyboard Transpose) Vel Curve (Velocity Curve) Fixed Vel (Fixed Velocity) Device No (Device Number) Local Sw (Local On/Off Switch) Rcv Ch (Voice Mode MIDI Receive Channel) Trans Ch (MIDI Transmit Channel) RxPgmChng (Receive Program Change On/Off) RxBankSel (Receive Bank Select On/Off) TxPgmChng (Transmit Program Change On/Off) TxBankSel (Transmit Bank Select On/Off) Thru Port PITCH FILTER AMP (Amplitude) LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) TG (Tone Generator) KEYBOARD MIDI CHANNEL MIDI FILTER Common Part 7 11 Voice Edit Common Element/Key Normal Drum Normal Drum 1 2 3 3 4 5 7 8 8 9 10 11 11 12 12 6 13 7 14 14 15 16 17 18 18 19 20 21 22 22 23 24 25 26 26 27 28 29 30 31 8 32 32 33 34 34 34 35 35 UTILITY MIDI 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 4 5 5 6 6 7 Basics Section Multi Edit Parameter Type Owner's Manual Page 73 73 85 85 85 86 61, 74 74 74 75 75 76 76 76 76 86 63, 77, 86 77 77 77 78 78 78 78 79 79 79 80 80 80 80 81 81 81 81 81 82 82 82 86 82 82 83 83 83 83 83 83 90 90 90 90 93 93 94 94 94 94 94 94 94 n For parameters in different modes having the same name, the available parameter values and settings for that parameter may differ depending on the mode. Refer to each parameter explanation for details. n For details on parameters for the Reverb, Chorus and Variation effects, refer to the separate Data List. n For information on the Job pages, refer to the Function Tree chart (page 20). * In the Multi mode, the Voice Common Effect/Controller settings are ignored, and the Multi settings become effective. The Variation Effect/Controller settings of the Voice mode can be copied to the Multi mode by using the Multi Job function (page 68). 23 Basics Section Multis A Multi consists of up to 16 Parts, each of which can play a Normal Voice or Drum Voice Part. By assigning different Voices and MIDI channels to each part, and by using a sequencer or computer for song data playback, you can have a complete ensemble of 16 independent instrument sounds. You can also play Multis from the keyboard. This allows you to set up layers of different Voices, or special key splits in which your right and left hands can play separate Voices (page 41). Multi Part 1~16 External MIDI sequencer MIDI CH 1~16 CH1 Different Voice for each part Song File CH16 Multi Part 1~16 Two Layered Voices 24 A Voice is a single instrument sound, created by using the Elements and setting various parameters. In the Voice Play mode, you can select and play any of these Voices. In the Multi Play mode, you assign a different Voice to each part and use an external sequencer to play several Voices simultaneously. Voices are stored in the internal memory (PRESET, USER, GM/XG). Multi Play Mode Voice Play Mode Controllers Controllers External MIDI sequenser Tone Generator Voice Tone Generator Multi Part Voice 1 2 PR PR 001 002 Playing a Voice 4 5 PR 003 XG 001 XG 002 6 7 XG US 003 001 8 16 US 002 PR 016 Playing a Multi Preset 128 Preset Voice PR001~128 3 GM/XG Voice 480 NormalVoice User 128 User Voice US001~128 2 User Drum Voice 20 Drum Voice * * Drum Voices XG121~128 are not of the GM/XG set, but are original drum kits specifically programmed for the S03. 25 Basics Section Voices Basics Section Overview of Voices/Waves Each Voice can consist of up to four Elements. Each Element itself is a high-quality waveform or instrument sound. Voice Element 1~4 Element Wave form AWM2: 453 Prest waveforms There are two Voice types: Normal Voices and Drum Voices. Normal Voices are mainly pitched instrument sounds that can be played over the range of the keyboard. Drum Voices are mainly percussion/drum sounds that are assigned to individual notes on the keyboard. The Drum Voices also include special sound effects. In general, a Voice (containing up to four Elements) can be played across the entire range of the keyboard. However, this can be changed; the actual key range for the Voice is determined by the Note Limit parameters (page 73). Nomal Voice Drum Voice Voice Element 1~4 Individual drum sounds (different for each key) n A total of 480 (XG) and 128 (Preset) Normal Voices plus 20 Drum Voices are available as presets. You can create and store your own original Voices; the S03 has User memory space for 128 User Normal Voices and two User Drum Voices. 26 Waves (or waveforms) are the basic sonic building blocks, and are used as Elements in making up a Voice. A total of 453 high-quality preset Waves are available. As shown in the following illustration, when creating a Voice, you can select the Wave to be used as an Element and then set its level, pitch, tone and other parameters. Wave 1~453 Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 C-2 G8 Voice 27 Basics Section Waves Basics Section Basic Operations In this section, you’ll learn the fundamental operations of the S03. Selecting a Mode There are several operation modes — the Multi Play mode, Voice Play mode, etc. — each of which enables you to work efficiently with the S03’s various functions. n For an overview of the various modes, see page 19. There are separate Play modes for Multis and Voices. To enter each of these modes, use the appropriate MODE button ([Multi] for Multi Play mode, [VOICE] for Voice Play mode). There are also separate Edit and Job modes for Multis and Voices. To enter the Edit or Job mode, simply press the [EDIT] or [JOB] button while in each respective Play mode. Similarly, pressing the [STORE] button in the Multi or Voice mode takes you into the Store mode where you can store Multis or Voices. In addition the modes mentioned above, there is also a Utility mode, which is for making global settings to the instrument, and the MIDI mode, which contains MIDIrelated settings. Finally, there is the Demo mode, which allows you to play back the Demo songs. To select these, press the [UTILITY] button for the Utility mode, the [MIDI] button for the MIDI mode and the [DEMO] button for the Demo mode. 1 2 7 MODE MULTI UTILITY VOICE DEMO 6 EDIT JOB 1 Multi Play Mode (Page 37) Press the [MULTI] button (the LED lights) to enter the Multi Play mode. To exit to another mode, simply press the respective button for that mode. PAGE OCTAVE 2 Voice Play Mode (Page 33) Press the [VOICE] button (the LED lights) to enter the Voice Play mode. To exit to another mode, simply press the respective button for that mode. PAGE Edit Modes There are also separate Edit and Job modes for each Play mode. The [EDIT] lamp lights along with the appropriate Play mode lamp, [MULTI] or [VOICE]. 3 Multi Edit Mode (Page 55) PAGE 1 28 OCTAVE 4 GrandPno XG001 PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE STORE COMPARE 3 Init Mlt P MLT01 PART ELEM KEY Press the [EDIT] button in the Multi Play mode. To exit to another mode, simply press the respective button for that mode. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Multi Play mode. MIDI 5 Play Modes 8 Init Mlt P Name PART ELEM KEY 3 Voice Edit Mode (Pages 47, 70) PAGE 1 GrandPno E XG001 PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Job Modes Each Play mode features a separate Job mode. You can select the desired Job mode when the appropriate Play mode lamp, [MULTI] or [VOICE], is lit. UTILITY PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE 6 MIDI Mode (Page 93) Press the [MIDI] button to enter the MIDI mode. To exit to another mode, simply press the respective button for that mode. If one of the Play mode lamps ([MULTI] or [VOICE]) is lit, the corresponding Play mode is still active, even while entering this mode. An arrow appears in the lower left of the LCD, pointing to “MIDI” on the panel, indicating the MIDI mode. UTILITY 4 Multi Job Mode (Page 67) MasterTune 1 +0000 PAGE MIDI Basics Section Press the [EDIT] button in the Voice Play mode. To exit to another mode, simply press the respective button for that mode. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Voice Play mode. Device No 1 all PAGE MIDI PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Press the [JOB] button in Multi Play mode. To exit to another mode, simply press the respective button for that mode. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Multi Play mode. PAGE 1 Init multi PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE 4 Voice Job Mode (Page 87) Press the [Job] button in Voice Play mode. To exit to another mode, simply press the respective button for that mode. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Voice Play mode. PAGE 1 Init voice PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Other Modes 5 Utility Mode (Page 90) Press the [UTILITY] button to enter the Utility Mode. To exit to another mode, simply press the respective button for that mode. If one of the Play mode lamps ([MULTI] or [VOICE]) is lit, the corresponding Play mode is still active, even while entering this mode. An arrow appears in the upper left of the LCD, pointing to “UTILITY” on the panel, indicating the Utility mode. 7 Demo Mode (Page 16) Press the [DEMO] button (the LED lights) to enter the Demo mode. To exit from the Demo mode and switch to the Multi or Voice Play mode, press the [EXIT], [MULTI] or [VOICE] button. At the “Demo” screen, any data in the instrument’s User Voice memory will be overwritten by the data for the demo song. Important data should be saved to the external MIDI device or computer beforehand. At the “DEMO” screen, the Master Tune parameter (in Utility) will be overwritten and set to “0.” 8 Store Mode (Pages 69, 89) Pressing the [STORE] button in the Multi or Voice mode enters the Store mode where you can store Multis or Voices. The Play mode lamp ([MULTI] or [VOICE]) remains lit, even when entering this mode. To exit to another mode, simply press the corresponding mode’s button. Pressing the [EXIT] button exits from the Store mode. Store MLT01 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE 29 Basics Section Selecting a Screen [E]/[F] buttons You can switch between screens by using the [▲]/[▼], [E]/[F], [+]/[–] and [EXIT] buttons. Some of the display pages have multiple “screens.” These are indicated by special arrow marks in the top right of the LCD (see below). Use the [E]/[F] buttons to select these pages. When the first screen of a mulitple-page set is called up, the arrow points to the right (fi), indicating further screens are available. When a page in the middle of the set is called up, arrows point in both directions (‹ fi), indicating you can select either the next or previous screens. When the last screen is called up, the arrow points to the left (‹), indicating no further screens are available. For certain parameters (such as Voice Name, etc.), these buttons are used to move the cursor position in the display. [▲]/[▼] buttons Many of the displays consist of different screens. Use the [▲]/[▼] buttons to select the various screens. Previous screen (PAGE) DATA DEC NO INC YES Decay Tm 12 1 +00 Next screen (PAGE) PAGE When selecting the various display pages, an arrow appears at the right of the LCD, indicating the parameter type in the printed list on the panel. For example, if the display for the Total Volume parameter in the Multi Edit mode is called up, the arrow in the LCD indicates that this parameter belongs to the General type. VOICE Total Vol 2 P 127 PAGE DATA DEC NO INC YES Selects the previous screen. Selects the next screen. [+]/[–] buttons MIX GENERAL PART ELEM KEY PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE TONE CONTROLLER OCTAVE EFFECT In the example below, the display for the (Element) Cutoff parameter in the Voice Edit mode is shown, and the arrow indicates that this parameter belongs to the Filter type. In the Multi Edit mode, these buttons are used to select each part. To select the Common parameters, press both buttons simultaneously. In the Voice Edit mode, these buttons are used to select each Element. To select the Common parameters, press both buttons simultaneously. PART ELEMENT KEY Cutoff 13 E 2047 PAGE OCTAVE 30 PART ELEM KEY VOICE OSC MIX MIX PITCH GENERAL FILTER TONE AMP CONTROLLER LFO EFFECT EFFECT MUTE COMMON n For details on the parameters and page configurations of the Multi Edit and Voice Edit modes, refer to the relevant mode explanations in the Reference section of this manual. Entering Data Press the [EXIT] button to move up (exit) in the hierarchical structure and return to the previous screen. Use the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons to increment through the values, or input the value directly by using the numeric keypad and the [ENTER] button. For certain parameters (such as Voice Name, etc.) which have more than one value to be set, use the [E]/[F] buttons to move the cursor position in the display, then set the value accordingly. 7 8 9 PIANO 4 ORGAN 5 GUITAR 6 BASS 1 STRINGS 2 BRASS 3 REED/PIPE 0 SYN LEAD SYN PAD ENTER SYN COMP CHROMATIC KEYBOARD PERCUSSION EXIT n Depending on the particular operation, the [EXIT] button performs other functions as well. These alternate functions are indicated in the appropriate sections of the manual. [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons These are used to change the value of the currently selected parameter. You can use the [INC/YES] button to increment a parameter setting by one step, or the [DEC/NO] button to decrement it. If you hold down either button, the value is continuously changed. You can also use these buttons to answer “YES” or “NO” when a confirmation message is displayed. DATA DEC NO INC YES 31 Basics Section [EXIT] button Basics Section Numeric keypad, [ENTER] button You can specify the value for the selected parameter by using the numeric keypad, then actually set that value by pressing the [ENTER] button. For example, to set a value of “100,” press (in order) the numeric keypad buttons [1], [0], and [0]. (The parameter indicator flashes.) Finally, press the [ENTER] button to set the value. 7 8 9 PIANO 4 ORGAN 5 GUITAR 6 BASS 1 STRINGS 2 BRASS 3 PAGE PART ELEM KEY 100 OCTAVE The displayed value flashes. SYN PAD ENTER REED/PIPE 0 SYN LEAD SYN COMP CHROMATIC KEYBOARD PERCUSSION Specify the value. Types of Parameters (Absolute and Relative) There are many ways to set parameters. Some parameters require you to directly enter numerical settings or alphabetic characters. With others, you can choose from a number of available settings. Furthermore, some types of parameters are “absolute” whereas others are “relative.” For example, the absolute parameter in the following illustration can be set to either “mono” or “poly.” For other absolute parameters such as Volume, the setting can be any value between zero and 127. The Volume setting has a linear, one-to-one relationship with the actual volume, as shown in the graph on the left. However, relative parameters do not follow the same relationship. The graph on the bottom shows the role of the Velocity Offset parameter. The value you have set here, known as an “offset,” is added to, or subtracted from, the actual value. With Velocity Offset, the specified offset value is added to, or subtracted from, the actual velocity of the notes you play on the keyboard. Sometimes, these types of relative parameters are set as a percentage. Set the value. Total Vol 2 E 127 PAGE Moving the Cursor Position For certain parameters, such as Voice Name and others, the [E]/[F] buttons are used to move the cursor position in the display. (The selected character flashes.) Move the cursor to the desired position, then set the value. DATA DEC NO PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Mono/Poly 3 E poly PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE VelSnsOfs 4 E 064 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE 1. Total Volume (absolute) Volume INC YES 0 127 2. Velocity offset (relative) Offset +64 Offset added (+10) Actual velocity Offset subtracted (–10) 0 Volume –64 32 Basics Section Playing the S03 Playing the Voices You can freely select and play Voices from the PRESET, USER and GM/XG memory groups, as explained below. n Details about voice, see page 25. n The user memory can contain up to 128 Normal Voices and 2 Drum Voices. 1 PHONES OUTPUT L MONO R DC IN STANDBY ON FOOT CONTROLLER FOOT SWITCH TO HOST HOST SELECT IN MIDI OUT UTILITY MIDI MULTI PART VOICE COMMON VOICE UTILITY MUSIC SYNTHESIZER MIDI MODE MULTI VOICE PART ELEMENT KEY DEMO TG PITCH KEYBOARD FILTER MIDI CHANNEL TONE AMP MIDI FILTER CONTROLLER LFO CONTROLLER EFFECT EFFECT EFFECT UP 8 9 PRESET PIANO 4 ORGAN 5 GUITAR 6 DRUM/PERC USER BASS 1 STRINGS 2 BRASS 3 REED/PIPE 0 SYN LEAD SYN PAD ENTER SYN COMP CHROMATIC KEYBOARD PERCUSSION CATEGORY SEARCH DRUM 7 MUTE ELEMENT OSC MIX MIX GENERAL COMMON DATA UTILITY MIDI EDIT JOB DEC NO INC YES OCTAVE DOWN 3 THRU EDIT VOLUME 2 SE GM XG STORE COMPARE OTHER EXIT 4 1 Press the [VOICE] button. Press the [VOICE] button (the LED lights) to enter the Voice Play mode. The following display appears. PAGE GrandPno XG001 Preset Voice 1~128 CATEGORY SEARCH DRUM PRESET PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE DRUM/PERC USER Now, play the Voice (indicated in the display) from the keyboard. 2 Press a MEMORY button to select a Voice Memory. User Voice 1~128 SE GM XG OTHER GM/XG Voice GM Bank Other Bank ........ There are three different memory sections for the Normal Voices: PRESET, USER, and GM/XG. The various Voices are assigned to each memory section as shown below. The GM/XG Voices are divided into several different banks. 33 Basics Section The Drum Voices are stored in separate areas of the User and GM/XG memory sections. 3 Select a Voice number. • To call up the User Drum memory (USDR1/ USDR2): Press the [USER] button while holding down the [DRUM] button. Selecting with the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons • To call up the GM/XG Drum memory • To call up the XG SFX Kit memory Press the [GM/XG] button while holding down the [DRUM] button. First, press the [ENTER] button to specify the Voice Memory, then press the [INC/YES] button to increment the Voice Number, and press [DEC/NO] to decrement it. DATA DEC NO INC YES CATEGORY SEARCH PRESET User Drum 1/2 DRUM/PERC USER Selecting with the numeric keypad and [ENTER] button SE GM XG First, specify the Voice number with the numeric keypad, then press the [ENTER] button to actually set it. For example, to select voice number 100, press buttons [1], [0] and [0] in order. (The indicated number flashes.) Finally, press the [ENTER] button to select the Voice. XG Drum 1~20 OTHER n PRESET, of course, contains the Preset Voices. The XG Voices are assigned in order according to the GM format, starting with Bank 1, and various XG Voices are distributed throughout the GM/XG memory banks. USER is stored in internal RAM memory and contains factory default Voices. These can be overwritten, but can be recalled from the original factory settings at any time if required. 7 8 9 PIANO 4 ORGAN 5 GUITAR 6 BASS 1 STRINGS 2 BRASS 3 PAGE GrandPno XG100 PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE 1 The displayed value flashes. SYN PAD ENTER REED/PIPE 0 SYN LEAD SYN COMP CHROMATIC KEYBOARD PERCUSSION 2 3 4 Specify the number. Set the number. n For one- or two-digit numbers, it’s not necessary to enter all three digits (such as, “001” or “010”). For example, to enter Voice number “3,” simply press numeric keypad button [3], then press the [ENTER] button. 34 Selecting XG Banks The XG Voices are divided up into several different banks. This gives you access to an even greater number of Voices and a wider variety of sounds. 1 Make sure that XG memory is selected, then call up the BK (Bank Select) display by using the [E] button. DATA DEC NO INC YES PAGE GrandPno BK000 PART ELEM KEY Using Voice Category Search With the Voice Category Search feature, you can quickly find Voices within a specified Voice Category. For example, by selecting the PIANO Voice Category, you can instantly call up for selection all and only those Voices which fall into the “PF” (PIANO) Voice Category. 1 Press the [CATEGORY SEARCH] button in Voice Mode. Its LED will light and Category Search will be enabled. The Memory buttons and the numeric keypad are used for selecting categories. 7 8 9 PRESET PIANO 4 ORGAN 5 GUITAR 6 DRUM/PERC USER BASS 1 STRINGS 2 BRASS 3 REED/PIPE 0 SYN LEAD SYN PAD ENTER SYN COMP CHROMATIC KEYBOARD PERCUSSION CATEGORY SEARCH DRUM SE GM XG Select the category EXIT OCTAVE OTHER 2 Select the desired Bank number by using the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons, or by using the numeric keypad and the [ENTER] button. The bank is now changed. Return to the XG display by using the [E]/[F] buttons and select the desired Voice number. n For details about Bank types, refer to the separate Data List booklet. n Press the [EXIT] button to disable Category Search. n The category names are printed under each button. To switch between the “ME” and “CO” categories, press the [OTHER] button. n Refer to the Category List on page 71 for more information on Voice category types. 2 Specify the desired Category using the buttons above. The first Voice in that Category will be automatically selected. n In this step, the lowest numbered Voice of the category is selected. n The S03 searches in the following order: PRESET, then USER, then GM/XG. 3 Press the [INC/YES] button to increment the Voice number in that category and press the [DEC/NO] button to decrement it. n You can use the same operation as described here in selecting Voices for Multi Part Edit (page 59). 35 Basics Section 4 Now, play the keyboard and hear the selected Voice. Try selecting and playing other Voices as well. Basics Section Transposing the Octave If you need to raise or lower the keyboard note range for the Voice, you can use the OCTAVE[UP] button to raise the range by an octave and the OCTAVE [DOWN] button to lower it by an octave. You can shift the note range by up to three octaves in either direction. The current octave setting is shown in the left corner of the display while the OCTAVE [UP] or [DOWN] button is being held down. For instance, if you press the OCTAVE [UP] button twice (+2), pressing note C3 on the keyboard will actually play note C5 (i.e., the note you play is shifted up two octaves). To return to the standard octave range (0), press the OCTAVE [UP] and [DOWN] buttons simultaneously. OCTAVE DOWN UP PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE DOWN UP Normal Pitch n If you set the octave beyond the limits of the Voice’s note range, notes played outside of the range will sound one octave higher or lower than normal. n The OCTAVE [UP] and [DOWN] buttons may not function if the “Note Shift” parameter (pages 61, 74) in Voice Edit Mode, and also the “Kbd Trans (Keyboard Transpose)” parameter (page 90) in the Utility Mode have been set to shift the range. n You can also use the OCTAVE [UP] and[DOWN] buttons in Multi Play Mode. 36 Basics Section Using Multi Mode Playing in Multi Mode In the Multi Play mode, you can select and play any of the Multis. n For more details about Multis, see page 24. n Up to 32 Multis can be stored in the USER (internal) memory. These Multi settings are available in Multi Edit mode (page 55). Here, we’ll show you how to get started with Multi Play after selecting a Multi. 1 PHONES OUTPUT L MONO R DC IN STANDBY ON FOOT CONTROLLER FOOT SWITCH TO HOST HOST SELECT MIDI OUT IN 2 THRU EDIT VOLUME UTILITY MIDI MULTI PART VOICE COMMON MODE MULTI VOICE PART ELEMENT KEY DEMO MUSIC SYNTHESIZER MIDI OSC MIX TG PITCH KEYBOARD FILTER MIDI CHANNEL TONE AMP MIDI FILTER CONTROLLER LFO CONTROLLER EFFECT EFFECT EFFECT UP 8 9 ORGAN 5 GUITAR 6 COMMON MIX GENERAL DATA UTILITY MIDI EDIT JOB DEC NO OCTAVE DOWN 7 PIANO 4 CATEGORY SEARCH DRUM MUTE ELEMENT PRESET VOICE UTILITY COMPARE STORE INC YES DRUM/PERC USER SE GM XG OTHER BASS 1 STRINGS 2 BRASS 3 REED/PIPE 0 SYN LEAD SYN PAD ENTER SYN COMP CHROMATIC KEYBOARD PERCUSSION EXIT 3 1 Press the [Multi] button The [MULTI] button LED will light, showing that you are now in the Multi Play mode. The following appears in the display. MODE MULTI VOICE DEMO PAGE 1 Init Mlt P 1 MLT01 PART ELEM KEY n USER is stored in internal Random Access Memory (RAM) and contains the factory default Multis. These can be overwritten but can recalled at any time. 2 Select a Multi Number Press the [INC/YES] button to increment the Multi Number. Press the [DEC/NO] button to decrement the Multi Number. OCTAVE DATA At this point, you can play the Multi (named on the screen) via keyboard. DEC NO INC YES Up to 32 Multis can be stored in the USER (internal) memory. CATEGORY SEARCH DRUM PRESET USER 1~32 n This is selected in the same way as in selecting Voices, using the numeric keypad and the [ENTER] button. Refer to the instructions on selecting Voice numbers (page 34). DRUM/PERC USER SE GM XG OTHER 37 Basics Section 3 You can now play Parts in the Multi via the keyboard. If the MIDI receive channel parameter is the same for any Parts, those Parts can be played in unison. Now try selecting other Multis. n To play a Voice from the keyboard, make sure that the MIDI Receive Channel for that Voice’s Part and the MIDI Transmit Channel for the keyboard are both set to the same value. Using the S03 as a Multitimbral Tone Generator (Multi Edit) Multi mode lets you configure the S03 as a multitimbral tone generator for use with computerbased music software or external sequencers. If each track in a song file uses a different MIDI channel, then the Parts in a Multi can be each assigned to those MIDI channels correspondingly. Therefore, you can play back a song file on an external sequencer and have different Voices playing on different tracks simultaneously. In the following example, we will create a Multi suited to playing back a song file consisting of three Parts: piano, bass and drums. The piano track is assigned to MIDI channel 2, the bass track to channel 3, and the drums to channel 10. Song File Multi Track 1 Piano Transmit Ch.2 Part 2 Piano Voice Track 2 Bass Transmit Ch.3 Part 3 Bass Voice Receive Ch.2 Receive Ch.3 Track 3 Drums Transmit Ch.10 Part 10 Drum Voice Receive Ch.10 Tone generator Computer (sequencer software) S03 38 4 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons to switch to the Voice Selection screen (PAGE 1), then specify the Voice to be used as the piano Part. MODE MULTI VOICE DEMO PAGE 1 GrandPno P 2 XG001 PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE UTILITY MIDI EDIT JOB 5 Next, use the [▲] and [▼] buttons to switch to the Volume screen (PAGE 2), then set the volume for the piano Part as well as its Pan position, Chorus and Reverb Send levels, if necessary. For details, see page 56. STORE COMPARE n Before entering the Multi Edit mode, you need to select a Multi for editing. Volume PAGE PART ELEM KEY 2 001 OCTAVE 2 If the Common Edit display is shown, press the [+] or [–] button to switch to the Part Edit display. PART ELEMENT KEY Total Vol 2 E 127 MUTE PAGE 6 Continue using the [▲] and [▼] buttons and switch to the Rcv Ch (MIDI Receive Channel) screen (PAGE 6). Set the parameter to 2. PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Rcv Ch COMMON Common indicator PAGE 6 PART ELEM KEY P 2 02 OCTAVE Volume PAGE 2 PART ELEM KEY P 100 OCTAVE Part indicator 3 Use the [+] and [–] buttons to select Parts. Here, you can select P2 (Part 2) for the piano, P3 (Part 3) for bass and P10 (Part 10) for drums. First, let’s select P2 (Part 2). 7 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons and switch to the Mono/Poly screen (PAGE 8). Set the parameter to “poly” (polyphonic). Mono/Poly 8 P 2 poly PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE n For Parts that do not require polyphony, the Mode parameter can be set to “mono” (monophonic). PART ELEMENT KEY MUTE COMMON 8 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons and switch to the Part Mode screen (PAGE 9). Set the parameter to “norm” (normal). Part Mode 9 P 2 norm PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE n In the case of a Drum Part, set the mode to “drum.” n For details about the Part mode, see page 61. 39 Basics Section 1 After pressing the [MULTI] button, press the [EDIT] button (the respective LEDs will light). You are now in the Multi Edit mode. Basics Section 9 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons to call up the NtLmt (Note Limit) and VelLmt (Velocity Limit) settings, and check whether or not the Part of the piano Voice is set appropriately — in other words, make sure that the Note or Velocity settings do not prevent the Voice from being played normally. Except in special cases, you should generally avoid setting limits on the note and velocity ranges, in order to ensure that notes are sounded properly and are not cut off. NtLmt-L 4 P 2 C-2 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE By following steps 3 to 9 above, when you play back a song file in the sequencer, the piano track is transmitted through MIDI channel 2. The MIDI data is received by the S03 which then plays the Voice for the Part assigned to MIDI channel 2. ) Repeat steps 3 to 9 above, but set up Part 3 for bass and to receive on MIDI channel 3. ! Repeat steps 3 to 9 again, setting up Part 10 for drums and to receive on MIDI channel 10. n To avoid situations where the Voices of unused Parts are suddenly played back, you should set the MIDI receive channels for unused Parts to “off.” n There are many other Part-specific parameters in the Multi Edit mode. For details, see page 55. @ Before exiting Multi Edit Mode, you need to store the settings for the Multi. For details about storing Multis, see page 69. Now, when you select this Multi in the Multi Play mode, you can play back the song file on computer (sequencer), and the piano, bass and drum Parts will be played back according to each track’s MIDI channel. 40 Performing Live While Playing Back a Song File While playing back the song file with the piano, bass and drum Parts assigned earlier, you can set up the Multi so that you can also play another Part live. Playback using keyboard Multi Song File Part 1 Solo-type Voice Receive Ch.1 Track 1 Piano Transmit Ch.2 Part 2 Piano Voice Track 2 Bass Transmit Ch.3 Part 3 Bass Voice Receive Ch.3 Drums Transmit Ch.10 Part 10 Drums Voice Receive Ch.10 Track 3 Receive Ch.2 This is the same as the Multi created earlier (page 38), but with the addition of another Part for live playback. Be careful to make the following important settings. • In the Multi created earlier, Parts 2, 3 and 10 were being used. As an example, we will now assign another Part (Part 1) to a solo-type Voice and set the MIDI Receive Channel to 1. • At the Trans Ch (PAGE 4) screen in MIDI Mode, set the MIDI Receive Channel to 1. The Voice for Part 1 can now be played live using the keyboard. n Because the S03 features a fully-compatible XG tone generator, you can play any of the wide variety of commercially available XG/GM song software. This ensures broad dynamic and expressive range, with a wide variety of rich instrument sounds and effects. You can also mute specific parts of the MIDI data — allowing you to practice the missing parts yourself, or to use the song data as instrumental backing for your own singing and playing. 4 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons (if necessary) and call up the Voice Selection screen (PAGE 1) to select a strings Voice for the lower range Part. PAGE Strings1 XG049 PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE The illustration below shows an example in which the keyboard has been effectively divided into two spearate key ranges, letting you play one Voice over one range, and a second Voice over the other. In the following example, the Voices change at the note C3, letting you play a string Voice in the lower range and a piano Voice in the upper. To set up the Voices in this way, follow the instructions below. Lower Part 1 Strings Ch1 (C3) Upper Part 2 Piano Ch1 n For details about Voice selection, see page 59. 5 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons to call up the Volume screen (PAGE 2), then set the volume for the piano Part as well as its Pan position, Chorus and Reverb Send levels, if necessary. For details, see page 56. 6 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons to call up the NtLmt screen (PAGE 4), and specify a key range for the lower and upper Parts. Switch between the NtLmtL (Note Limit Low) and NtLmt-H (Note Limit High) screens by pressing the [E] and [F] buttons. Select “C-2” for the lowest note and “B2” for the highest. NtLmt-L 4 P C-2 PAGE OCTAVE 1 Press the [MULTI] button, followed by the [EDIT] button (each LED will light) to enter the Multi Edit mode. n You need to select the Multi before entering the Multi Edit mode (page 37). PART ELEM KEY NtLmt-H 4 P B2 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE 7 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons to call up the Rcv Ch (MIDI Receive Channel) screen (PAGE 6). Select “1” for “RcvCh.” 2 If the Common Edit screen is shown, press the [+] or [–] button to select the Part Edit display. n Set the MIDI Transmit Channel to 1 from the Trans Ch display (PAGE 4 ) in the MIDI mode. Now you are ready to play the Part 1 Voice within the lower range. The Voice assigned to Part 1 can be played over MIDI Receive Channel 1. 3 Select a Part for the lower range by using the PART [+] and [–] buttons. For this example, select “P1 (Part 1).” 8 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons to call up the Mono/ Poly screen (PAGE 8). Set the parameter to “poly” (polyphonic). 41 Basics Section Splitting the Keyboard — Setting Upper and Lower Ranges for the Voices Basics Section 9 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons to call up the Part Mode screen (PAGE 9). Set the parameter to “norm” (normal) With settings made in steps 3 to 9 above, you can now play the strings voice assigned to “P1” (Part 1) and set to MIDI Receive Channel 1 (RcvCh) — when you play in the key range of B2 and lower. ) Make the settings for the upper Part (Part 2), in the same manner as you did in steps 3 to 9. For Part 2, select a piano Voice, setting the Note Limit Low to “C3” and the Note Limit High to the maximum of “G8.” Also set the MIDI Receive Channel to 1, as you did with Part 1. The piano Voice of Part 2 sounds when you play keys higher than C3. n In the Edit mode, the selected Part’s Voice is played back. n To avoid situations where the Voices of unused Parts are suddenly played back, you should set the MIDI receive channels for unused Parts to “off.” n There are many other Part-specific parameters in the Multi Edit mode. For details, see page 55. Layering Two Voices (Parts) Together The illustration below gives one application example of combining two Voices in a layer. In this example, a strings Voice is selected for Part 1 and a piano Voice is selected for Part2, and the two are played together in unison. Part 1 Part 2 Strings Piano This Multi can be easily created and set so that both Parts 1 and 2 are layered together across the entire range of the keyboard. • For both Part 1 and Part 2, set the Note Limit Low parameter to “C-2” and the Note Limit High parameter to “G8.” ! Before exiting the Multi Edit mode, store the above settings to a Multi. For instructions on storing a Multi, refer to page 69. n In the Edit mode, the selected Part’s Voice is played back. Now that you’ve created and stored the Multi, you can call it up anytime within the Multi play mode — and play a strings Voice from keys B2 and below, while playing a piano Voice from keys C3 and above. Saving S03 Settings to an External Device (Bulk Dump Send) Using the Bulk Dump function, you can transmit your S03 settings to an external device, such as a computer, and save them. This is a fast and convenient way to back up your important data. You can also use this function to record important S03 data at the beginning of a song, so that all your original settings and data are automatically reset when your play back the song. The following explanation shows you how to do this using the realtime recording functions of the sequencer software. In this example, track 1 is used for recording the User Multi data. n The explanations in this section apply in general to sequencer software and are not specific to any particular program or device. The steps in each procedure may vary slightly, depending on your particular computer or sequencer software. For specific information and operation instructions, refer to the owner’s manual (or help messages) of your particular sequencer. n Make sure that the S03 is properly connected to the computer (page 13). For information on settings for your sequencer, refer to the owner’s manual (or help messages) of your particular sequencer. 42 Basics Section 1 In the Multi mode, select the S03 Multi you want to transmit. 2 Press [JOB] to enter the Multi Job mode. 3 From the “BlkDmp” parameter (PAGE 5) in the Multi Job mode, select the data type for transmitting. Here, select “Curnt” (Current) to transmit the currently selected Multi data, then press the [ENTER] button. PAGE 5 BlkDmp Sure? PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE 4 In the sequencer, specify track 1 for recording. 5 After starting recording on the sequencer, press the S03’s [INC/YES] button to transmit the data. DATA DEC NO INC YES Bulk transmit start 6 When data transmission is finished, stop recording on the sequencer. Check the list window in your sequencer (the window that shows recorded events in a list) to confirm that the data (shown in hexadecimal) has been properly received and recorded by the sequencer. n For information about recording or saving, refer to the owner’s manual (or help messages) of your particular sequencer. Now, whenever you play back the song file with this recorded data, the appropriate S03 Multi settings are sent as System Exclusive messages (page 99) from the sequencer. n For best results, try to keep the playback tempo at the same setting as was used for recording. n When you assign the User Voice to the selected Multi’s Part, record the User Voice as the same manner. Select the AllUS (All User Voices) in the BlkDmp screen (PAGE 3) in the Voice Job mode, then transmit the bulk data using the same method as Multi. n If necessary, S03 system (Utility and MIDI) data can also be recorded. In the BlkDmp screen of the Multi Job or Voice Job mode, select “Systm.” n To save the all S03 settings, transmit all three data types below, and record/save them to the computer. • All: All Multis (Multi Job mode) • AllUs: All User Voices (Voice Job mode) • Systm: System (Multi Job or Voice Job mode) 43 Basics Section Using Controllers The S03 is equipped with Pitch Bend and Modulation Wheels. By connecting an optional Foot Controller or Footswitch, you can also control a variety of parameters (such as changing the sound, changing Program Numbers, etc.) with your feet— and leave your hands free to play the keyboard. Pitch Bend Wheel This wheel’s function is to control pitch. Move the wheel upward/downward to bend the pitch upward/ downward. The effect can also be reversed. n The Modulation Depth can also be set. Also, the wheel can be assigned to control different parameters, such as Volume or Pan (page 91). n The Modulation Wheel can also be set to control the tone, amplitude (volume), pitch, or filter setting of the Voice. The Modulation Wheel can be used to control the parameters below. •MW Variation Control Depth •MW Filter Control •MW Pitch Modulation Depth •MW Filter Modulation Depth •MW Amplitude Modulation Depth Pitch up Pitch down Controllers and External MIDI Control Pitch Bend Wheel Modulation Wheel n The Pitch Bend Range can be set for each Voice (page 65). Modulation Wheel Various control functions can be assigned to the Modulation Wheel and the Assignable Controller (page 66). Besides these other functions, the controllers are already set to control the tone, volume, pitch, and filter settings. When the controller is used, it not only affects the built-in tone generator of the S03, but also simultaneously outputs corresponding MIDI data via the MIDI OUT terminal. MIDI OUT The more you move this wheel upwards, the greater the modulation that is applied to the sound. MIDI IN MIDI Control Modulation Wheel Assignable Controller 1 Deeper Voice Control Tone Volume Pitch .... Tone generator Pitch Bend Wheel 44 Modulation Wheel n When the Multi mode is active, this controls the Part for which the Transmit Channel setting of the MIDI mode (PAGE 4) and the Receive Channel setting of Multi Part Edit (PAGE 6) are the same. An optional Foot Controller (such as the FC7), connected to the FOOT CONTROLLER jack (page 10) on the rear panel, can be assigned to any one of a number of controller parameters. By using a foot controller for parameter control, both your hands are left free to play the keyboard (or to operate other controllers). This is very convenient when performing live. Using the Foot Controller to Control Parameters In live performance, you can use the Foot Controller onstage to keep your hands free to play the keyboard, yet still be able to control various functions necessary for your songs or performance. In the following example, we’ll show you how to set up the Foot Controller to function the same as (and substitute for) the Modulation Wheel. 1 Press the [UTILITY] button to enter the Utility mode. MODE MULTI Foot Controller FC7 n By setting the AC1 to the same control number as the Foot Controller, you can use the Foot Controller to continuously control the parameters below for each Part or Voice. • AC1 Filter Control • AC1 Filter Modulation Depth • AC1 Amplitude Modulation Depth • AC1 Variation Control Depth UTILITY VOICE DEMO MasterTune 1 +0000 PAGE MIDI PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE EDIT JOB STORE COMPARE 2 Press the [▲] and [▼] buttons to call up the FCTxCtlNo (FC transmit Control Number) screen (PAGE 4). The control number for AC1 can be set in the following pages: Multi Part Edit PAGE 19 (when controlling in the Multi mode) Utility PAGE 7 (when controlling in the Voice mode) DATA DEC NO INC YES See next section below for information on setting the control number for the Foot Controller. n Select this parameter by using the [F] button when the MWTxCtlNo screen is displayed. 3 Use the [INC/DEC] buttons to select “01” (Modulation Wheel). DATA DEC NO INC YES FCTxCtlNo 4 01 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE The Foot Controller can now be used to perform the same control function as that of the Modulation Wheel. n For details about Control Numbers and Control Change messages, refer to the separate Data List. 45 Basics Section Foot Controller Basics Section Foot Switch Using the Foot Switch to Advance Through Programs An optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5 Foot Switch connected to the rear panel FOOT SWITCH jack (page 10) can be assigned to a range of parameters. This is designed for switch-type (on/off) controls such as incrementing/decrementing Voice or Multi numbers, and cannot be used for continuous control of a parameter. The default factory setting for this is to control sustain (FSTxCtlNo = 64). When performing live, you can set up the Foot Switch to change Voices or Multis with your feet, without having to take your hands from the keyboard. For example, if you arrange the Voices/ Multis in memory in consecutive order (as you’ll use them), you can easily advance through them one-byone by pressing the Foot Switch while you perform. The following instruction steps show you how to do this. 1 Press the [UTILITY] button to enter the Utility mode. MODE MULTI VOICE DEMO Foot Switch FC4 or FC5 UTILITY MasterTune 1 +0000 PAGE MIDI PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE n See next section below for information on setting the control number for the Foot Switch. For details about Control Numbers and Control Change messages, refer to the separate Data List. EDIT JOB STORE COMPARE 2 Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons to to call up the FSTxCtrlNo (FS transmit Control Number) screen (PAGE 5). DATA DEC NO INC YES FSTxCtlNo 5 64 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE 3 Press the [INC/DEC] buttons to select “96” (PCInc). (Or, input the number 96 and press the [ENTER] button.) DATA DEC NO INC YES FSTxCtlNo 5 PCInc PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE In the Voice/Multi mode, the Foot Switch can now be used to advance through program numbers. 46 Basics Section Voice Edit The following procedure shows you the fundamentals in creating and editing Voices. Of course, this is just one example; you are free to set any parameters in any way you like. Details about each parameter are given in the Reference section of this manual. n All parameter settings are stored along with the Voice itself. 1 Selecting a Voice to Edit 1 In Voice Play mode, select the Voice you wish to edit. Enter the Voice Play mode by pressing a [VOICE] button. 2 MODE Enter the Voice Edit mode. 3 Set the common parameters ● Set the parameters common to all Elements in the Voice (volume, pitch, tone, etc.) You can also set parameters related to the Controllers, Effects, and so on. 4 Set the element parameters ● From the OSC/MIX (Oscillator/Mix) screens, select the Waves used by the Elements in the Voice, plus the volume, pan, note range and other basic parameters. ● From the PITCH screens, set the tuning and other pitch-related parameters used by the Elements. Also set the PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator) parameters as necessary. ● From the FILTER screens, adjust the parameters of the filters used by the Elements. Also set the FEG (Filter Envelope Generator) parameters as necessary. ● From the AMP (Amplitude) screens, set the volume and other output level-related parameters used by the Elements. Also set the AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator) parameters as necessary. MULTI VOICE DEMO Select the Voice Number of the Voice you wish to edit (page 34). n When you’re creating a Voice by editing an existing one, it helps to select a Voice with a sound that’s relatively similar to the one you intend to create. In this way, you can avoid having to make large changes and many parameter edits — allowing you to create a Voice quickly and easily. If you are creating a Voice from scratch, use the convenient Initialize function (in the Voice Job mode) to initialize a Voice in internal user memory. For details, see pages 87 and 88. 2 Entering the Voice Edit Mode All Voice creation and editing is carried out in Voice Edit Mode. To enter the Voice Edit mode, press the [EDIT] button while in the Voice Play mode. MODE MULTI VOICE DEMO ● From the LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) screens, set the modulation-related parameters used by the Elements. 5 Store the edited Voice. UTILITY MIDI EDIT JOB STORE COMPARE 47 Basics Section Common Edit and Editing Individual Elements Switching Between Screens and Entering Settings Voices can consist of up to four Elements (page 26). Use Common Edit to edit the settings common to all four Elements. The Voice Edit mode can be divided into screens for Common Edit and those for editing each Element. In the Voice Edit mode, simultaneously press both the [–] and [+] buttons to switch between the Common Edit screens and the screens for editing each Element. After selecting a Common Edit screen or an edit screen for an Element (1 to 4), press the [▲] and [▼] buttons to switch to other screens. DATA DEC NO INC YES PART ELEM KEY PAGE 1 Common Edit screens E OCTAVE Page GrandPno E Name The S03 has a huge variety of available parameters. As you change the display pages, an arrow mark on the right side of the display points to the parameter chart printed on the panel, indicating the parameter type and what aspect of the instrument it’s related to. PART ELEM KEY PAGE 1 OCTAVE Common indicator Element Edit screens PART ELEMENT KEY Element SW 1 E 1 on MUTE PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE COMMON Level PART ELEM KEY PAGE Element indicator 3 E 100 OCTAVE VOICE OSC MIX MIX PITCH GENERAL FILTER TONE AMP CONTROLLER LFO EFFECT EFFECT Use the INC/YES and DEC/NO buttons to set each parameter value. Switching Elements On/Off (Mute) In Voice Edit Mode, an Element can be switched on/ off temporarily when you press the [MUTE] button. The Element indicator which is muted will flash. This lets you mute other Elements in the Voice so that you can listen to the changes to the Element that you are editing. PART ELEMENT KEY MUTE COMMON DATA DEC NO INC YES Level PAGE 3 PART ELEM KEY E 101 OCTAVE Some parameters have multiple “pages,” indicated by a special arrow mark (“fi”) in the top right of the LCD (see below). Use the [E]/[F] buttons to select these pages. DATA DEC NO INC YES NtLmt-L 5 E 1 C-2 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE NtLmt-H 5 E 1 G8 PAGE OCTAVE 48 PART ELEM KEY 4 Set the Element Parameters Each Voice consists of up to four Elements. Here, the parameters common to all Elements are explained. ● OSC/MIX (Oscillator/Mix) In PAGES 1 to 6, you can set the various parameters controlling the waveforms on which the Voice is based. You can select the Wave used for the Element, the volume and note range of each Element and so on. ● GENERAL (Common General) In PAGES 1 to 4, you can set the Voice Name, Voice output settings and other general parameters. PAGE 1 GrandPno E XG001 Element Sw 1 E on PART ELEM KEY PAGE OCTAVE OCTAVE VelSnsDpt 4 E 064 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE PAGE 2 ● CONTROLLER (Common Controller) In PAGES 5 to 10, you can assign and set various functions for the controllers on the front (such as the Modulation and Pitch Bend Wheels) and the controllers connectable to the rear panel. For example, you can assign parameters to the Modulation Wheel so that you can change the tone of Voice in real time. For details about different controller uses, see page 45. PianoL@ E W*001 PART ELEM KEY Porta Sw 5 E off PART ELEM KEY 3 OCTAVE PAGE 4 PART ELEM KEY E C NtLmt-L 5 E C-2 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Level PAGE Pan OCTAVE OCTAVE 1~4 PAGE PART ELEM KEY PART ELEM KEY E 100 VelLmt-L 6 E 001 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Element Sw (Element Switch) Determines whether each Element sounds or not. Wave Selection Select the Wave for each Element. Level Pan Set the volume (output level) and stereo pan position of each Element. OCTAVE AC1 FMod 10 E 000 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE 5~10 ● EFFECT (Common Effect) In PAGES 11 to 17, you can set the Effects parameters for the Voice. There are System Effects (Reverb and Chorus) and Variation Effects. ReverbSend 11 E 040 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE AC1VerCtl 17 E +00 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE 11~17 49 Basics Section 3 Set the Common Parameters Basics Section NtLmt-L/H (Note Limit Low/High) VelLmt-L/H (Velocity Limit Low/High) Set the note range for each Element (the range of notes on the keyboard over which the Element will sound) and also the velocity response (the range of note velocities within which the Element will sound). You can assign different settings for each Element. With these parameters, you can layer Elements and control their output. For example, you could set one Element to sound in an upper range of the keyboard, and another Element to sound in a lower range. Thus, even within the same Voice, you can have two different sounds for different areas of the keyboard or you can make the two Element ranges overlap so that their sounds are layered over a set range. Furthermore, you can set each Element to respond to different velocity ranges so that one Element sounds for lower note velocities, whereas another Element sounds for higher note velocities. ● PITCH In PAGES 7 to 12, you can set the basic pitch parameters for each Element. You can detune Elements, apply Pitch Scaling and so on. Also, by setting the PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator), you can control how the pitch changes over time. PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator) Using the PEG, you can control the transition in pitch from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the point at which it is released. This is useful for creating automatic changes in pitch. Furthermore, different PEG parameters can be set for each Element. Attack Decay1 Sustain Level Level Level Pitch Initial Level a Release Level Key off b c d 0 Velocity Element 2 Element 1 Element 4 C-2 Time Attack Time Element 3 G8 Decay1 Decay2 Time Time Release Time In the illustration, the letters a - d indicate the respective Rate (R) settings for Attack - Release. The greater the value for each Rate, the faster the pitch goes to the next set Level — in other words, the time it takes for the pitch to change (between Level settings) becomes shorter. n For details about the PEG parameters, see page 75. 50 ● AMP (Amplitude) In PAGES 23 to 31, you can set the volume of each Element after the OSC (Oscillator), PITCH and FILTER parameters have been applied, as well as the final overall volume of the signal sent to the outputs. The signal of each Element is sent at the specified volume to the next Effect section. Also, by setting the AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator), you can control how the volume changes over time. Range passed Level PEG FEG PITCH FILT Element 1~4 Volume AMP Effect Cutoff range OSC LFO Cutoff Frequency n The final volume for all Elements is set in the Total Vol (Total Volume) parameter, Common Edit PAGE 2. Frequency FEG (Filter Envelope Generator) Using the FEG, you can control the transition in tone from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the point at which it is released. When you press a note on the keyboard, the cutoff frequency will change according to these envelope settings. This is useful for creating automatic wah effects, for example. Furthermore, different FEG parameters can be set for each Element. Attack Decay1 Sustain Level Level Level Level Initial Level a Release Level Key off AEG AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator) By using the AEG, you can control the transition in volume from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the point at which it is released. When you press a note on the keyboard, the volume will change according to these envelope settings. Furthermore, different AEG parameters can be set for each Element. Attack Decay1 Sustain Level Level Level Volume Initial Level b c a Release Level Key off b c d d 0 0 Time Attack Time Decay1 Decay2 Time Time Release Time Time Attack Time Decay1 Decay2 Time Time Release Time In the illustration, the letters a - d indicate the respective Rate (R) settings for Attack - Release. The greater the value for each Rate, the faster the filter goes to the next set Level — in other words, the time it takes for the filter to change (between Level settings) becomes shorter. In the illustration, the letters a - d indicate the respective Rate (R) settings for Attack - Release. The greater the value for each Rate, the faster the volume goes to the next set Level — in other words, the time it takes for the volume to change (between Level settings) becomes shorter. n For details about the FEG parameters, see page 79. n For details about the AEG parameters, see page 80. 51 Basics Section ● FILTER In PAGES 13 to 22, you can use the filter to change the tonal characteristics of each Element, by adjusting overtones (harmonic tones) included in the waveform from the Element. The S03 employs an LPF (low pass filter). Only frequencies below this point are passed. You can also set the Filter Envelope Generator (FEG) for time variance of how the filter works, which results in a dynamic change in tonal characteristics. Here, we’ll show you how the FEG works. Basics Section About EG Rate and Time (Voice Mode) The EG (Envelope Generator) processes and shapes the output level of the tone generator from the moment you press a key until the sound decays to silence. The level (Y-axis in the illustrations below) is a different aspect of the sound, depending on which EG is being used. For the PEG, level corresponds to Pitch. For the FEG, it corresponds to the cutoff frequency. For the AEG, it corresponds to the volume. The behavior of the EG over time is controlled by the Rate (R) parameters. Rate refers to the time it takes to go from one level to the next (for example, from the initial level to the attack level). The illustrations below show how different Rate settings affect the sound. To extend the time between level changes and make it long, set the Rate (R) to a small value. ● LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) In PAGES 32 to 35, you can edit the LFO, which (as its name suggests) produces waveforms of a low frequency. These waveforms can be used to vary the pitch, filter or amplitude of each Element to create effects such as vibrato, wah and tremolo. However, the actual available LFO parameters will vary according to the type of Element. The LFO is capable of producing a wide variety of effects in various ways. By modulating the pitch over an adjustable amount, it creates vibrato. By modulating the filter over an adjustable range of frequencies, it creates wah-wah and dynamic filter sweep effects. By modulating the volume (or “amplitude”) of the sound over an adjustable depth, it creates tremolo. LFO Wave 1 E tri PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Level Attack Level Rate (R) is set to a large value. 0 Attack Time is short. FEG PITCH FILT AMP Effect a Initial Level Time PEG Element 1~4 Rate (R) is set to a small value. a Initial Level Attack Level Level OSC 0 Time LFO AEG Attack Time is long. 5 Storing Edited Voices Up to 128 new/edited Normal Voices and 2 new/edited Drum Voices can be stored to internal user memory. Voice Store Normal Voice USER 1~128 Drum Voice USER DRUM 1~2 When storing a Voice, any existing data at the storage location will be lost. You should always back up important data to computer or some other storage medium beforehand. n For details about storing Voices, see page 89. 52 In the final stages of programming, you can set the effects parameters to further change the sound’s character. In general, System Effects apply to the overall sound, whether it is a Voice, a Multi. Insertion Effects, on the other hand, can be applied individually to each Voice. The S03 has two System Effect sections (Reverb and Chorus) plus a Variation Effect section (see below). Different effects settings can be set per Voice (in the Voice mode) and per Multi (in the Multi mode), though the connection between the Effect sections will vary in each case. Reverb Section The Reverb section includes a selection of 11 different reverb-type effects, including realistic simulations of the natural reverberation found in various halls and rooms. In the Multi mode, the Reverb settings will apply to the Multi as a whole. In the Voice mode, the Reverb Send parameter can be set for each Voice. Chorus Section The Chorus section includes a selection of 11 chorustype effects, including a flanger and others. Most of these effects are ideal for adding thickness to the sound. In the Multi mode, the Chorus settings will apply to the Multi as a whole. In the Voice mode, the Chorus Send parameter can be set for each Voice. Variation Effects A total of 42 different Effect types are available in the Variation section. These range from conventional effects such as Reverb, for enhancing the sound, to wilder effects such as Distortion, for actively changing the sound, or creating new sounds. System and Insertion Effects The S03 effects sections can be designated as either System or Insertion effects. Reverb and Chorus are always System effects, which means they can be applied to any or all Parts. The Variation effect can also be a System effect, or it can be designated as an Insertion effect, which means it can be dedicated to a specific Part. Basically, S03 System and Insertion effects work the same way as in a sound mixer, as shown in the diagram on the next page. For example, System effects can be applied to instruments (i.e., Parts) which are connected to the various mixer channels; the amount of each System effect is determined by channel “send” and system “return” level controls. An Insertion effect can be connected (“inserted”) into the signal flow of a specific channel in order to process the sound of that instrument (i.e., Voice/ Part) only. In the Voice mode of the S03, the Insertion effect (Variation) can be applied to a Voice, while in the Multi Play mode it can only be applied to a single Part. The System and Insertion effect configurations can be controlled in detail by XG song data (signified by the XG mark) when the S03 is in the Multi Play mode. n For details about each Effect Type, refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data List. Effects in Voice Mode Voice In the Voice mode, you can set the Effect Send parameter for the Reverb and Chorus sections, and store them with each Voice. For the Variation Effect, the Effect Type and the various effect parameters can be set, as well as the effect on/off setting for each Voice. The signals that are processed by the Variation block are mixed and sent to the Reverb and Chorus sections. Variation Effect Output System Effects Chorus Chorus n Drum Voices in Voice mode have no Variation effect. Effects in Multi Mode 53 Basics Section Effects Basics Section You can set the desired Effect type for each Effect section as well as its parameter values for each Multi in the Multi mode. By using Variation as an Insertion effect, you can apply the effect to only one of the Parts (see illustration below). Voice Reverb Send Reverb (Rev) Variation (Var) Dry/Wet VOICE As shown in the illustration below, the Reverb section and Chorus section function as System effects, which process all of the Parts, according to each Part’s effect send setting and the global effect return setting — just like on an actual mixer. When using Variation as an Insertion effect, the signal connection is serial, and the effect is applied only to the selected Part — just like patching in an outboard effect on a single instrument channel. Mixer (Fixed setting: Hall 1) SndCho Rev Total Lvl Total Vol Out Chorus (Cho) Chorus (Fixed setting: Chorus 1) Send * Depending on the selected effect type, the Dry/Wet parameter may not be available. For details, refer to the Effect Parameter List in the separate Data List booklet. System Effects Reverb Effect Chorus Effect Insertion Effect Variation Effect 1 2 3 4 5 6 Part 1~16 16 Can be used as either System or Insertion effect. Multi Var Connect=INS Part 3 Var Send set to on Part 1 Rev Return Reverb (Rev) Part 2 SndCho Rev Out Total Vol Variation (Var) Dry/Wet Part 3 Chorus (Cho) Cho Return Part 16 Reverb Send Chorus Send * Depending on the selected effect type, the Dry/Wet parameter may not be available. For details, refer to the Effect Parameter List in the separate Data List booklet. Var Connect set to SYS Reverb (Rev) Rev Return SndCho Rev Dry Level Part 1 Chorus (Cho) Part 2 Cho Return SndVar Rev Sndvar Cho Variation (Var) Var Return Part 16 Reverb Chorus Var Send Send Send Out Total Vol * The default value of Dry Level is 127. This cannot be set from the panel of the S03; however, it can be set by transmitting appropriate MIDI messages from an external device. 54 Reference Section Multi Mode Switching Parts On/Off In this mode, you can set Multi Edit parameters. These can roughly be divided into Common parameters, which apply to all Parts, and Part-specific parameters. n You need to select the Multi before entering Multi Edit mode (page 37). All parameters can be set and stored per Multi. In the Multi Edit mode, a Part can be switched on/ off when you press the [MUTE] button. The Part indicator which is muted will flash. This lets you mute other Parts in the Multi so that you can listen to the changes to the Part that you are editing. n For details about using the Multi mode, see page 37. Multi Store n See page 28 on how to enter Multi Edit mode. The edited settings for the current Multi will be lost if you select another Multi or mode. To avoid losing important data, you should always use Multi Store to store your edited Multi. For details about the Multi Store procedure, see page 69. The E Indicator If you alter any parameters in Multi Edit mode, the E (Edit) indicator will be displayed in the PAGE column of the screen after exiting from the Multi Edit mode. This gives a quick indication that the current Multi has been modified but not yet stored. PAGE Init Mlt MLT01 PART ELEM KEY E P OCTAVE PAGE PART ELEM KEY E P 1 OCTAVE Edit Indicator n When creating a new Multi from scratch, it can be useful, prior to editing, to clear the settings for the current Multi using the Initialize Multi function in the Multi Job mode (pages 67 and 68). Common Edit and Editing Individual Parts A Multi can consist of 16 Voice Parts (page 24). The parameters common to all Parts are known as a Common Edit. The Multi Edit mode can be divided into screens for Common Edit and those for editing each Part. In the Multi Edit mode, simultaneously press both the [+] and [–] buttons to select the Common Edit screens. Common Edit screens Init Mlt Name PART ELEM KEY PAGE 1 P The Compare Function Use this to listen to the difference between the Multi with your edited settings and the same Multi prior to editing. 1 Press the [COMPARE (EDIT)] button while in Multi Edit mode. The EDIT LED will flash and the Multi settings prior to editing will temporarily be reinstated for comparison purposes. OCTAVE Part Edit screens PAGE GrandPno XG001 PART ELEM KEY 1 P OCTAVE PAGE 1 PART ELEM KEY P OCTAVE PAGE 1 PART ELEM KEY P 1 OCTAVE Common indicator Part indicator n While the Compare function is enabled, the DEC/NO and INC/YES buttons cannot be used for editing. 2 Press the [EDIT] button again to disable the Compare function and restore your recently edited settings. 55 Multi Mode Multi Edit Common (Settings for all Parts) Here we explain how to edit common settings for all Parts in a Multi. There are two types available, each of which consists of multiple pages. 3. Transpose This determines the overall Transpose setting of the Parts, in semitone units. It does not affect information transmitted via MIDI. Transpose 3 +00 Multi Mode n Refer to the Function Tree chart (page 20) or the Parameter Table (page 22). Common General (PAGES 1 to 3) Common Effect (PAGES 4 to 21) PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: –24 (–2 octaves) ~ +24 (+2 octaves) n This parameter has no effect for Parts set to the Drum mode (page 61). 4. RevEF (Reverb Effect Type) 1. Name You can set a Multi Name consisting of up to 8 characters. You can also select the Category Name to the left of the Multi Name. Select the Reverb Effect Type here, then set the effect’s parameters in the following PAGES. Hall 1 4 RevEF PAGE PAGE 1 Init Mlt Name PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE n The method of setting the Multi Name is the same as for the Voice Name. Details are given on page 71. ❏ Settings: Details are given in the Effect Type list in the separate Data List. 5. Reverb Parameters 2. Total Vol (Total Volume) Set the various Reverb effect parameters. Set the overall volume of the Multi. Rev Time 5 2.1 PAGE Total Vol 2 127 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0~127 ❏ Settings: The number of parameters and the contents of each screen will vary depending on the selected Effect Type. Details are given in the Effect Type/ Parameter list in the separate Data List. 6. Rev Return (Reverb Return) Set the Return level of the Reverb Effect. Rev Return 6 064 PAGE OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0 ~ 127 56 Common General/Common Effect PART ELEM KEY 7. Reverb Pan 11. Chorus Pan Set the stereo pan position of the Reverb Effect. Set the stereo pan position of the Chorus Effect. Chorus Pan 11 C Reverb Pan 7 C PAGE PAGE PART ELEM KEY PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE OCTAVE ❏ Settings: L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right) 8. ChoEF (Chorus Effect Type) Select the Chorus Effect Type here, then set the effect’s parameters in the following PAGES. n You can also enter the settings below using the numeric keypad. 1~63: L63~L01 64: C (Center) 65~127: R01~R63 12. SndCho➞Rev (Send Chorus to Reverb) Set the send level of the signal sent from the Chorus Effect to the Reverb Effect. Chorus 1 8 ChoEF PAGE SndCho Rev 12 000 PART ELEM KEY PAGE OCTAVE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: Details are given in the Effect Type list in the separate Data List. ❏ Settings: 0 ~ 127 9. Chorus Parameters 13. VarEF (Variation Effect Type) Set the various Chorus effect parameters. Select the Variation Effect Type here, then set the effect’s parameters in the following PAGES. LFO Freq 9 0.25 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Delay LCR 13 VarEF PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: The number of parameters and the contents of each screen will vary depending on the selected Effect Type. Details are given in the Effect Type/ Parameter list in the separate Data List. 10. Cho Return (Chorus Return) Set the Return level of the Chorus Effect. Cho Return 10 064 PAGE PART ELEM KEY ❏ Settings: Details are given in the Effect Type list in the separate Data List. 14. Variation Parameters Set the various Variation effect parameters. ❏ Settings: The number of parameters and the contents of each screen will vary depending on the selected Effect Type. Details are given in the Effect Type/ Parameter list in the separate Data List. OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0 ~ 127 Common Effect 57 Multi Mode n You can also enter the settings below using the numeric keypad. 1~63: L63~L01 64: C (Center) 65~127: R01~R63 ❏ Settings: L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right) 15. VarConnect (Variation Connection) 18. SndVar➞Rev (Send Variation to Reverb) This determines how the Variation Effect is used in the signal processing chain — as an Insertion effect or as a System effect. Set the send level of the signal sent from the Variation Effect to the Reverb Effect. SndVar Rev 18 000 VarConnect 15 INS Multi Mode PAGE PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0~127 ❏ Settings: INS (Insertion), SYS (System) n The function of the Variation Effect changes depending on this setting, as do the types of parameter changes. n For more details on System and Insertion Effects, see page 53. 16. Var Return (Variation Return) Set the Return level of the Variation Effect. n This can be set only when Variation Connection (above) is set to “SYS.” When Variation Connection is set to “INS,” “***” appears in the display and the setting cannot be changed. 19. SndVar➞Cho (Send Variation to Chorus) Set the send level of the signal sent from the Variation Effect to the Chorus Effect. Var Return 16 064 PAGE SndVar Cho 19 000 PART ELEM KEY PAGE OCTAVE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0 ~ 127 n This can be set only when Variation Connection (above) is set to “SYS.” When Variation Connection is set to “INS,” “***” appears in the display and the setting cannot be changed. 17. Var Pan (Variation Pan) Set the stereo pan position of the Variation Effect. Var Pan PAGE 17 PART ELEM KEY C ❏ Settings: 0~127 n This can be set only when Variation Connection (above) is set to “SYS.” When Variation Connection is set to “INS,” “***” appears in the display and the setting cannot be changed. 20. MW VarCtl (MW Variation Effect Control Depth) This determines the degree to which the Modulation wheel controls the Variation Effect. OCTAVE ❏ Settings: L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right) n You can also enter the settings below using the numeric keypad. 1~63: L63~L01 64: C (Center) 65~127: R01~R63 n This can be set only when Variation Connection (above) is set to “SYS.” When Variation Connection is set to “INS,” “***” appears in the display and the setting cannot be changed. 58 Common Effect MW VarCtl 20 +00 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: –64~+63 n This can be set only when Variation Connection (above) is set to “INS.” When Variation Connection is set to “SYS,” “***” appears in the display and the setting cannot be changed. n The particular parameter that can be controlled with the Modulation wheel is fixed for each of the Variation effects. Refer to the separate Data List for details. 21. AC1VarCtl (AC1 Variation Effect Control Depth) This determines the degree to which the Assignable Controller 1 controls the Variation Effect. AC1VarCtl 21 +00 PAGE PART ELEM KEY Part (Settings for each Part) The following is an explanation of the Part parameters used to edit each Multi. n Refer to the Function Tree chart (page 20) or the Parameter Table (page 22). OCTAVE n This can be set only when Variation Connection (above) is set to “INS.” When Variation Connection is set to “SYS,” “***” appears in the display and the setting cannot be changed. n The particular parameter that can be controlled with the Assignable Controller 1 is fixed for each of the Variation effects. Refer to the separate Data List for details. n For information on the AC1, refer to AC1 CC No (pages 66 and 92 ) in the Multi and Utility modes. Multi Mode ❏ Settings: –64~+63 Voice Selection (PAGE 1) Part Mix (PAGES 2 to 5) Part General (PAGES 6 to 9) Part Tone (PAGES 10 to 14) Part Controller (PAGES 15 to 21) Part Effect (PAGES 22 to 24) 1. Voice Selection You can assign a Voice to each Part. Use the [+] and [–] buttons to select the Part, then select its Voice. The display will vary as follows according to the Memory selected. n Specify the particular Voice Memory by pressing the appropriate Memory button: PRESET, USER or GM/XG. n To select a Drum Voice, simultaneously hold down the [DRUM] button and press the appropriate Memory button: [USER] or [GM/XG]. n The Voice can be set by using the same method as with Category Search (page 35). n For details about Categories, refer to the Category List on page 71. For details about using Category Search, see page 35. ●PRESET PAGE 1 StPiano1 PR001 PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: PR001 ~ PR128 Common Effect/Voice Selection 59 ●USER 3. Pan ❏ Settings: US001~US128, USDR01~USDR02 Set the stereo pan position of the Part. PAGE 1 Synth St US001 Pan PART ELEM KEY PAGE C PART ELEM KEY 3 OCTAVE 1 OCTAVE Multi Mode ●GM/XG PAGE 1 GrandPno XG001 PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Use the [E] and [F] buttons to switch among the different banks for selecting program numbers. ❏ Settings: Bank Select: Program Number: ❏ Settings: Rnd (random; the pan position moves randomly each time a key is played), L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right) n You can also enter the settings below using the numeric keypad. 0: Rnd 1~63: L63~L01 64: C (Center) 65~127: R01~R63 BK*** (Refer to the XG Voice List and XG Drum List in the separate Data List. 4-1. NtLmt-L (Note Limit Low) XG001~XG128 (The actual number of available programs differs depedning on the selected bank. For details, refer to the XG Voice List and XG Drum List in the separate Data List.) 4-2. NtLmt-H (Note Limit High) 2. Volume Set the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Part. Each Part will only sound for notes played within its specified range. NtLmt-L 4 1 C-2 PAGE Set the output level of the Part. 2 PART ELEM KEY 1 OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0~127 NtLmt-H 4 1 G8 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE OCTAVE ❏ Settings: C-2 ~ G8 Volume PAGE PART ELEM KEY 100 n You can set the lowest and highest notes in the range by pressing notes on the keyboard while holding down the [ENTER] button. n For more information and some example settings, see page 41. 5-1. VelLmt-L (Velocity Limit Low) 5-2. VelLmt-H (Velocity Limit High) Set the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Part will respond. Each Part will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. VelLmt-L 1 5 001 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 1~127 60 Voice Selection/Part Mix VelLmt-H 5 1 127 PAGE OCTAVE PART ELEM KEY 6. Rcv Ch (MIDI Receive Channel) 9. Part Mode Set the MIDI Receive Channel for each Part. Each Part receives MIDI messages according to the channel set here. Select “off” for Parts that you do not want to respond to MIDI. This determines whether the Part uses Normal Voices or Drum Voices. Part Mode 9 1 norm PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Rcv Ch PAGE PART ELEM KEY 1 01 ❏ Settings: 1 ~ 16, off n For information on setting the MIDI Receive channel in the Voice mode, see page 94. 7-1. NoteShift 7-2. Detune These parameters determine the pitch of each Part. NoteShift 1 7 +00 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Detune 7 1 -12.0 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ■ NoteShift Set the amount (in semitones) by which the note pitch is shifted. ❏ Settings: –24~0~+24 ■ Detune Determines the fine tuning setting of the pitch. Use this to create warm detuning effects by setting each Part to a slightly different value. ❏ Settings: norm (Normal Voice) With this setting, Normal Voices can be assigned to the Part. drum (Drum Voice) With this setting, Drum Voices can be assigned to the Part. drumS1/2 (Drum Setup 1/2) Used to play commercially available song data (switches automatically). n The part set to a setting other than “norm” is called a Drum Part. n If you’ve edited a drum kit in Drum Voice Edit mode and you wish to use that kit, set this to “drum.” n When an XG System On message is received from an external sequencer, this is automatically set to “drumS1.” In order to use the settigs made in Drum Voice Edit, record the appropriate message in the song data (Part Mode set to Drum). Refer to the MIDI Data Format section in the separate Data List. F0 43 10 4C 08 nn 07 01 F7 (nn=Part number) (hexadecimal) ❏ Settings: –12.8 (Hz)~0~+12.7 (Hz) n Ignore the decimal place when inputting values from the numeric keypad. For example, to enter the value “–1.5,” press the following buttons in order: “–,” “1,” then “5.” 8. Mono/Poly Select monophonic or polyphonic playback. Select whether each Part is played back monophonically (single notes only) or polyphonically (multiple simultaneous notes). Mono/Poly 8 1 poly PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: mono, poly n When the Part Mode is set to “drum,” “***” appears in the display and the parameter cannot be set. Part General 61 Multi Mode 6 OCTAVE ■ VelSnsOfs As illustrated below, the velocity will be increased by the specified amount. 10-1. VelSnsDpt (Velocity Sensitivity Depth) 10-2. VelSnsOfs (Velocity Sensitivity Offset) Changes to velocity curve according to VelDepth (with offset set to 64) Multi Mode Set the Velocity Sensitivity and Velocity Offset for each Part. VelSnsDpt 10 1 064 PAGE PART ELEM KEY VelSnsOfs 10 1 064 PAGE Depth=64 Offset=64 PART ELEM KEY ❏ Settings: 0~127 ■ VelSnsDpt As illustrated below, a large setting will cause large changes in velocity when you play the keyboard. Changes to velocity curve according to VelDepth (with offset set to 64) Actual Velocity for tone generator Depth=127 Offset=64 Depth=64 Offset=64 Depth=32 Offset=64 Depth=0 Offset=64 Offset=64 Part Tone Offset=127 Depth=64 Offset=96 OCTAVE OCTAVE 62 Actual Velocity for tone generator Received Velocity Offset=96 Depends on offset Offset=64 Velocity=1 Depends on offset Offset=32 Depth=64 Offset=32 Received Velocity 11-1. Cutoff 12-1. Attack Tm (Attack Time) 11-2. Resonance 12-2. Decay Tm (Decay Time) You can set Filter parameters to change the tonal characteristics of each Part 12-3. Releas Tm (Release Time) Resonance 11 1 +00 Cutoff PART ELEM KEY PAGE 11 1 +00 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE OCTAVE ❏ Settings: –64 ~ +63 n These three parameters affect both the AEG and the FEG. Attack Tm 12 1 +00 PAGE ■ Cutoff Set the Cutoff frequency of the low pass filter. Only frequencies below this point are passed. PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Decay Tm 12 1 +00 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Releas Tm 12 1 +00 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Level Range passed Level Cutoff range Frequency Cutoff Time ■ Resonance Set the amount of Resonance (harmonic boost) applied to the signal around the Cutoff frequency. This is a useful way of adding further character to the sound. Attack Time Key on Decay Time Release Time Key off ❏ Settings: –64 ~ +63 ■ Attack Tm Determines the transition time from the moment a key on the keyboard is pressed to the point at which the level of the Voice reaches its peak. Positive values will lengthen the transition time and negative values will shorten it. Level Resonance Frequenc Cutoff ■ Decay Tm Determines the transition time from the point at which the level of the Voice reaches its peak to the point at which it levels off. Positive values will lengthen the transition time and negative values will shorten it. ■ Releas Tm Determines the transition time from when the key is released to when the sound level decays to zero. Positive values will lengthen the transition time and negative values will shorten it. Part Tone 63 Multi Mode Filter is the section of the tone generator that changes the tonal qualities of a Voice by passing only a limited frequency range and cutting signals outside that range. The S03 employs an LPF (low pass filter). This determines the EG (Envelope Generator) Parameters for each Part. There are three parameters governing the transition in tone and output level from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is released or the point at which the level has faded to zero. 13-1. PEGIntL (PEG Initial Level) 14-1. Vib Rate (Vibrato Rate) 13-2. PEGAtkTm (PEG Attack Time) 14-2. Vib Depth (Vibrato Depth) 13-3. PEGRelL (PEG Release Level) 14-3. Vib Delay (Vibrato Delay) Multi Mode 13-4. PEGRelTm (PEG Release Time) You can set PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator) Parameters for each Part. There are four parameters that control how the pitch changes from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is released or the point at which the level has faded to zero. PEGInitL 13 1 +00 PAGE PART ELEM KEY Vib Rate 14 1 +00 PAGE PART ELEM KEY Vib Depth 14 1 +00 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE OCTAVE Vib Delay 14 +00 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE PEGAtkTm 13 1 +00 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE OCTAVE Depth PEGRelL 13 1 +00 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE PEGRelTm 13 1 +00 PAGE Time PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Delay Key on Rate ❏ Settings: –64 ~ +63 Normal Pitch Time PEG Initial Level PEG Release Level PEG Attack Time Key on PEG Release Time ■ PEGIntL Determines the initial pitch, or the pitch that sounds the moment the key is played. ■ PEGAtkTm Determines the time it takes after you play the key for the pitch to return to normal (or original), from the pitch set in PEG Initial Level above. ■ PEGRelL Determines the final pitch that is reached after you release your finger from the key. ■ PEGRelTm Determines the time it takes for the pitch to reach the setting made in PEG Release Level above, from when you release your finger from the key. Part Tone ■ Vib Depth Determines the depth or degree of pitch modulation. n This Parameter is not available for Drum Parts. Key off ❏ Settings: –64 ~ +63 64 ■ Vib Rate Determines the speed of pitch modulation. ■ Vib Delay Determines the amount of time that elapses from when a key is played to when the Vibrato effect starts. The higher the value, the longer the delay before the onset of the Vibrato effect. n The Parameter is not available for Drum Parts. 15-1. Porta Sw (Portamento Switch) 18-1. MW PMod (MW Pitch Modulation Depth) 15-2. PortaTime (Portamento Time) 18-2. MW FMod (MW Filter Modulation Depth) Set the Portamento parameters. Portamento creates a smooth transition from the pitch of the first note played to the pitch of the next. PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE PortaTime 15 P 1 000 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ■ Porta Sw Switch Portamento on or off. ❏ Settings: off, on ■ PortaTime Set the pitch transition time. Higher values result in longer transition times. ❏ Settings: 0~127 16. PB Range (Pitch Bend Range) Set the amount (in semitones) by which the pitch of the note is varied when you move the Pitch Bend wheel up/down. For example, if you set a value of +12, moving the wheel up raises the pitch by a maximum of octave. PB Range 16 P 2 +02 PAGE MW PMod 18 P 1 010 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE MW FMod 18 P 1 000 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE MW AMod 18 P 1 000 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0~127 ■ MW PMod Set the amount by which the pitch modulation changes when the Modulation wheel is used. The larger the setting, the greater the depth of control. (The vibrato effect becomes deeper.) ■ MW FMod Set the amount by which the filter Cutoff frequency changes when the Modulation wheel is used. The larger the setting, the greater the depth of control. (The wah effect becomes deeper.) PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: –24~+24 17. MW FltCtl (MW Filter Control) Set the depth of control of the Modulation wheel over the filter cutoff frequency. MW FltCtl 17 P 1 +00 PAGE These parameters let you set the depth of control the Modulation wheel has over the pitch, filter and amplitude modulation of the Voice. ■ MW AMod Set the amount by which the amplitude modulation changes when the Modulation Wheel is used. A larger setting produces greater modulation depth. (The tremolo effect becomes deeper.) n Depending on the selected LFO wave type and the amplitude modulation depth setting, noise may result when the controller is moved. If this happens, reduce the modulation depth value. PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: –64~+63 Part Controller 65 Multi Mode Porta Sw 15 P 1 off 18-3. MW AMod (MW Amplitude Modulation Depth) 19. AC1 CC No (AC1 Control Change Number) 21-1. AC1 FMod (AC1 Filter Modulation Depth) Determines the Control Change number for the AC1 (Assignable Controller 1) of each Part 21-2. AC1 AMod (AC1 Amplitude Modulation Depth) AC1 CC No 19 P 1 00 PAGE PART ELEM KEY Multi Mode OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0~95 n The AC1 CC No parameter in the Voice mode is set in the Utility mode (PAGE 7). AC1 (Assignable Controller 1) The AC1 (Assignable Controller 1) is only available by using an external MIDI controller (such as a foot controller connected to a MIDI keyboard). By setting the AC1 Control Change number here to match the controller on the connected MIDI device, you can use that controller to change the sound, according to the settings made in the other AC1 parameters — such as AC1FltCtl, AC1 FMod/PMod, or the Variation Effect’s AC1VarCtl. For example, by setting AC1 to “2” here, you can use a breath controller to control the Voice of a Part. If the connected MIDI controller is set to “0,” the Part cannot be controlled, even by setting the proper Control Change number. For best results, also make sure that the sensitivity parameters (AC1FitCl, AC1 FMod/PMod, or the Variation Effect’s AC1VarCtl) are set appropriately, as needed. These parameters let you set the depth of control the Control Change messages (via Assignable Controller 1) have over the filter and amplitude of the Part (Voice). AC1 FMod 21 P 1 000 PAGE PART ELEM KEY AC1 AMod 21 P 1 000 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0~127 ■ AC1 FMod Set the amount by which the filter Cutoff frequency changes when Assignable Controller 1 is used. The larger the setting, the greater the depth of control. (The wah effect becomes deeper.) ■ AC1 AMod Set the depth of control that Assignable Controller 1 has over the amplitude modulation. A larger setting means a larger modulation depth. (The tremolo effect becomes deeper.) n Depending on the selected LFO wave type and the amplitude modulation depth setting, noise may result when the controller is moved. If this happens, reduce the modulation depth value. 22. ReverbSend Set the send level of the Reverb Effect. 20. AC1FltCtl (AC1 Filter Control) Set the amount by which the filter cutoff frequency changes when the controller (Assignable Controller 1) is used. AC1FltCtl 20 P 1 +00 PAGE PART ELEM KEY ReverbSend 22 P 1 040 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0~127 n In the value is too high, noise may result. If this happens, reduce the value. OCTAVE ❏ Settings: –64~+63 23. ChorusSend Set the send level of the Chorus Effect. ChorusSend 23 P 1 000 PAGE OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0~127 66 Part Controller/Part Effect PART ELEM KEY 24. Var Send (Variation Send) When the Variation effect is set as an Insertion effect, this determines whether the Variation effect is applied or not. When the Variation effect is set as an System effect, this determines the send level for the effect. (Make the Insertion/System setting from the Variation Connection parameter (PAGE 15) in Multi Common Edit; see page 58.) PAGE PART ELEM KEY You can perform various operations (Jobs) in the Multi Job mode. For example, you can initialize Multis to their original settings (including those currently being edited) or copy Parts. n Before entering the Multi Job mode and using the Initialize or Copy function, you must select the Multi you wish to use the particular operation on (page 37). n For details about how to enter the Multi Job mode, see page 28. OCTAVE ❏ Settings: Performing a Job When VarConnect is set to “INS”: on (effect is applied), off (effect is not applied) 1In the Multi Play mode, select the Multi Number you wish to perform the Job on. When VarConnect is set to “SYS”: 0~127 2Press the [JOB] button to enter the Multi Job mode. n When VarConnect is set to “INS,” this parameter determines whether or not the Variation effect is applied to the particular Part. In this condition, the Variation effect cannot be used for several Parts at the same time. Only the Part last selected will be routed through the Variation effect. When VarConnect is set to “SYS,” this parameter lets you adjust the send level for the Variation effect for each Part. Also set the related Multi Common Edit parameters (in PAGES 16 to 21) as desired. 3Use the [▲][▼] buttons and switch to the screen showing the Job you wish to perform. n For more details on the Effects, see page 53. 4Use the [DEC/NO] and [INC/YES] buttons to select the parameter you wish to perform the Job on. PAGE 1 Init multi PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE n This step is not applicable for the Bulk Dump Job. n Use the [+]/[–] buttons to set the Part or destination Part when using Init Part/CpyVar/CpyCtl or Copy Part (CpyPart). 5When you press the [ENTER] button, you will be prompted for confirmation. PAGE 1 Init Sure? PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE 6Press the [INC/YES] button to confirm. A “Completed” message appears when the Job has been completed, and operation returns to the original screen. Press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel the Job. n For Jobs that take longer to process, you will see the message “Executing” during processing. If you switch off the power to the S03 while this message is displayed, you risk corrupting your data. 7Press the [Multi] button to exit the Multi Job mode and return to the Multi Play mode. Part Effect 67 Multi Mode Var Send 24 P 1 off Multi Job 1. Init (Initialize) 3. CpyCtl (Copy Controller) You can reset (initialize) all parameters of a Multi to their default settings. You can also selectively initialize certain parameters, such as Common settings, settings for each Part, and so on. Note that this does not return the Multi to its original state prior to editing. Instead, it is useful when building a completely new Multi from scratch. This let you copy the Controller settings for the Voice assigned to the Part. CpyCtl PART ELEM KEY PAGE 3 P 1 OCTAVE Multi Mode ❏ Settings: 1 ~ 16, A (All Parts) PAGE 1 Init multi PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ■ Select Parameter Type to be Initialized Use the [DEC/NO] and [INC/YES] buttons to select the parameter to be initialized. When this is set to “Part,” use the [+]/[–] buttons to select the desired Part (1 - 16). ❏ Settings: multi (Current Multi), cmmn (Current Common), part (Current Part 1 ~ 16) 2. CpyVar (Copy Variation Effect) When Var Connect is set to “SYS,” this lets you copy the Effect settings for the Voice assigned to the Current Part. When Var Connect is set to “INS,” this lets you copy the Variation Effect settings for the Voice assigned to the Part for which “Var Send” (PAGE 24 in Multi Part Edit) was set to “on.” If all of the Parts’ Var Send settings are “off,” the Part having the Voice Effect settings to be copied can be selected, just as above (when Var Connect is set to “SYS”). Var Connect=SYS Var Connect=INS CpyVar PAGE 2 OCTAVE PART ELEM KEY P 1 CpyVar PAGE PART ELEM KEY 2 OCTAVE ❏ Settings: P1 ~ P16 (Part 1 ~ 16) (When Var Connect is set to “SYS,” or when Var Connect is set to “INS” and all Parts’ Var Send settings are “off.”) No Parameter (When Var Connect is set to “INS” and one Part’s Var Send settings is “on.”) n The following parameters can be copied. • Variation Effect Type • Variation Parameters • MW Variation Control Depth • AC1 Variation Control Depth n When you copy the Variation effect data of a Drum Voice, the 2 Band EQ effect settings are copied. 68 n The following parameters can be copied. • MW Filter Control • MW Pitch Modulation Depth • MW Filter Modulation Depth • MW Amplitude Modulation Depth • Pitch Bend Range • AC1 Filter Control • AC1 Filter Modulation Depth • AC1 Amplitude Modulation Depth • Portamento Switch • Portamento Time 4. CpyPart (Copy Part) This lets you copy Part parameter settings of the Multi being edited to another Part in the same Part. Use the [DEC/NO] and [INC/YES] buttons to select the source Part. Use the [–] and [+] buttons to select the desired destination Part (1 - 16). CpyPart 1 P 02 PART ELEM KEY PAGE 4 P OCTAVE desired destination Part (1 - 16) source Part ❏ Settings: P1 ~ P16 (Part 1 ~ 16) 5. BlkDmp (Bulk Dump) You can send all the parameter settings for the current Multi or all Multis to your computer or some other external MIDI device using Bulk Dump. PAGE 5 BlkDmp Curnt PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: Curnt (Current Multi), All (All Multis), Systm (All Utility and MIDI data) n To send Voice data, refer to the corresponding Bulk Dump function in the Voice Jobs (page 88). n In order to perform a Bulk Dump, the appropriate MIDI Device Number must be set. For details, see page 93. n For an application example showing how to use the Bulk Dump function, see page 42. Multi Store You can store (save) your original parameter settings for up to 32 Multis to User Memory. The procedure is as follows. Multi Mode n When you perform this, the settings for the destination Multi will be overwritten. Important data should always be backed up to computer, Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3 or some other storage device. 1Press the [STORE] button after editing a Multi. The Multi Store screen appears. Store MLT01 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE 2Use [DEC/NO] and [INC/YES] buttons to select the destination Multi Number. 3When you press the [ENTER] button, you will be prompted for confirmation. Store Sure? PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE 4Press the [INC/YES] button to confirm. The message “Executing” will be displayed while the Job is being processed. When it has been completed, a “Completed” message appears, and operation returns to the Multi Play mode. n You can press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel the Job. This will return you to the original screen. 69 Voice Mode Voice Edit Switching Elements On/Off There are two types of Voices: Normal Voices and Drum Voices. The following is an explanation of the parameters used to edit each Voice. In Voice Edit Mode, an Element can be switched on/ off when you press the [MUTE] button. This lets you mute other Elements in the Voice so that you can listen to the changes to the Element that you are editing. n Details about the Voice types and the Voice Memories are given on Page 25. PART ELEMENT KEY Voice Mode n For more information on playing Voices, see page 33. MUTE n You need to select the Voice before entering Voice Edit mode (Page 33). All parameters can be set and stored per Voice. n See page 28 on how to enter Voice Edit mode. The E Indicator If you alter any parameters in Voice Edit mode, the E (Edit) indicator will be displayed in the PAGE column of the screen after exiting from the Voice Edit mode. This gives a quick indication that the current Voice has been modified but not yet stored. PAGE E GrandPno XG001 COMMON Voice Store The edited settings for the current Voice will be lost if you select another Voice or mode. To avoid losing important data, you should always use Voice Store to store your edited Voice. For details about the Voice Store procedure, see page 89. n When creating a new Voice from scratch, it can be useful, prior to editing, to clear the settings for the current Voice using the Initialize Voice function in the Voice Job mode (pages 87 and 88). PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Normal Voice PAGE PART ELEM KEY E OCTAVE Edit indicator When editing Normal Voices, there are 52 PAGES consisting of 17 Common Edit settings (common to all four Elements) and 35 Element-specific settings. n For information on how to switch between the Common Edit displays and the Element Edit displays, see page 48. n Many parameters are the same as those for the Multis. For details about those parameters, see page 22. The Compare Function Use this to listen to the difference between the Voice with your edited settings and the same Voice prior to editing. 1 Press the [COMPARE (EDIT)] button while in Voice Edit mode. The EDIT LED will flash and the Voice settings prior to editing will temporarily be reinstated for comparison purposes. n While the Compare function is enabled, the DEC/ NO and INC/YES buttons cannot be used for editing. 2 Press the [EDIT] button again to disable the Compare function and restore your recently edited settings. 70 n Refer to the Function Tree chart (page 20) or the Parameter Table (page 22). Common General (PAGES 1 to 4) Common Controller (PAGES 5 to 10) Common Effect (PAGES 11 to 17) The following is an explanation of the Common parameters used to edit each Voice. LCD Category LCD Category –– Unassigned SC Synth Comping PF Piano CP Chromatic Percussion OR Organ DR Drums GT Guitar SE Sound Effects BA Bass ME Musical Effects ST Strings/Orchestral CO Combination BR Brass 1. Name (OTHER) Musical Effects/Combination RP Reed/Pipe You can set a Voice Name consisting of up to 8 characters. You can also select the Category Name to the left of the Voice Name. 1 Synth Lead 2-1. Total Vol (Total Volume) 2-2. Total Lvl (Total Level) OCTAVE Setting the Voice Name 1 Use the [E] and [F] buttons to move the cursor to the position of the next character. By assigning a Category Name, it will be easier to identify the Voice later. The Category Search function (page 35) can also be used to search for it. If no Category Name is set, the Category will be shown as two hyphens. Set the output level of the Voice. Total Volume determines the overall volume, including the applied effect. Total Level determines the level of the Voice that is sent to the effect. Total Vol 2 E 127 PAGE PART ELEM KEY Total Lvl 2 E 127 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0~127 2 Use the [E] and [F] buttons to move the cursor to the position of the first character. The selected character will flash. 3. Mono/Poly 3 Use the [DEC/NO] and [INC/YES] buttons to enter an alphabetic character/symbol or use the numeric keypad to enter a numeric character. Select monophonic or polyphonic playback. Select whether a voice is played back monophonically (single notes only) or polyphonically (multiple simultaneous notes). 4 Use the [E] and [F] buttons to move the cursor to the position of the next character. 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until all the characters have been set for your Voice Name. Mono/Poly 3 E poly PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: mono, poly ❏ Available numbers and letters 3 F Y l ! 4 G Z m " 5 H [ n # 6 I ¥ o $ 7 J ] p % 8 K ^ q & 9 L _ r ' : M ` s ( ; N a t ) < O b u = P c v + > Q d w , - . ?@A R S T e f g x y z / B U h { 0 1 C D VW i j | } 2 E X k Common General 71 Voice Mode GrandPno E Name PART ELEM KEY PAGE LD PD Synth Pad 4-1. VelSnsDpt (Velocity Sensitivity Depth) 11. ReverbSend 4-2. VelSnsOfs (Velocity Sensitivity Offset) The parameters and settings are the same as those for the Multis. For details, see page 66. The parameters and settings are the same as those for the Multis. For details, see page 62. 13. SndChofiRev (Send Chorus to Reverb) 5-1. Porta Sw (Portamento Switch) 14. VarEF (Variation Effect Type) 5-2. PortaTime (Portamento Time) 15. Variation Parameters 6. PB Range (Pitch Bend Range) The parameters and settings are the same as those for the Multis. For details, see page 57. 7. MW FltCtl (MW Filter Control) Voice Mode 12. ChorusSend 8-1. MW PMod (MW Pitch Modulation Depth) 16. MW VarCtl (MW Variation Effect Control Depth) 8-2. MW FMod (MW Filter Modulation Depth) 17. AC1 VarCtl (AC1 Variation Effect Control Depth) 8-3. MW AMod (MW Amplitude Modulation Depth) The parameters and settings are the same as those for the Multis. For details, see pages 58 and 59. 9. AC1FltCtl (AC1 Filter Control) 10-1. AC1 FMod (AC1 Filter Modulation Depth) 10-2. AC1 AMod (AC1 Amplitude Modulation Depth) The parameters and settings are the same as those for the Multis. For details, see pages 65 and 66. Voice Mode/Multi Mode Parameters Normal Voice Common Edit LCD (parameter name) PAGE Multi Part Owner's Edit PAGE Manual Page 4-1 VelSnsDpt (Velocity Sensitivity Depth) 10-1 62 4-2 VelSnsOfs (Velocity Sensitivity Offset) 10-2 62 5-1 Porta Sw (Portamento Switch) 15-1 65 5-2 PortaTime (Portamento Time) 15-2 65 6 PB Range (Pitch Bend Range) 16 65 7 MW FltCtl (MW Filter Control) 17 65 8-1 MW PMod (MW Pitch Modulation Depth) 18-1 65 8-2 MW FMod (MW Filter Modulation Depth) 18-2 65 8-3 MW AMod (MW Amplitude Modulation Depth) 18-3 65 9 AC1FltCtl (AC1 Filter Control) 20 65 10-1 AC1 FMod (AC1 Filter Modulation Depth) 21-1 66 10-2 AC1 AMod (AC1 Amplitude Modulation Depth) 21-2 66 11 ReverbSend 22 66 12 ChorusSend 23 66 Multi Common Edit PAGE 72 Common General/Common Controller/Common Effect 13 SndCho Rev (Send Chorus to Reverb) 12 57 14 VarEF (Variation Effect Type) 13 57 15 Variation Parameters 14 57 16 MW VarCtl (MW Variation Effect Control Depth) 20 58 17 AC1 VarCtl (AC1 Variation Effect Control Depth) 21 59 Element Oscillator/Mixer (PAGES 1 to 6) 3. Level Set the output level of each Element. Element Pitch (PAGES 7 to 12) Level Element Filter (PAGES 13 to 22) Element Amplitude (PAGES 23 to 31) PAGE 3 PART ELEM KEY E 1 240 OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0 ~ 255 Element LFO (PAGES 32 to 35) The following is an explanation of the Element parameters used to edit each Voice. 4. Pan Set the Stereo Pan position for each wave. n The Element settings whose Element Switch is set to “off” can not be changed and “***” appears in the display. Pan PAGE 4 C PART ELEM KEY E 1 OCTAVE This determines whether each Element sounds or not. Element Sw 1 E 1 on PAGE PART ELEM KEY ❏ Settings: Scale, L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right) Scale: Set the amount by which the sound is panned left and right according to the position of the note on the keyboard. 2. Wave Selection n You can also enter the settings below using the numeric keypad. 0: Scale 1~63: L63~L01 64: C (Center) 65~127: R01~R63 Select the Wave. Each Element can be assigned a different wave (sound). 5-1. NtLmt-L (Note Limit Low) OCTAVE ❏ Settings: off, on Wave Name Wave category PAGE 2 PianoL@ E 1 W*001 PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE 5-2. NtLmt-H (Note Limit High) Set the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Element. Each Element will only sound for notes played within its specified range. Wave Number ❏ Settings: 1 ~ 453 n Wave numbers indicated with an asterisk (*) and Wave names indicated with an “at” mark (@) have fixed parameter values (depending on the sound range). For these waves, Element editing is limited to the parameters below. All other parameters’ values are replaced by a series of asterisks in the LCD, indicating that they cannot be set. NtLmt-L 5 E 1 C-2 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE NtLmt-H 5 E 1 G8 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: C-2~G8 n You can set the lowest and highest notes in the range by pressing notes on the keyboard while holding down the [ENTER] button. • Element Switch • Wave Selection • Note Shift • Note Limit Low/High • Velocity Limit Low/High • Pitch Scale Sensitivity • Pitch Scale Center Note Element Oscillator/Mixer 73 Voice Mode 1. Element Sw (Element Switch) 6-1. VelLmt-L (Velocity Limit Low) 6-2. VelLmt-H (Velocity Limit High) Set the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Element will respond. Each Element will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. VelLmt-L 6 E 1 001 PAGE PART ELEM KEY VelLmt-H 6 E 1 127 PAGE 8-2. PchSclCN (Pitch Scale Center Note) You can set the Pitch Scaling for each Element. Pitch Scaling controls the pitch according to the positions of the notes on the keyboard. PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE OCTAVE 8-1. PchSclSns (Pitch Scale Sensitivity) PchSclSns 8 E 1 100% PAGE Voice Mode 7-1. NoteShift 7-2. Detune These parameters determine the pitch of each Element. PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE PAGE OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 1~127 NoteShift +00 7 E 1 PchSclCN 8 E 1 C3 PART ELEM KEY Detune PAGE 7 PART ELEM KEY E 1 +00 PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ■ PchSclSns Adjust the sensitivity of the Pitch Scaling for each Element according to the position of the note on the keyboard. The “PchSclCN” parameter (below) is used as the basic pitch for this parameter. The higher the value, the lower the pitch becomes when playing low notes, and the higher the pitch becomes when playing high notes. OCTAVE ❏ Settings: –63~0~+63 ■ NoteShift Set the amount (in semitones) by which the note pitch is shifted. ■ Detune Determines the fine tuning setting of the pitch. ❏ Settings: 0%, 5%, 10%, 20%, 50%, 100% At +100%, adjacent notes are pitched one semitone (100 cents) apart. ■ PchSclCN Set the basic pitch used by the PchSclSns parameter (above). ❏ Settings: C-2~G8 n You can also set this parameter by pressing the respective note on the keyboard while holding down the [ENTER] button. Large Speed of pitch change + Small – Lower range 74 Element Oscillator/Mixer/Element Pitch Center(Basic Pitch) Higher range 9-1. PEGAtkR (PEG Attack Rate) 9-2. PEGDcy1R (PEG Decay 1 Rate) 9-3. PEGDcy2R (PEG Decay 2 Rate) 9-4. PEGRelR (PEG Release Rate) You can set various Rate parameters (the time it takes for the pitch to change from one level to the next) for the Pitch Envelope Generator (PEG). Combined with the PEG Level settings below, these can be used control the change in sound from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is released (see illustration below). You can set different values for each Element. PAGE 9 PART ELEM KEY E 1 C3 OCTAVE PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE PEGDcy2R 9 E 1 00 PAGE PEGDcy1R 9 E 1 00 PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE PEGRelR PAGE 9 PART ELEM KEY E 1 00 OCTAVE You can set four Rate parameters (which control how fast the pitch changes from one Level to the next) and five Level (pitch) parameters, which control the change in pitch from the moment you press a note on the keyboard to the moment you release it. The Initial Level and Attack Rate settings determines from what pitch the note starts when it is played and the time it takes to reach the Attack Level pitch setting. The Decay 1 and 2 Rates control how long it takes for the pitch to reach the Decay 1 and 2 Levels, respectively. Finally, the Release Rate and Release Level parameters determine the final pitch that the sound goes to when a key is released and how long it takes to reach that pitch. In the illustration, the letters a - d indicate the respective Rate (R) settings for Attack - Release. The greater the value for each Rate, the faster the pitch goes to the next set Level — in other words, the time it takes for the pitch to change (between Level settings) becomes shorter. Velocity Sensitivity and other parameters can also be set if required. ❏ Settings: 0~63 Attack Decay1 Sustain Level Level Level Pitch 10-1. PEGInitL (PEG Initial Level) Initial Level Release Level Key off b 10-2. PEGAtkL (PEG Attack Level) 10-3. PEGDcy1L (PEG Decay 1 Level) a c d 10-4. PEGSusL (PEG Sustain Level) 10-5. PEGRelL (PEG Release Level) You can set various Level parameters for the Pitch Envelope Generator (PEG). Combined with the Rate settings above (PEG Atk/Dcy 1/Dcy 2/Rel R), these can be used control the change in sound from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is released (see illustration below). You can set different values for each Element. PEGInitL 10 E 1 +0000 PAGE PART ELEM KEY Time Attack Time Decay1 Decay2 Time Time Release Time PEGAtkL 10 E 1 +0000 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE OCTAVE PEGDcy1L 10 E 1 +0000 PAGE 0 PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE PEGSusL 10 E 1 +0000 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE PEGRelL 10 E 1 +0000 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: –2400~+2400 Element Pitch 75 Voice Mode PEGAtkR Pitch Envelope Generator Settings 11-1. PEGSclSns (PEG Scale Sensitivity) 12-1. PEGRtVel (PEG Rate Velocity) 11-2. PEGSclCN (PEG Scale Center Note) 12-2. PEGLvlVel (PEG Level Velocity) You can set PEG scale parameters for each Element. These parameters control the PEG speed and the degree of pitch change according to the position of the notes played on the keyboard. This determines how the Pitch Envelope Generator (PEG) responds to note velocity. PEGRtVel 12 E 1 +0 PAGE PEGSclSns 11 E 1 +0 PAGE PEGSclCN 11 E 1 C3 PART ELEM KEY PAGE Voice Mode OCTAVE ■ PEGSclSns This determines the sensitivity of the PEG Rates for each element to note position. In other words, the speed of the pitch change varies according to the range of the keyboard that is played. The PEGSclCN parameter below is used as the basic or central pitch for this parameter. A positive setting will cause slower changes for lower notes and faster changes for higher notes. A negative setting will have the opposite effect. ❏ Settings: –7~+7 ■ PEGSclCN This determines the basic or central pitch used by the PEG Scale Sensitivity parameter above. When the center note is played, the PEG behaves according to its actual settings. The pitch change characteristics for other notes will vary in proportion to the EG Rate settings. ❏ Settings: C-2~G8 n You can also set this parameter by pressing the respective note on the keyboard while holding down the [ENTER] button. Positive value + Higher range Lower range – Basic pitch Negative value + – Basic pitch 76 Element Pitch Speed of PEG pitch change Higher range Lower range OCTAVE PEGLvlVel 12 E 1 +0 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Speed of PEG pitch change PART ELEM KEY ❏ Settings: –7~+7 ■ PEGRtVel Set the velocity sensitivity of the PEG’s Rate (speed) parameters. Positive settings will cause the pitch to rised when you play the keyboard harder (for a large Velocity value). A negative setting will have the opposite effect. ■ PEGLvlVel Set the velocity sensitivity of the PEG Level. Positive settings will cause the pitch to rise the harder you play the keyboard and negative settings will cause it to fall. 13-1. Cutoff 13-2. Resonance 14-1. CutoffVel (Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity) You can set Filter parameters to change the tonal characteristics of each Element. 14-2. ResoVel (Resonance Velocity Sensitivity) Cutoff 13 E 1 0000 PAGE Resonance 13 E 1 00 PART ELEM KEY PAGE OCTAVE You can set Filter Sensitivity parameters for each Element. PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Filter is the section of the tone generator that changes the tonal qualities of a Voice by passing only a limited frequency range and cutting signals outside that range. The S03 employs an LPF (low pass filter). PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ResoVel PAGE PART ELEM KEY 14 E 1 00 OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0~15 ■ CutoffVel Set the sensitivity of the Cutoff frequency to note velocity. A positive setting will raise the Cutoff frequency for notes played harder, and lower it for notes played more softly. Level Range passed Cutoff range Frequency ■ ResoVel Set the sensitivity of the selected Resonance parameter to note velocity. A positive setting will produce large Resonance changes for notes played harder, and smaller changes for notes played more softly. Cutoff ❏ Settings: 0~2047 15. FltSclFlag (Filter Scale Flag) ■ Resonance Set the amount of Resonance (harmonic boost) applied to the signal around the Cutoff frequency. This is a useful way of adding further character to the sound. You can set the Filter Scaling type. Filter Scaling controls the filter cutoff frequency according to the positions of the notes on the keyboard. There are four Break Points in the Flt BP screen (PAGE 16) used to divide and assign different settings across the keyboard. The Levels (Offsets) at each of Break Point are set in the Flt Ofs screen (PAGE 17). Resonance n Details about Filter Scaling are given later in the section “Filter Scaling Settings” on page 78. FltSclFlag 15 E 1 brk.p PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: brk.p (applies the BP parameter settings in the ❏ Settings: 0~63 following pages), table (applies the settings which are preset for each voice) n The “table” setting is effective only for XG Voices. Element Filter 77 Voice Mode ■ Cutoff Set the Cutoff frequency of the low pass filter. Only frequencies below this point are passed. CutoffVel 14 E 1 00 16-1. Flt BP1 (Filter Scale Break Point 1) 18-1. FltSclSns (Filter Scale Sensitivity) 16-2. Flt BP2 (Filter Scale Break Point 2) 18-2. FltSclVel (Filter Scale Velocity Sensitivity) 16-3. Flt BP3 (Filter Scale Break Point 3) FltSclSns 18 E 1 00 PAGE 16-4. Flt BP4 (Filter Scale Break Point 4) Set the Break Points for each Element. BP1 to BP4 will be automatically be arranged in ascending order across the keyboard. Voice Mode Flt BP1 16 E 1 E1 PAGE PART ELEM KEY PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE OCTAVE Flt BP3 16 E 1 G4 PAGE Flt BP2 B2 16 E 1 PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Flt BP4 16 E 1 A5 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: Flt BP1~Flt BP4: C-2 ~ G8 17-1. Flt Ofs1 (Filter Scale Offset 1) 17-4. Flt Ofs4 (Filter Scale Offset 4) Set the Filter Scaling Offset Levels. These Offsets are used by the Break Points (BP1/BP2/BP3/BP4). n Details about Filter Scaling are given later in the section “Filter Scaling Settings”on page 78. PART ELEM KEY Flt Ofs3 17 E 1 +017 PAGE Flt Ofs2 17 E 1 +010 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Flt Ofs4 17 E 1 +004 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: Flt Ofs1~Flt Ofs4: –128 ~ +127 78 Element Filter ❏ Settings: 0~15 ■ FltSclSns Determines the Time Scale (the speed of change in the FEG over the range of the keyboard) for each Element. The higher the value, the slower the change for lower notes and the faster the change for higher notes. ■ FltSclVel Determines the velocity sensitivity of the FEG Level. For higher values, the more strongly you play the keys, the greater the sound change (FEG Level) becomes. 1 2 3 4 BP E1 B2 G4 A5 Ofs –4 +10 +17 +4 Here, the current Cutoff setting is 64. The Offsets are –4 at BP1 (set to note E1), +10 at BP2 (set to note B2), +17 at BP3 (set to note G4) and +4 at BP4 (set to A5). That is, the Cutoff frequencies at each Break Point are 60, 74, 81 and 68, respectively. For other notes, the Cutoff frequencies will be on the straight line connecting the two adjacent Break Points. PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE OCTAVE OCTAVE By way of example, you could set the Levels (Offsets) and Break Points (BP1 to BP4) as follows. 17-3. Flt Ofs3 (Filter Scale Offset 3) PAGE PART ELEM KEY PAGE OCTAVE Filter Scaling Settings 17-2. Flt Ofs2 (Filter Scale Offset 2) Flt Ofs1 17 E 1 -004 FltSclVel 18 E 1 00 PART ELEM KEY n The Break Point Levels are Offsets used to increase or decrease the current Cutoff setting at the specified notes. Regardless of the size of these Offsets, the minimum and maximum Cutoff limits (values of 0 and 127, respectively) cannot be exceeded. n A note set below the BP1 will become the BP1 Level. A note set above BP4 will become the BP4 Level. 19-1. FEGHoldR (FEG Hold Rate) 19-2. FEGAtkR (FEG Attack Rate) 19-3. FEGDcy1R (FEG Decay 1 Rate) 19-4. FEGDcy2R (FEG Decay 2 Rate) 19-5. FEGRelR (FEG Release Rate) You can set various Rate parameters (the time it takes to get from one Level to the next) for the Filter Envelope Generator (FEG). Combined with the FEG Level settings, these can be used control the change in sound from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is released (see illustration below). You can set different values for each Element. PAGE PART ELEM KEY PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE OCTAVE FEGDcy1R 19 E 1 000 PAGE FEGAtkR 19 E 1 127 PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE FEGDcy2R 19 E 1 000 PAGE PART ELEM KEY In the illustration, the letters a - d indicate the respective Rate (R) settings for Attack - Release. The greater the value for each Rate, the faster the filter goes to the next set Level — in other words, the time it takes for the filter to change (between Level settings) becomes shorter. Velocity Sensitivity and other parameters can also be set if required. OCTAVE Attack Decay1 Sustain Level Level Level Level FEGRelR 19 E 1 000 PAGE There are five Rate settings (controlling the speed of changes to the sound) and five Level settings (controlling the amount of filtering applied). As soon as a note is played, the filter is fixed at the Initial Level setting, and maintains that level for the length of time set in Hold Rate. The degree to which the filter changes after that is determined by the Attack Level and Decay 1 and 2 Levels; the time it takes between those changes is determined by the Attack Rate and Decay 1 and 2 Rates. When the note is released, the change in tone is determined by the Release Rate/Level settings. Initial Level PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE b ❏ Settings: 0~127 c a d 20-1. FEGInitL (FEG Initial Level) 20-2. FEGAtkL (FEG Attack Level) 20-3. FEGDcy1L (FEG Decay 1 Level) 20-4. FEGSusL (FEG Sustain Level) 20-5. FEGRelL (FEG Release Level) You can set the Level parameters for the Filter Envelope Generator (FEG). Combined with the Rate settings above (FEG Hold/Atk/Dcy1/Dcy2/Rel R), these can be used control the change in sound from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is released (see illustration below). You can set different values for each Element. FEGInitL 20 E 1 +0000 PAGE PART ELEM KEY 0 Time Attack Time Release Time You can set the FEG Scale parameters for each Element. This parameter controls the Filter Cutoff and FEG behavior according to the position of the notes played on the keyboard. n The availability of the FEG Scale parameter depends on the Break Point and Offset settings in the Flt BP/Flt Ofs PAGES above. FEGAtkL 20 E 1 +0000 PAGE Decay1 Decay2 Time Time 21. FEGSclSens (FEG Scale Sensitivity) FEGSclSens 21 E 1 00 PART ELEM KEY PAGE OCTAVE OCTAVE Release Level Key off PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE FEGDcy1L 20 E 1 +0000 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE FEGSusL 20 E 1 +0000 PAGE OCTAVE PART ELEM KEY Large Speed of AEG level change + Small FEGRelL 20 E 1 +0000 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE – ❏ Settings: –2047~+2047 Lower range Center(Basic Pitch) Higher range ❏ Settings: 0~15 Element Filter 79 Voice Mode FEGHoldR 19 E 1 127 Filter Envelope Generator Settings 22-1. FEGAtkVel (FEG Attack Velocity) 24-1. AEGInitL (AEG Initial Level) 24-2. AEGDcy1L (AEG Decay 1 Level) 22-2. FEGOthVel (FEG Other Velocity) 24-3. AEGSusL (AEG Sustain Level) You can set parameters controlling the sensitivity of the Filter Envelope Generator (FEG) to note velocity. FEGAtkVel 22 E 1 +0 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE FEGOthVel 22 E 1 +0 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Voice Mode ■ FEGAtkVel Determines the velocity sensitivity of the FEG Attack Rate. You can set various Level parameters for the Amplitude Envelope Generator (AEG). Combined with the Rate settings above (AEG Atk/Dcy 1/Dcy 2/ Rel R), these can be used control the change in output level from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is released (see illustration below). You can set different values for each Element. AEGInitL 24 E 1 255 PAGE ❏ Settings: –7~+7 PART ELEM KEY ❏ Settings: –7~+7 PART ELEM KEY PAGE OCTAVE OCTAVE ■ FEGOthVel Determines the velocity sensitivity of all FEG Rates, other than Attack Rate. AEGDcy1L 24 E 1 255 AEGSusL 24 E 1 255 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0~255 23-1. AEGAtkR (AEG Attack Rate) Amplitude Envelope Generator Settings 23-2. AEGDcy1R (AEG Decay 1 Rate) There are four Rate settings (which control how fast the volume changes from one Level to the next) and three Level settings (which control the actual volume). When you play a key, the volume goes to the Initial Level, at the speed set in Attack Rate. From there it goes to the Decay and Sustain Levels, at speeds set in Decay 1 and 2 Rates, respectively. When the note is released, the volume goes down to zero, at the speed set in Release Rate. 23-3. AEGDcy2R (AEG Decay 2 Rate) 23-4. AEGRelR (AEG Release Rate) You can set various Rate parameters (the time it takes for the volume to change from one level to the next) for the Amplitude Envelope Generator (AEG). Combined with the AEG Level settings below, these can be used control the change in output level from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is released (see illustration below). You can set different values for each Element. AEGAtkR 23 E 1 127 PAGE PART ELEM KEY PAGE AEGDcy2R 23 E 1 000 PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Attack Decay1 Sustain Level Level Level Key off Release Level PART ELEM KEY AEGRelR 23 E 1 000 PAGE Init Level PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0~127 n For example, if the AEG Release Rate is set to a small value, the sustain becomes long. 80 Volume OCTAVE OCTAVE PAGE AEGDcy1R 23 E 1 000 In the illustration below, the letters a - d indicate the respective Rate (R) settings for Attack - Release. The greater the value for each Rate, the faster the filter goes to the next set Level — in other words, the time it takes for the volume to change (between Level settings) becomes shorter. Velocity Sensitivity and other parameters can also be set if required. Element Filter/Element Amplitude 0 Time Attack Time Decay1 Decay2 Time Time Release Time 25. AEGSclSens (AEG Scale Sensitivity) 27. LvlSclFlag (AEG Level Scale Flag) This determines the AEG scaling parameters for each Element. This parameter controls the degree of the AEG according to the positions of notes on the keyboard. You can set four Amplitude Scaling Break Points for each Element. Amplitude Scaling controls the amplitude according to the positions of the notes on the keyboard. There are four Break Points used to divide and assign different settings across the keyboard. The Levels (Offsets) at each of Break Point are set in the Level Offset display (PAGE 30). n The availability of the AEG Scale parameter depends on the Break Point and Offset settings in the LvlScl display. AEGSclSens 25 E 1 00 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE n Details about Amplitude Scaling are given later in the section “Amplitude Scaling Settings” below. n The Levels of the Elements themselves are set in the Level (PAGE 3) display (page 73). ❏ Settings: 0~15 26-2. AEGAtkVel (AEG Attack Velocity Sensitivity) This determines the sensitivity of the Amplitude Envelope Generator (AEG) to note velocity. AEGLvlVel 26 E 1 00 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE AEGAtkVel 26 E 1 00 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0~15 ■ AEGLvlVel This determines the sensitivity of the AEG Level to note velocity. For higher values, the more strongly you play the keys, the greater the change in volume (AEG Level). ■ AEGAtkVel This determines the velocity sensitivity of the AEG’ Attack Rate. For higher values, the Attack Rate becomes faster the harder you play the keyboard. PAGE Voice Mode LvlSclFlag 27 E 1 brk.p 26-1. AEGLvlVel (AEG Level Velocity Sensitivity) PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: brk.p (applies the BP parameter settings in the following PAGES), table (applies the settings which are preset for each voice) 28-1. Lvl BP1 (Level Break Point 1) 28-2. Lvl BP2 (Level Break Point 2) 28-3. Lvl BP3 (Level Break Point 3) 28-4. Lvl BP4 (Level Break Point 4) Set the Break Points for each Element. BP1 to BP4 will be automatically be arranged in ascending order across the keyboard. Lvl BP1 28 E 1 C0 PAGE PART ELEM KEY Lvl BP3 28 E 1 C6 OCTAVE PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE OCTAVE PAGE Lvl BP2 28 E 1 G#0 PART ELEM KEY Lvl BP4 28 E 1 C7 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: Lvl BP1~Lvl BP4: C-2~G8 Element Amplitude 81 29-1. Lvl Ofs1 (Level Offset 1) 29-2. Lvl Ofs2 (Level Offset 2) 29-3. Lvl Ofs3 (Level Offset 3) 29-4. Lvl Ofs4 (Level Offset 4) Set the Amplitude Scaling Offset Levels. These Offsets are used by the Break Points (BP1/BP2/BP3/BP4). 30. LvlSclSens (Level Scale Sensitivity) Determines the Time Scale (how fast the volume changes across the range of the keyboard) for each Element. The higher the value, the slower the change for lower notes and the faster the change for higher notes. n Details about Amplitude Scaling are given later in the section “Amplitude Scaling Settings” below. LvlSclSens 30 E 1 00 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Lvl Ofs2 29 E 1 +000 Lvl Ofs1 29 E 1 +000 PAGE Voice Mode ❏ Settings: 0~15 OCTAVE OCTAVE Lvl Ofs3 29 E 1 +000 PAGE PART ELEM KEY PAGE PART ELEM KEY Lvl Ofs4 29 E 1 +000 PART ELEM KEY PART ELEM KEY PAGE OCTAVE OCTAVE ❏ Settings: Lvl Ofs1~Lvl Ofs4:–128~+127 31. KeyonDelay Determines the time (delay) between the moment you press a note on the keyboard and the point at which the sound is played. You can set different delay times for each Element. Amplitude Scaling Settings KeyonDelay 31 E 1 00 By way of example, you could set the Levels (Offsets) and Break Points (BP1 to 4) as follows. 1 2 3 4 BP E1 B2 G4 A5 Ofs –4 +10 +17 +4 Here, the current amplitude is 80. The Offsets are –4 at BP1 (set to note E1), +10 at BP2 (set to note B2), +17 at BP3 (set to note G4) and +4 at BP4 (set to A5). That is, the amplitudes at each Break Point are 76, 90, 97 and 84, respectively. For other notes, the amplitudes will be on the straight line connecting the two adjacent Break Points. n The Break Point Levels are Offsets used to increase or decrease the current amplitude at the specified notes. Regardless of the size of these Offsets, the minimum and maximum amplitude limits (values of 0 and 127, respectively) cannot be exceeded. n A note set below the BP1 will become the BP1 Level. A note set above BP4 will become the BP4 Level. PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0~15 32-1. LFO Wave 32-2. LFO Phase (LFO Phase Initialize) There are various settings for the LFO. The LFO is used to generate low frequency signals and can be used to create vibrato, wah, tremolo and other effects when applied to pitch/filter/amplitude/etc. parameters. For example, it can be applied simultaneously to both pitch and filter, or to specific parameters of individual Elements. LFO Wave 32 E 1 tri PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE LFO Phase 32 E 1 on PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ■ LFO Wave Determines the LFO Wave. Depending on the Wave selected, you can create different kinds of modulated sounds. The following three LFO waveforms are available. ❏ Settings: saw, tri, S&H n S&H = Adds random changes to the pitch. Tri (Triangle) waves will be applied for the LFO AMod and LFO FMod. Triangle wave is applied even if you select S&H for LFO PMod, when controlling the LFO PMod with the Modulation Wheel. 82 Element Amplitude/Element LFO 34-1. LFO PMod (LFO Pitch Modulation) saw 34-2. LFO FMod (LFO Filter Modulation) 34-3. LFO AMod (LFO Amplitude Modulation) Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform controls the pitch/filter/amplitude. tri LFO PMod 34 E 1 000 PAGE PART ELEM KEY LFO FMod 34 E 1 000 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE OCTAVE PAGE Voice Mode LFO AMod 34 E 1 000 PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE S&H ❏ Settings: 0~127 ■ LFO Phase Determines whether or not the LFO is reset each time a note is pressed. ❏ Settings: off, on 33. LFO Speed Determines the speed of the LFO waveform. A larger setting produces a faster speed. LFO Speed 33 E 1 31 PAGE OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0~63 PART ELEM KEY ■ LFO PMod Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the pitch of the sound. The larger the setting, the greater the depth of control. ■ LFO FMod Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the Filter Cutoff frequency. The larger the setting, the greater the depth of control. ■ LFO AMod Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the amplitude of the sound. A larger setting means a larger modulation depth. 35-1. PLFODelay (Pitch LFO Delay) 35-2. PLFO Fade (Pitch LFO Fade Time) PLFODelay 34 E 1 000 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE PLFO Fade 35 E 1 000 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0~127 Element LFO 83 ■ PLFODelay Determines the delay time before the LFO comes into effect. A higher value produces a longer delay time. Short Delay Drum Voices With Drum Voices, different drum and percussion sounds are assigned to notes across the keyboard (from C0 to C6), forming an entire drum kit. For editing Drum Voices, there are five Common Edit screens (affecting all the Drum Voices together) and the five Drum Key screens. When you select a Drum Voice and enter the Voice Edit mode, the Drum Voice Edit screen in which you were previously editing appears. Key on n An overview of the Drum Voices is given on page 26. Long Delay Voice Mode Drum Common Edit and Drum Key Edit Key on ■ PLFO Fade Determines the time it takes for the LFO effect to fade in (after the Delay time has elapsed). A higher value means a slower fade-in. Each Drum Voice consists of multiple Voices assigned to notes across the keyboard (C#–1 ~ G5) (page 26). You can use Drum Common Edit for settings that apply to all Drum Keys in the Drum Voice. For the settings of individual Voices, Drum Key Edit consists of Edit screens for each Wave. With Drum Voice Edit, you can use the [+]/[–] buttons to switch between the Drum Common Edit and Drum Key Edit screens. Low Fade time value Drum Common screens Drum Key screens FadeIn Max PAGE 2 StandKit OrgKt PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Level PAGE PART ELEM KEY 4 115 OCTAVE Time PAGE 2 PART ELEM KEY Drum Common indicator High Fade time value FadeIn Max Time Key on Delay 84 Element LFO PART ELEM KEY 0 OCTAVE Key on Delay PAGE OCTAVE Drum Key indicator Drum Common General (PAGES 1 to 2) For Drum Voices, there are two Common General parameters, shown below. 2. Pan Set the Pan position for each sound in a Drum Voice (Drum Kit). Pan 1. Name PAGE PART ELEM KEY 2 4 L37 OCTAVE The parameters and settings are the same as for Normal Voices. Details are given on Page 71. 2. OrgKt (Original Kit) This selects the Original Kit (the Wave set in which a different sound is assigned to each key). 2 StandKit OrgKt each time a key is played), L63 (Left) ~ C (Center) ~ R63 (Right) n The numeric keypad can also be used to enter the value, as shown below. 0: Rnd 1 ~ 63: L63 ~ L01 64: C (Center) 65 ~ 127: R01 ~ R63 PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE n The sound-to-key assignments for the Kit are fixed and cannot be changed. ❏ Settings: See the separate Data List. Drum Key Oscillator/Mix (PAGES 1 to 5) Drum Key Pitch (PAGE 6) Drum Key Filter (PAGE 7) 3. Alt.Group (Alternate Group) Determines the Alternate Group to which the Wave is assigned. In a real drum kit, some drum sounds cannot physically be played simultaneously, such as open and closed hi-hats. You can prevent different sounds from playing back simultaneously by assigning them to the same Alternate Group. Up to 127 Alternate Groups can be defined. You can also select “off” here if you wish to allow the simultaneous playback of sounds. Alt.Group 4 3 off PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Drum Key Amplitude (PAGE 8) ❏ Settings: off, 1 ~ 127 Drum Key Effect (PAGES 9 to 10) n To specify the “off” value, press the [0] button on the numeric keypad, then press the [ENTER] button. The following is an explanation of the Key Parameters used to edit each Drum Key. Each key can have its own independent settings. Select the desired Drum Key by pressing the appropriate key on the keyboard. 4. Key Assign 1. Level This can be used to adjust the output of each Drum Key. Select the desired Drum Key by pressing the appropriate key on the keyboard. Set Key Assign to “sngl” (single) to prevent the doubled playback of the same received notes. Select “multi” to consecutively assign each instance of the same received note to a separate channel. Key Assign 4 4 sngl PAGE Level PAGE PART ELEM KEY 4 OCTAVE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE 115 ❏ Settings: sngl, multi ❏ Settings: 0 ~ 127 Drum Common General/Drum Key Oscillator/Mix 85 Voice Mode PAGE ❏ Settings: Rnd (random; the pan position moves randomly 5-1. RxNoteOff (Receive Note Off) 8-1. EG Attack (EG Attack Rate) 5-2. RxNote On (Receive Note On) 8-2. EG Decay1 (EG Decay1 Rate) 8-3. EG Decay2 (EG Decay2 Rate) RxNoteOff 4 5 on PAGE PART ELEM KEY RxNote On 4 5 on PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE OCTAVE ❏ Settings: off, on ■ RxNoteOff Select whether MIDI Note Off messages are received by each Drum Key. The Amplitude Envelope Generator controls the change in amplitude from the moment a note in pressed on the keyboard to the moment it is released. These settings let you determine how fast the sound reaches its peak amplitude and how fast it fades out. Parameters can be set for each Drum Key. EG Attack 4 8 064 Voice Mode PAGE ■ RxNote On Select whether MIDI Note On messages are received by each Drum Key. PART ELEM KEY EG Decay1 4 8 064 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE OCTAVE EG Decay2 4 8 064 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE 6-1. PitchCors (Pitch Coarse) 6-2. PitchFine EG Attack EG Decay1 PitchCors 4 +00 6 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE PitchFine 4 6 +00 PAGE Decay Level PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE EG Decay 2 ❏ Settings: –64 ~ +63 ■ PitchCors Adjust the pitch of each Drum Key sound in semitones. ■ PitchFine Fine-tune the pitch of each Drum Key sound. 7-1. Cutoff 7-2. Resonance These let you apply filter settings to each Drum Key. Cutoff PAGE 7 OCTAVE PART ELEM KEY 4 064 Resonance 4 7 064 PAGE PART ELEM KEY ❏ Settings: 0 ~ 127 ■ EG Attack This determines the Attack Rate (speed) of the EG (Envelope Generator), or how long it takes for the sound of the selected drum sound to reach full volume when a note is played. Depending on the sound and the Attack Rate set, some sounds may decay before the EG has a chance to bring the sound up. In other words, setting this value too high (slow attack) may result in an unnatural sound or no sound at all. Higher values result in a shorter Attack Time. OCTAVE n The parameters are the same as for Normal Voices. Details are given on page 77. n Unlike in the editing of a Normal Voice, the available Cutoff and Resonance settings are 0 to 127. 86 Key on ■ EG Decay 1 This determines the Decay 1 Rate (speed) the EG, or how rapidly the sound dies down to the next Decay level. Higher values result in a shorter Decay time. ■ EG Decay 2 This determines the Decay 2 Rate (speed) of the EG, or how rapidly the sound dies out completely. Higher values result in a shorter Decay time. Drum Key Oscillator/Mix/Drum Key Pitch/Drum Key Filter/Drum Key Amplitude 9. ReverbSend Determines the send level of the Reverb Effect. ReverbSend 4 9 127 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE You can perform various operations (Jobs) in the Voice Job mode. For example, you can initialize Voices to their original settings (including those currently being edited) or copy Elements. n Before entering Voice Job mode and using the Initialize or Copy function, you must select the Voice for which you wish to use the operations (page 33). ❏ Settings: 0 ~ 127 10. ChorusSend Determines the send level of the Chorus Effect. PAGE OCTAVE n For details about how to enter the Voice Job mode, see page 28. Performing a Job PART ELEM KEY 1In the Voice Play mode, select the Voice Number for which you wish to perform the Job. 2Press the [JOB] button to enter the Voice Job mode. 3Use the [▼][▲] buttons and switch to the screen showing the Job you wish to perform. PAGE 1 Init voice PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE 4Use the [DEC/NO] and [INC/YES] buttons to select the parameter for which you wish to perform the Job. n This step is not applicable for the Bulk Dump Job. n Use the [+]/[–] buttons to set the destination Element or Drum Key when using Copy Element (CpyElm) or Copy Drum Key (CpyKey). 5When you press the [ENTER] button, you will be prompted for confirmation. PAGE 1 Init Sure? PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE 6Press the [INC/YES] button to confirm. A “Completed” message appears when the Job has been completed, and operation returns to the original screen. Press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel the Job. n For Jobs that take longer to process, you will see the message “Executing” during processing. If you switch off the power to your synthesizer while this message is displayed, you risk corrupting your data. 7Press the [VOICE] button to exit the Voice Job mode and return to the Voice Play mode. Drum Key Effect 87 Voice Mode ChorusSend 4 10 127 ❏ Settings: 0 ~ 127 Voice Job 1. Init (Initialize) You can reset (initialize) all parameters of a Voice to their default settings. You can also selectively initialize certain parameters, such as Common settings, settings for each Element/Drum Key, and so on. Note that this does not return the Voice to its original state prior to editing. Instead, it is useful when building a completely new Voice from scratch. 2. CpyElm (Copy Element)/ CpyKey (Copy Drum Key) This lets you copy Element/Drum Key parameter settings of the Voice being edited to another Element/ Drum Key in the same Voice. PAGE 2 CpyElm 1 elm1 PAGE PART ELEM KEY E PAGE 1 Init voice PART ELEM KEY Voice Mode OCTAVE Init PAGE 1 PART ELEM KEY (2) kit OCTAVE ■ Select Parameter Type to be Initialized Use the [DEC/NO] and [INC/YES] buttons to select the parameter to be initialized. The parameters available for initialization will vary depending on the type of Voice currently selected (Normal/Drum). ❏ Settings: Normal Voice: voice (Current Voice), cmmn (Current Common), elmnt (Current Element 1 ~ 4) n When this is set to “elmnt,” use the [+]/[–] buttons to select the desired Element (1 - 4). Drum Voice: kit (all Current Drum Voice), cmmn (data common to all Drum Keys), key (Drum Key C#-1 ~ G5) n When this is set to “key,” you can select the desired Drum Key by pressing the appropriate key on the keyboard (from C#-1 to G5). CpyKey 4 D-1 PART ELEM KEY 2 OCTAVE OCTAVE (1) (2) (1) ■ (1) Source Element/Drum Key Select the source Element/Drum Key (the data to be copied) of the Voice. ❏ Settings: Normal Voice: elm1 ~ elm4 Drum Voice: C#-1 ~ G5 (Drum Key C#-1 ~ G5) ■ (2) Destination Element/Drum Key Set the Element/Drum Key of the Voice that is to be the destination for the copy. ❏ Settings: Normal Voice: E1 ~ E4 Drum Voice: C#-1 ~ G5 (Drum Key C#-1 ~ G5) 3. BlkDmp (Bulk Dump) You can send all the parameter settings for the current Voice or all user Voices to your computer or some other external MIDI device using Bulk Dump. PAGE 3 BlkDmp Curnt PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: Curnt (Current Voice), AllUs (all user voices), Systm (All Utility and MIDI data) n To send Multi data, refer to the corresponding Bulk Dump function in the Multi Jobs (page 68). n For an application example showing how to use the Bulk Dump function, see page 42. n In order to perform a Bulk Dump, the appropriate MIDI Device Number must be set. For details, see page 93. 88 Voice Store You can store (save) your original parameter settings for up to 128 Normal Voices and 2 Drum Voices to User Memory. The procedure is as follows. n When you perform this, the settings for the destination Voice will be overwritten. Important data should always be backed up to computer, Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3 or some other storage device. 1Press the [STORE] button after editing a Voice. The Voice Store screen appears. Store PAGE PART ELEM KEY US001 OCTAVE Voice Mode 2Use [DEC/NO] and [INC/YES] buttons to select the destination Voice Number 3When you press the [ENTER] button, you will be prompted for confirmation. Store PAGE PART ELEM KEY Sure? OCTAVE 4Press the [INC/YES] button to confirm. The message “Executing” will be displayed while the Job is being processed. When it has been completed, a “Completed” message appears, and operation returns to the Voice Play mode. n You can press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel the Job. This will return you to the original screen. 89 Utility Mode The Utility mode contains eight parameter pages, including global settings for the entire S03 system, as well as certain controller settings. n For instructions on how to enter the Utility mode, see page 28. n MIDI settings are made from the MIDI mode (page 93). n Refer to the Function Tree chart (page 20) or the Parameter Table (page 22). Tone Generator (PAGE 1) Utility Mode Keyboard (PAGES 2 to 3) 3-1. Vel Curve (Velocity Curve) 3-2. Fixed Vel (Fixed Velocity) Vel Curve 3 norm PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Fixed Vel 3 off PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ■ Vel Curve Set the Velocity Curve determining how the strength of the notes played will affect the sound output. The Vel Curve parameter is only available if Fixed Velocity below is set to “off.”) Controller (PAGES 4 to 7) ❏ Settings: Effect (PAGE 8) norm (Normal) The velocity is in proportion to playing strength (how hard you play the keyboard). 1. Master Tune Volume Adjust the keyboard tuning (in 0.1 cent steps). MasterTune 1 +0000 PAGE PART ELEM KEY Keyboard playing strength OCTAVE ❏ Settings: –1024 ~ +1023 n A value of 100 cents is equal to one semitone. soft1 A softer playing style increases the volume level. This is suitable for people with a soft key touch. Volume 2. Kbd Trans (Keyboard Transpose) Transpose the pitch of the keyboard up or down (in semitones). This affects information transmitted via MIDI. Keyboard playing strength Kbd Trans 2 +00 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: –11 ~ +11 soft2 A softer playing style increases the volume level; the response is between Soft1 and Normal. Volume Keyboard playing strength 90 Tone Generator/Keyboard easy This curve is also designed to increase the volume level with a softer playing style. However, the volume level is stable in all registers since the velocity curve in the mid range is close to Normal. Volume 4-1. MWTxCtlNo (MW Transmit Control Number) 4-2. FCTxCtlNo (Foot Controller Transmit Control Number) This determines the MIDI Control Change numbers assigned to the Modulation Wheel and Foot Controller. MWTxCtlNo 4 01 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE FCTxCtlNo 4 11 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Keyboard playing strength wide A softer playing style lowers the volume level and a stronger playing style increases the volume level. This results in a wider apparent dynamic range. Volume ❏ Settings: 0 ~ 95 (0/32=off), AT (After Touch) n For details about Control Numbers and Control Change messages, see the separate Data List. 5. FSTxCtlNo (Footswitch Transmit Control Number) This determines the MIDI Control Change numbers assigned to the Footswitch. hard A stronger playing style increases the volume level. This is suitable for people with a strong key touch. Volume FSTxCtlNo 5 64 PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0 ~ 95 (0/32=off), 96 (PCInc: Program Change INC), 97 (PCDec: Program Change DEC) n For details about Control Numbers and Control Change messages, see the separate Data List. n The default factory setting for this is to control sustain (64). Keyboard playing strength 6. Ctl Reset (Controller Reset) ■ Fixed Vel The velocity is fixed at this setting. The sound output is always the same, regardless of how strongly or softly you play the keyboard. Select whether or not the controller (Modulation Wheel, Foot Controller) state/position is maintained (“hold”) or reset when you switch between Voices. ❏ Settings: off, 1 ~ 127 Ctl Reset 6 reset PAGE Volume PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: hold, reset If you select “reset,” the controllers will be reset to the following states/positions: Keyboard playing strength Pitch Bend Modulation Wheel Foot Controller Foot Switch Center Minimum Maximum Off Keyboard/Controller 91 Utility Mode Keyboard playing strength 7. AC1 CC No (AC1 Control Change Number) In the Voice mode, this determines which Control Change number is assigned to the AC1 (Assignable Controller 1). AC1 CC No 7 00 PAGE In the Utility Job mode, you can restore your synthesizer’s factory default settings of the S03 (Factory Set). PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 0~95 n For details about Assignable Controller 1, see page 66. Utility Mode Utility Job Factory Set (Restore Factory Defaults) n The AC1 CC No parameter in the Multi mode is set in the Multi Part Edit mode (page 66). This lets you restore the synthesizer’s default Internal Voices (User Memory) and Multis, as well as its System and other settings. 8. V EfBypass (Voice Effect Bypass) Once you edit any settings, the corresponding factory defaults will be overwritten and lost. This determines whether or not effects in the Voice Mode can be bypassed. Only System effects can be bypassed. Use the procedure below to restore the factory default settings. V EfBypass 8 off PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: off (not bypassed), on When you restore the factory default settings, all the current settings for the all the Multis and User Voices will be overwritten with the factory defaults. Make sure you are not overwriting any important data. You should back up any important data to your computer or to some external device beforehand. 1Press the [JOB] button in Utility Mode. The Factory Set display appears. MODE MULTI VOICE DEMO FactorySet UTILITY MIDI PAGE PART ELEM KEY 1 OCTAVE EDIT JOB STORE COMPARE 2Press the [ENTER] button. A confirmation message appears. 3Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Factory Set job. After the job has been completed, a “Completed!” message appears. To cancel a job while it is being executed, press the [DEC/NO] button. 4Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Utility mode. 92 Controller/Effect MIDI Mode The MIDI mode contains seven parameter pages, including global settings for the entire S03 system, as well as certain controller settings. Local On/Off — When Connected to a Computer MIDI Filter (PAGES 5 to 7) When connecting the S03 to a computer, the keyboard performance data is generally sent to the computer, and then returned from the computer to play the tone generator or sound source. If the Local Switch is set to “on,” a “double” sound may result, since the tone generator is receiving performance data from both the keyboard directly and the computer. Use the setting suggestions below as a guideline; specific instructions may differ depending on your computer and the software used. 1. Device No (Device Number) When MIDI “Echo” is enabled on the software/ computer, set the S03 Local Switch to “off.” n For instructions on how to enter the MIDI mode, see page 28. n Refer to the Function Tree chart (page 20) or the Parameter Table (page 22). MIDI Channel (PAGES 1 to 4) This determines the MIDI Device Number. This number must match the Device Number of the external MIDI device when transmitting/receiving bulk data, parameter changes or other system exclusive messages to/from it. If you set Local to “off,” the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the synthesizer’s tone generator section so that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers. However, the data will be transmitted through the MIDI OUT. Also, the tone generator section will respond to messages received at the MIDI IN. PART ELEM KEY Echo Back On When MIDI “Echo” is disabled on the software/ computer, set the S03 Local Switch to “on.” TO HOST OUT Keyborad Computer with Application Software IN Local On OCTAVE S03 Local Sw=on External MIDI Device MIDI IN MIDI OUT Keyboard Local Off IN n When transmitting or receiving System Exclusive data (such as with the Bulk Dump function, pages 68 and 88), use the setting example below, making sure that MIDI “Echo” on the computer software is set to “off.” Tone Generator Local Sw 2 on Tone Generator OUT Echo Back Off n Although not indicated in the illustration above, the S03 actually receives and responds to MIDI data from the computer application (sequencer), regardless of the Local Sw setting on the S03. * MIDI “Echo” is a function on sequencers that takes any data received via the MIDI IN and “echoes” it (or sends it as is) through the MIDI OUT. In some software, this function is also called “MIDI Thru.” n Refer to the owner’s manual of your particular software for specific instructions. MIDI Channel 93 MIDI Mode 2. Local Sw (Local On/Off Switch) MIDI OUT MIDI IN Computer with Application Software S03 Local Sw=off ❏ Settings: 1 ~ 16, all, off ❏ Settings: off, on Keyborad Local Off PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE PAGE TO HOST OUT Tone Generator Device No 1 all PAGE IN 3. Rcv Ch (Voice Mode MIDI Receive Channel) 6-1. TxPgmChng (Transmit Program Change On/Off) Set the MIDI Receive channel for using the S03 (in the Voice mode) with an external sequencer, computer and so on, and for using it as a MIDI tone generator. 6-2. TxBankSel (Transmit Bank Select On/Off) Rcv Ch 3 omni PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE Determines whether Program Change/Bank Select messages executed from the S03’s panel are transmitted via MIDI or not. Set this to “on” when you want to change programs on a connected MIDI device. ❏ Settings: 1 ~ 16, omni (all channels) n For information on setting the MIDI Receive channel for each Part in the Multi mode, see page 61. TxPgmChng 6 on PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE PAGE ❏ Settings: off (disable), on (enable) Set the MIDI Transmit channel for transmitting MIDI from the keyboard, controllers and so on. 7. Thru Port PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 1 ~ 16 You can connect the S03 to a computer via a dedicated serial cable on the TO HOST connector. In this situation, MIDI messages received via the TO HOST connector can be passed through the MIDI OUT connector of the S03 to other connected devices. Set the port number here. 5-1. RxPgmChng (Receive Program Change On/Off) 5-2. RxBankSel (Receive Bank Select On/Off) Set to enable or disable reception of Program Change/ Bank Select messages between the S03 and an external MIDI device. RxPgmChng 5 off PAGE PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE RxBankSel 5 on PAGE OCTAVE ❏ Settings: off (disable), on (enable) 94 MIDI Channel/MIDI Filter PART ELEM KEY PART ELEM KEY OCTAVE 4. Trans Ch (MIDI Transmit Channel) Trans Ch 4 01 MIDI Mode TxBankSel 6 on Thru Port 7 1 PAGE OCTAVE ❏ Settings: 1 ~ 8 PART ELEM KEY Appendix About MIDI MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages. The S03 can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and various types of controller data. The S03 can be controlled by the incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine tone generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices and effects, change parameter values, and of course play the voices specified for the various Parts. Many MIDI messages are expressed in hexadecimal or binary numbers. Hexadecimal numbers may include the letter “H” as a suffix. The letter “n” indicates a certain whole number. The chart below lists the corresponding decimal number for each hexadecimal/binary number. Binary 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0010 0000 0011 0000 0100 0000 0101 0000 0110 0000 0111 0000 1000 0000 1001 0000 1010 0000 1011 0000 1100 0000 1101 0000 1110 0000 1111 0001 0000 0001 0001 0001 0010 0001 0011 0001 0100 0001 0101 0001 0110 0001 0111 0001 1000 0001 1001 0001 1010 0001 1011 0001 1100 0001 1101 0001 1110 0001 1111 0010 0000 0010 0001 0010 0010 0010 0011 0010 0100 0010 0101 0010 0110 0010 0111 0010 1000 0010 1001 0010 1010 0010 1011 0010 1100 0010 1101 0010 1110 0010 1111 0011 0000 0011 0001 0011 0010 0011 0011 0011 0100 0011 0101 0011 0110 0011 0111 0011 1000 0011 1001 0011 1010 0011 1011 0011 1100 0011 1101 0011 1110 0011 1111 Decimal Hexadecimal 64 40 65 41 66 42 67 43 68 44 69 45 70 46 71 47 72 48 73 49 74 4A 75 4B 76 4C 77 4D 78 4E 79 4F 80 50 81 51 82 52 83 53 84 54 85 55 86 56 87 57 88 58 89 59 90 5A 91 5B 92 5C 93 5D 94 5E 95 5F 96 60 97 61 98 62 99 63 100 64 101 65 102 66 103 67 104 68 105 69 106 6A 107 6B 108 6C 109 6D 110 6E 111 6F 112 70 113 71 114 72 115 73 116 74 117 75 118 76 119 77 120 78 121 79 122 7A 123 7B 124 7C 125 7D 126 7E 127 7F Binary 0100 0000 0100 0001 0100 0010 0100 0011 0100 0100 0100 0101 0100 0110 0100 0111 0100 1000 0100 1001 0100 1010 0100 1011 0100 1100 0100 1101 0100 1110 0100 1111 0101 0000 0101 0001 0101 0010 0101 0011 0101 0100 0101 0101 0101 0110 0101 0111 0101 1000 0101 1001 0101 1010 0101 1011 0101 1100 0101 1101 0101 1110 0101 1111 0110 0000 0110 0001 0110 0010 0110 0011 0110 0100 0110 0101 0110 0110 0110 0111 0110 1000 0110 1001 0110 1010 0110 1011 0110 1100 0110 1101 0110 1110 0110 1111 0111 0000 0111 0001 0111 0010 0111 0011 0111 0100 0111 0101 0111 0110 0111 0111 0111 1000 0111 1001 0111 1010 0111 1011 0111 1100 0111 1101 0111 1110 0111 1111 MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 - 16, the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable. Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a specific channel. Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired program. Weather Report News 1 2 News 2 MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument. MIDI cable MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2 The S03 is a fully multi-timbral tone generator, allowing you to sound several different instrument parts simultaneously — from just the S03 — by assigning a different MIDI channel to each part. 95 Appendix Decimal Hexadecimal 0 00 1 01 2 02 3 03 4 04 5 05 6 06 7 07 8 08 9 09 10 0A 11 0B 12 0C 13 0D 14 0E 15 0F 16 10 17 11 18 12 19 13 20 14 21 15 22 16 23 17 24 18 25 19 26 1A 27 1B 28 1C 29 1D 30 1E 31 1F 32 20 33 21 34 22 35 23 36 24 37 25 38 26 39 27 40 28 41 29 42 2A 43 2B 44 2C 45 2D 46 2E 47 2F 48 30 49 31 50 32 51 33 52 34 53 35 54 36 55 37 56 38 57 39 58 3A 59 3B 60 3C 61 3D 62 3E 63 3F MIDI channels MIDI Messages Transmitted/ Received by the S03 MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages. Below is an explanation of the various types of MIDI messages which the S03 can receive/transmit. CHANNEL MESSAGES Channel messages are the data related to the performance on the keyboard for the specific channel. ■ Note On/Note Off (Key On/Key Off) Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Reception note range = C-2 (0) - G8 (127), C3 = 60 Velocity range = 1 - 127 (Only the Note On velocity is received) Note On: Generated when a key is pressed. Note Off: Generated when a key is released. Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is struck. ■ Control Change Control Change messages let you select a voice bank, control volume, panning, modulation, portamento time, brightness and various other controller parameters, through specific Control Change numbers which correspond to each of the various parameters. Appendix Bank Select MSB (Control #000) Bank Select LSB (Control #032) Messages which select variation voice bank numbers by combining and sending the MSB and LSB from an external device. MSB and LSB functions differently depending on the tone generator mode. MSB numbers select voice type (Normal Voice or Drum Voice), and LSB numbers select voice banks. (For more information about Banks and Programs, see Voice List in the “Data List” book.) A new bank selection will not become effective until the next Program Change message is received. Modulation (Control #001) Messages which control vibrato depth using the Modulation Wheel. Setting the value to 127 produces maximum vibrato and 0 results in vibrato off. Portamento Time (Control #005) Messages which control the duration of portamento, or a continuous pitch glide between successively played notes. When the parameter Portamento Switch (page 96) is set to on, the value set here can adjust the speed of pitch change. Setting the value to 127 produces maximum portamento time and 0 results in minimum portamento time. Data Entry MSB (Control #006) Data Entry LSB (Control #038) Messages which set the value for the parameter specified by 1.2.23RPN MSB/LSB and 1.2.22 NRPN MSB/LSB. Parameter value is determined by combining MSB and LSB. Main Volume (Control #007) Messages which control the volume of each Part. Setting the value to 127 produces maximum volume and 0 results in volume off. Pan (Control #010) Messages which control the stereo panning position of each Part (for stereo output). Setting the value to 127 positions the sound to the far right and 0 positions the sound to the far left. Expression (Control #011) Messages which control intonation expression of each Part during performance. Setting the value to 127 produces maximum volume and 0 results in volume off. Hold1 (Control #064) Messages which control sustain on/off. Setting the value between 64 - 127 turns the sustain on, between 0 - 63 turns the sustain off. Portamento Switch (Control #065) Messages which control portamento on/off. Setting the value between 64 -127 turns the portamento on, between 0 - 63 turns the portamento off. Sostenuto (Control #066) Messages which control sostenuto on/off. Holding specific notes and then pressing and holding the sostenuto pedal will sustain those notes as you play subsequent notes, until the pedal is released. Setting the value between 64 -127 turns the sostenuto on, between 0 - 63 turns the sostenuto off. Soft Pedal (Control #067) Messages which control soft pedal on/off. Notes played while holding the soft pedal will be dampened. Setting the value between 64 -127 turns the soft pedal on, between 0 - 63 turns the soft pedal off. 96 Harmonic Content (Control #071) Messages which adjust the filter resonance set for each voice. The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or subtracted from the voice data. Higher values will result in a more characteristic, resonant sound. Depending on the voice, the effective range may be narrower than the range available for adjustment. Release Time (Control #072) Messages which adjust the EG release time set for each voice. The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or subtracted from the voice data. Attack Time (Control #073) Messages which adjust the EG attack time set for each voice. The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or subtracted from the voice data. Brightness (Control #074) Messages which adjust the filter cutoff frequency set for each voice. The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or subtracted from the voice data. Lower values will result in a softer sound. Depending on the voice, the effective range may be narrower than the range available for adjustment. Portamento Control (Control #084) 90H 3CH 7FH ......... C3 Note on B0H 54H 3CH ......... Source key number set to C3 90H 48H 7FH.......... C4 Note on (When C4 is on, C3 is raised by a portamento to C4.) Effect1 Depth (Reverb Send Level) (Control #091) Messages which adjust the send level for the Reverb effect. Effect3 Depth (Chorus Send Level) (Control #093) Messages which adjust the send level for the Variation effect. If Variation effect uses System effect, this message sets the send level for the Variation effect. If it uses Insertion effect, this setting is invalid. Data Increment (Control #096) Decrement (Control #097) for RPN Messages which increase or decrease the MSB value of pitch bend sensitivity, fine tune, or coarse tune in steps of 1. You are required to assign one of those parameters using the RPN in the external device in advance. The data byte is ignored. When the maximum value or minimum value is reached, the value will not be incremented or decremented further. (Incrementing the fine tune will not cause the coarse tune to be incremented.) NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter Number) LSB (Control #098) NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter Number) MSB (Control #099) Messages which adjust a voice’s vibrato, filter, EG, drum setup or other parameter settings. First send the NRPN MSB and NRPN LSB to specify the parameter which is to be controlled. Then use Data Entry (page 96) to set the value of the specified parameter. Note that once the NRPN has been set for a channel, subsequent data entry will be recognized as the same NRPN’s value change. Therefore, after you use the NRPN, you should set a Null (7FH, 7FH) value to avoid an unexpected result. The following NRPN numbers can be received. NRPN MSB 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1C 1D 1E 1F NRPN LSB 08 09 0A 20 21 63 64 66 rr rr rr rr rr rr rr rr rr rr rr PARAMETER Vibrato Rate Vibrato Depth Vibrato Delay Filter Cutoff Frequency Filter Resonance EG Attack Time EG Decay Time EG Release Time Drum Filter Cutoff Frequency Drum Filter Resonance Drum EG Attack Rate Drum EG Decay Rate Drum Instrument Pitch Coarse Drum Instrument Pitch Fine Drum Instrument Level Drum Instrument Panpot Drum Instrument Reverb Send Level Drum Instrument Chorus Send Level Drum Instrument Variation Send Level Appendix Messages which apply a portamento between the currently-sounding note and the subsequent note. Portamento Control is transmitted specifying the note-on key of the currently-sounding note. Specify a Portamento Source Key number between 0 127. When a Portamento Control message is received, the currently sounding pitch will change with a Portamento Time of 0 to the next note-on key on the same channel. For example, the following settings would apply a portamento from note C3 to C4. Effect4 Depth (Variation Effect Send Level) (Control #094) *rr=Note number for each drum voice instrument. Messages which adjust the send level for the Chorus effect. 97 RPN (Registered Parameter Number)LSB (Control #100) RPN (Registered Parameter Number)MSB (Control #101) Messages which offset, or add or subtract values from a Part’s pitch bend sensitivity, tuning, or other parameter settings. First send the RPN MSB and RPN LSB to specify the parameter which is to be controlled. Then use Data Increment/Decrement (page 97) to set the value of the specified parameter. Note that once the RPN has been set for a channel, subsequent data entry will be recognized as the same RPN’s value change. Therefore after you use the RPN, you should set a Null (7FH, 7FH) value to avoid an unexpected result. The following RPN numbers can be received. RPN MSB 00 00 00 7F RPN LSB 00 01 02 7F PARAMETER Pitch Bend Sensitivity Fine Tune Coarse Tune Null ■ Channel Mode Messages The following Channel Mode Messages can be received. 2nd BYTE 3rd BYTE 120 0 121 0 123 0 126 0 ~ 16 127 0 MESSAGE All Sounds Off Reset All Controllers All Notes Off Mono Poly All Sounds Off (Control #120) Appendix Clears all sounds currently sounding on the specified channel. However, the status of channel messages such as Note On and Hold On is maintained. Reset All Controllers (Control #121) The values of the following controllers will be reset to the defaults. CONTROLLER Pitch Bend Change Aftertouch Polyphonic Aftertouch Modulation Expression Hold1 Portamento Sostenuto Soft Pedal Portamento Control RPN NRPN 98 VALUE 0 (center) 0 (off) 0 (off) 0 (off) 127 (max) 0 (off) 0 (off) 0 (off) 0 (off) Cancels the Portamento source key number Number not specified; internal data will not change Number not specified; internal data will not change All Notes Off (Control #123) Clears all notes currently on for the specified channel. However, if Hold1 or Sostenuto is on, notes will continue sounding until these are turned off. Mono (Control #126) Performs the same function as when an All Sounds Off message is received, and if the 3rd byte (mono number) is in the range of 0 - 16, sets the corresponding channel to Mono Mode (Mode 4 : m = 1). Poly (Control #127) Performs the same function as when an All Sounds Off message is received, and sets the corresponding channel to Poly Mode. ■ Program Change Messages which determine which voice to select for each Part. With a combination of Bank Select, you can select not only basic voice numbers, but also variation voice bank numbers. ■ Channel Aftertouch Messages which let you control the sounds by the pressure you apply to the keys after the initial striking of the keys, over the entire channel. The S03 does not transmit this data from the keyboard; however, the S03 does properly respond to this data when received from an external device. ■ Polyphonic Aftertouch Messages which let you control the sounds by the pressure you apply to the keys after the initial striking of the keys, for each individual key. The S03 does not transmit this data from the keyboard; however, the S03 does properly respond to this data when received from an external device. ■ Pitch Bend Pitch Bend messages are continuous controller messages that allow the pitch of designated notes to be raised or lowered by a specified amount over a specified duration. SYSTEM MESSAGES System messages are the data related to the overall system of the device. ■ System Exclusive Messages System Exclusive messages control various functions of the S03, including master volume and master tuning, tone generator mode, effect type and various other parameters. ■ Active Sensing (Receive only) Once FE (Active Sensing) has been received, if no MIDI data is subsequently received for longer than an interval of approximately 300msec, the S03 will perform the same function as when All Sounds Off, All Notes Off, and Reset All Controllers messages are received, and will then return to a status in which FE is not monitored. Refer to the MIDI Data Format in the “Data List” book for more information on the various messages. General MIDI Mode On When General MIDI mode on is received, the tone generator mode will be changed to XG mode. When this happens, the S03 will receive the MIDI messages which are compatible with GM System Level 1, and consequently will not receive NRPN and Bank Select messages. Since approximately 50ms is required to execute this message, be sure to leave an appropriate interval before the subsequent message. The S03 responds to this message only when it is set to the Multi mode. F0 7E 7F 09 01 F7 (Hexadecimal) Master Volume When received, the Volume MSB will be effective for the System Parameter. F0 7F 7F 04 01 ll mm F7 (Hexadecimal) * mm(MSB) = appropriate volume value, ll(LSB) = ignored XG System On Appendix When this data is received, the S03 will switch to XG mode and all the parameters will be initialized accordingly, and XG-compatible messages such as NRPN and Bank Select messages can be received. Since approximately 50ms is required to execute this message, be sure to leave an appropriate interval before the subsequent message. The S03 responds to this message only when it is set to the Multi mode. F0 43 1n 4C 00 00 7E 00 F7 (Hexadecimal) *n = device number (normally set to “0”) Multi Mode On F0 43 1n 6C 0A 00 00 01 F7 (Hexadecimal) *n = device number (normally set to “0”) n There are some operating conditions in which the S03 does not respond to MIDI data, such as when using the Compare function or when in the Demo mode. 99 Display Messages Message Meaning Bulk Tx... ...................MIDI Bulk data being transmitted. Bulk Rx... ...................MIDI Bulk data being received. Executing ...................Operation is being executed. Completed!.................Operation has been completed. !Buff Full....................Failed to process the MIDI data because too much data was received at once. !MIDI Data ................Error occurred when receiving MIDI data. !Checksum .................Error occurred when receiving bulk data. !DeviceNum...............Bulk data cannot be transmitted/received because the device number does not match or is set to “off.” Sure?...........................Final confirmation. Host:MIDI..................HOST SELECT switch has been set to “MIDI.” Host:PC2 ....................HOST SELECT switch has been set to “PC2.” Appendix Host:Mac....................HOST SELECT switch has been set to “Mac.” Host:off ......................HOST SELECT switch has been set to “off.” !BatteryLo ..................The memory-backup battery is low; memory cannot be backed up. Store the necessary data to a MIDI data storage device such as Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3, and have the battery changed by your local Yamaha dealer or any other authorized Yamaha service personnel. 100 Troubleshooting The following table provides troubleshooting hints and page references for some common problems. Most problems may be simply the result of incorrect settings. Before calling for professional service, refer to the troubleshooting advice below to see if you can find and correct the cause of the problem. In particular, when you have trouble getting sound out of the S03, check the points below as you try to pinpoint the cause of the trouble. 1 Connect a set of headphones to check whether the S03 is properly producing sound. If you can hear the sound in the headphones but not from your connected audio system, you can assume that the problem is in the cable connections to the audio system. 2 If no sound can be heard through the headphones, try selecting different Voices or Multis to see whether the problem persists or not. If selecting another Voice or Multi clears up the problem, you can assume that the settings of the original Voice or Multi were at fault. n When song data settings, such as volume or expression (page 96) cause a decrease in volume, selecting a different Voice or Multi will restore the volume. 3 If the problem still persists even after changing the Voice or Multi, check the master volume setting of the S03. Increase the volume with the VOLUME slider and, if a foot controller is connected, press it down to the maximum. 4 If still no sound is output after step 3 above, the problem may be in the global settings of the S03 (UTILITY/MIDI), the settings of any connected MIDI device, and/or the connecting MIDI cable. No sound. Relevant Volume Settings ● Is the volume set appropriately? (Pages 8 and 15) ● With the S03, if a Foot Controller has been connected to the FOOT CONTROLLER jack and set up for volume/ expression control, has it been fully depressed? (Page 14) Appendix Relevant Voice and Multi Settings ● Have the Volume or Level parameters below been set appropriately? Voice Element Edit “Level” (Page 73) Voice Key Edit “Level” (Page 85) Voice Common Edit “Total Vol” (Page 71) Voice Common Edit “Total Lvl” (Page 71) Multi Part Edit “Volume” (Page 60) Multi Common Edit “Total Vol” (Page 56) ● Are any of the Parts or Elements muted? (Pages 48 and 55) ● Has the “Element Sw” been set to off? (Page 73) ● Have the filters been set so that almost all the sound is muted? (Pages 63, 77, 86) ● Have the effects parameters been set appropriately? (Pages 56, 67, 72) ● Has the effect type been set to something other than “No Effect”? (Pages 56 and 57) ● Have the Velocity Sensitivity parameters been set appropriately? (Pages 62 and 72) ● Have the Note Limit (Part/Voice) and Velocity Limit parameters been set appropriately? (Pages 60 and 73) If Note/Velocity Limit Low is set to a value above Note/Velocity Limit High, no sound is output. 101 Relevant Global Settings of the S03 (UTILITY or MIDI) ● Have the MIDI receive channels been set correctly? (Pages 61 and 94) ● Has the Local switch been set to off? (Page 93) ● Has the HOST SELECT switch (page 10) been set appropriately? (Pages 12 to 14) ● Is either the Demo mode (page 16) or the Compare function (pages 55 and 70) active? When either of these are active, incoming MIDI data is ignored. Relevant Settings in the Song Data and on Connected MIDI Devices ● When playing Multis using an external MIDI sequencer, have the transmit channels for each sequencer track and the receive channels for each Part in the Multi been set correctly? (Page 61) ● Has the computer’s “MIDI Echo” or “MIDI Thru” been set appropriately? (Page 93) ● When playing back a song using an external MIDI sequencer, have the volume and expression (page 96) parameters been set appropriately? Cable and Connection Problems ● Has the audio equipment been connected correctly? (Page 11) ● Is the MIDI cable intact and connected properly? The sound is distorted. ● Have the effects been set appropriately? (Pages 56 and 72) ● Has the volume been set too high? (Pages 8 and 15) The sound is too soft. ● Has MIDI volume or MIDI expression (page 96) been set too low? ● Has the filter cutoff frequency been set too low? (Pages 63, 77, 86) Appendix The pitch is wrong. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Has the Master Tune parameter in Utility Mode been set correctly? (Page 90) Has the KbdTrans parameter in Utility Mode been set correctly? (Page 90) Is the Octave Up/Down setting appropriate? (Page 36) Have the pitch related parameters in PITCH menu been set appropriately? (Page 74) Has the Pitch Modulation Depth in the LFO screen (Voice Edit Mode) been set too high? (Page 83) For Parts or Voices, has the Note Shift parameter been set to a value other than 0? (Pages 61 and 74) Has the Detune parameter for each Part or Voice been set to a value other than 0? (Pages 61 and 74) 102 Sound is choppy and intermittent. ● Has the maximum polyphony been exceeded? (Page 18) Only one note sounds at a time. ● Has the Mono/Poly parameter been set to “mono”? (Pages 61 and 71) No effects are applied. ● ● ● ● Has the V EfBypass (Voice Effect Bypass) been set to off? (Page 92) In the case of a Multi, has Var Send in Part Edit been set to off or a value too close to 0? (Page 67) Has the effect type been set to something other than “Thru” or “No Effect” ? (Pages 56 and 57) In the case of a Multi, have the Insertion Effect Parts been specified? (Page 67) Edits related to Scale Sensitivity, Velocity Sensitivity and Scale (of Pan setting parameter) made to the Voice have no effect. ● Depending on the selected Voice or the settings of related parameters, changes to these parameters may have little or no audible effect. Cannot find the Drum Voice. ● Drum Voices are selected differently than Normal Voices. (Page 34) Edits made to the Drum Voice have no effect. ● Has the Part Mode parameter been set correctly? (Page 61) Editing can’t be done. Appendix ● Has the Category Search function been turned on? If Category Search is active, the Edit Mode can’t be enabled. (Page 35) ● Have you selected a Wave (001 - 029) whose parameter settings are fixed? (Page 73) ● Is the Utility mode or MIDI mode active? ● For the Voice mode, are you attempting to edit? Remember that Chorus and Reverb effect settings are fixed for the Voices and cannot be changed. (Page 54) 103 Cannot receive bulk data. ● Has the Device Number parameter been set correctly? When receiving data with the S03’s Bulk Dump function, you must set the S03 to the same device number as that specified on the transmitting device. (Page 93) ● Has the HOST SELECT switch (page 10) been set appropriately? (Pages 12 to 14) Cannot properly receive or respond to data from the connected device. ● Has the HOST SELECT switch (page 10) been set appropriately? (Pages 12 to 14) ● Is either the Demo mode (page 16) or the Compare function (pages 55 and 70) active? When either of these are active, incoming MIDI data is ignored. ● Is the MIDI cable intact and connected properly? Checking the MIDI Cable Here’s a quick way to check a MIDI cable, to make sure it’s properly conducting signals. n Before starting this, set the S03 to Voice mode and make sure that the S03 is properly outputting sound when you play the keyboard. 1 Disable keyboard control over the tone generator by setting Local Sw (PAGE 2 in the MIDI mode) to “off.” In this condition, playing the keyboard does not produce any sound. (Page 93) 2 Directly connect the MIDI cable in question — one end to the MIDI IN terminal of the S03, the other to the MIDI OUT. This sets up an external MIDI “loop,” routing the keyboard of the S03 to its tone generator, by way of the MIDI cable (and not by Local Switch). 3 Set the HOST SELECT switch on the rear panel to “MIDI.” (Page 10) 4 Set the Receive Channel parameter (PAGE 3 in the MIDI mode) to “omni” (all channels). This allows the Voice to respond to the incoming MIDI data, regardless of the MIDI Transmit Channel setting for the keyboard. 5 Play the keyboard. If you’ve made all the above settings correctly and you hear the Voice, the MIDI cable is intact. Appendix n Keep in mind that the cable or connections could still be faulty, even if you hear sound — especially if the sound is intermittent or cuts in and out. n After conducting this check, make sure to reset the Local Sw (PAGE 2 in the MIDI mode) to “on,” if necessary. If you leave this set to “off,” the S03 keyboard will not control its own sounds. 104 Specifications KEYBOARD 61 keys with Initial Touch TONE GENERATOR AWM2 POLYPHONY 64 notes MULTI TIMBRE 16 VOICE Normal Voice Preset User XG 128 128 480 Drum Voice User XG 2 20 (including 8 Original Voices) User 32 MULTI EFFECT Reverb Chorus Variation 11 11 42 CONTROLS STANDBY/ON, HOST SELECT, VOLUME, Pitch Bend, Modulation, MULTI, VOICE, DEMO, UTILITY, MIDI, EDIT/COMPARE, JOB, STORE, EXIT, E/F, ▲ / ▼, PART (ELEMENT/KEY) –/+, MUTE, OCTOVE UP/ DOWN, INC/YES, DEC/NO, PRESET, USER, XG/GM, CATEGORY SEARCH, Numeric Keypad, ENTER CONNECTORS & TERMINALS PHONES (Stereo Phone), OUTPUT (Phone): L (MONO)/R, DC IN, FOOT CONTROLLER, FOOT SWITCH, TO HOST, MIDI IN/OUT/THRU DISPLAY LCD (Back Lit) POWER SUPPLY Yamaha AC adaptor PA-3C (included)* * May not be included in your area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. 7W (120V), 7.5W (230V) MAXIMUM OUTPUT LEVEL OUTPUT: +9 ±2dbm (10k ohms), PHONES: +0 ±2dbm (33 ohms) DIMENSIONS 976 (W) x 285 (D) x 87 (H) mm WEIGHT 6kg Appendix POWER CONSUMPTION Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. 105 Index Symbols C D [+]/[–] buttons (The Controls & Connectors) .................................8 [+]/[–] buttons (Basic Operations) ................................................30 [ ▲ ]/[ ▼ ] buttons (Basic Operations) .........................................30 [ ▲ ]/[ ▼ ] buttons (The Controls & Connectors) ..........................9 [E]/[F] buttons (Basic Operations) ......................................30 [E]/[F] buttons (The Controls & Connectors) .......................9 Category .......................................................................................71 Category Search (Using Voice Category Search) ........................35 [CATEGORY SEARCH/DRUM] button ......................................9 Cho Return (Chorus Return) ........................................................57 ChoEF (Chorus Effect Type) .......................................................57 Chorus Effect Type ......................................................................57 Chorus Pan ...................................................................................57 Chorus Parameters ........................................................................57 Chorus Return ..............................................................................57 Chorus Section .............................................................................53 ChorusSend (Drum Voice) ...........................................................87 ChorusSend (Multi) ......................................................................66 ChorusSend (Normal Voice) ........................................................72 Common Controller (Basics) .......................................................49 Common Controller (Reference) ..................................................71 Common Edit and Editing Individual Elements ..........................48 Common Edit and Editing Individual Parts .................................55 Common Effect (Basics) ..............................................................49 Common Effect (Multi) ................................................................56 Common Effect (Voice) ...............................................................71 Common General (Basics) ...........................................................49 Common General (Multi) .............................................................56 Common General (Voice) ............................................................71 Compare Function (Multi Mode) .................................................55 Compare Function (Voice Mode) ................................................70 Connecting Controllers ................................................................14 Connecting External MIDI Equipment ........................................12 Connecting to a Personal Computer .............................................13 Connecting to External Audio Equipment ...................................11 Connections ..................................................................................11 Connectors ......................................................................................8 CONTROLLER (Common Controller) (Basics) .........................49 Controller (Overview of the S03) .................................................17 Controller (Utility) .......................................................................90 Controller Reset ............................................................................91 Controllers and External MIDI Control .......................................44 Controls & Connectors ...................................................................8 Copy Controller ............................................................................68 Copy Drum Key ...........................................................................88 Copy Element ...............................................................................88 Copy Part ......................................................................................68 Copy Variation Effect ..................................................................68 CpyCtl (Copy Controller) .............................................................68 CpyElm (Copy Element) ..............................................................88 CpyKey (Copy Drum Key) ..........................................................88 CpyPart (Copy Part) .....................................................................68 CpyVar (Copy Variation Effect) ..................................................68 Ctl Reset (Controller Reset) .........................................................91 Cutoff (Drum Voice) ....................................................................86 Cutoff (Multi) ...............................................................................63 Cutoff (Normal Voice) .................................................................77 Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity ...........................................................77 CutoffVel (Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity) .......................................77 DATA buttons ................................................................................ 9 DC IN terminal ............................................................................. 10 [DEC/NO] button (Basic Operations) .......................................... 31 [DEC/NO] button (The Controls & Connectors) ........................... 9 Decay Time .................................................................................. 63 Decay Tm (Decay Time) .............................................................. 63 Decimal ........................................................................................ 95 DEMO Mode ................................................................................ 19 Demo Mode (Selecting a Mode) .................................................. 29 Demo Playback ............................................................................ 16 Demo Song Selection ................................................................... 16 Detune (Multi) .............................................................................. 61 Detune (Voice) ............................................................................. 74 Device No (Device Number) ....................................................... 93 Device Number ............................................................................ 93 [DOWN] button ............................................................................. 8 [DRUM] button .............................................................................. 9 Drum Common Edit and Drum Key Edit .................................... 84 Drum Common General ............................................................... 85 Drum Key Amplitude ................................................................... 85 Drum Key Effect .......................................................................... 85 Drum Key Filter ........................................................................... 85 Drum Key Oscillator/Mix ............................................................ 85 Drum Key Pitch ........................................................................... 85 Drum Voice (Basics) .................................................................... 26 Drum Voices (Reference) ............................................................ 84 A About EG Rate and Time (Voice Mode) ......................................52 About MIDI ..................................................................................95 About the Modes ..........................................................................19 About the Tone Generator ............................................................18 Absolute ........................................................................................32 AC1 (Assignable Controller 1) .....................................................66 AC1 (Foot Controller) ..................................................................45 AC1 AMod (AC1 Amplitude Modulation Depth) .................66, 72 AC1 Amplitude Modulation Depth ........................................66, 72 AC1 CC No (AC1 Control Change Number) (Multi) ..................66 AC1 CC No (AC1 Control Change Number) (Voice) .................92 AC1 Control Change Number (Multi) ..........................................66 AC1 Control Change Number (Voice) .........................................92 AC1 Filter Control ..................................................................66, 72 AC1 Filter Modulation Depth ................................................66, 72 AC1 FMod (AC1 Filter Modulation Depth) ..........................66, 72 AC1 VarCtl (AC1 Variation Effect Control Depth) .....................72 AC1 Variation Effect Control Depth ......................................59, 72 AC1FltCtl (AC1 Filter Control) .............................................66, 72 AC1VarCtl (AC1 Variation Effect Control Depth) ......................59 AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator) (Basics) ..........................51 AEG Attack Rate ..........................................................................80 AEG Attack Velocity Sensitivity .................................................81 AEG Decay 1 Level ......................................................................80 AEG Decay 1 Rate .......................................................................80 AEG Decay 2 Rate .......................................................................80 AEG Initial Level .........................................................................80 AEG Level Scale Flag ..................................................................81 AEG Level Velocity Sensitivity ...................................................81 AEG Release Rate ........................................................................80 AEG Scale Sensitivity ..................................................................81 AEG Sustain Level .......................................................................80 AEGAtkR (AEG Attack Rate) .....................................................80 AEGAtkVel (AEG Attack Velocity Sensitivity) ..........................81 AEGDcy1L (AEG Decay 1 Level) ...............................................80 AEGDcy1R (AEG Decay 1 Rate) ................................................80 AEGDcy2R (AEG Decay 2 Rate) ................................................80 AEGInitL (AEG Initial Level) .....................................................80 AEGLvlVel (AEG Level Velocity Sensitivity) ............................81 AEGRelR (AEG Release Rate) ....................................................80 AEGSclSens (AEG Scale Sensitivity) ..........................................81 AEGSusL (AEG Sustain Level) ...................................................80 Alt.Group (Alternate Group) ........................................................85 Alternate Group ............................................................................85 AMP (Amplitude) (Basics) ...........................................................51 Amplitude (Basics) .......................................................................51 Amplitude Envelope Generator (Basics) ......................................51 Amplitude Envelope Generator Settings ......................................80 Amplitude Scaling Settings ..........................................................82 Assignable Controller 1 ................................................................66 Attack Time ..................................................................................63 Attack Tm (Attack Time) .............................................................63 AWM2 ..........................................................................................18 B Before Use ....................................................................................11 Binary ...........................................................................................95 BlkDmp (Bulk Dump) (Multi Job) ...............................................68 BlkDmp (Bulk Dump) (Voice Job) ..............................................88 Bulk Dump (Multi Job) ................................................................68 Bulk Dump (Voice Job) ................................................................88 Bulk Dump Send (Saving S03 Settings to an External Device) ...42 106 E E Indicator (Multi Mode) ............................................................. 55 E Indicator (Voice Mode) ............................................................ 70 Echo ............................................................................................. 93 Edit Modes (Selecting a Mode) ................................................... 28 Effect ............................................................................................ 92 EFFECT (Common Effect) (Basics) ............................................ 49 Effect Bypass (Voice Effect Bypass) ........................................... 92 Effects (Basics) ............................................................................ 53 Effects in Multi Mode .................................................................. 54 Effects in Voice Mode ................................................................. 54 EG (Envelope Generator) ............................................................. 52 EG Attack (EG Attack Rate) ........................................................ 86 EG Attack Rate ............................................................................ 86 EG Decay1 (EG Decay1 Rate) ..................................................... 86 EG Decay1 Rate ........................................................................... 86 EG Decay2 (EG Decay2 Rate) ..................................................... 86 EG Decay2 Rate ........................................................................... 86 Element Amplitude ...................................................................... 73 [ELEMENT] button ....................................................................... 8 Element Filter ............................................................................... 73 Element LFO ................................................................................ 73 Element Oscillator/Mixer ............................................................. 73 Element Pitch ............................................................................... 73 Element Sw (Element Switch) ..................................................... 73 Element Switch ............................................................................ 73 [ENTER] button (Basic Operations) ............................................ 32 [ENTER/KEYBOARD] button (The Controls & Connectors) ...... 9 Entering Data ............................................................................... 31 [EXIT] button ............................................................................... 31 [EXIT] button (The Controls & Connectors) ................................. 9 F Factory Set ................................................................................... 92 FCTxCtlNo (Foot Controller Transmit Control Number) ........... 91 FEG (Filter Envelope Generator) (Basics) ................................... 51 FEG Attack Level ........................................................................ 79 FEG Attack Rate .......................................................................... 79 FEG Attack Velocity .................................................................... 80 FEG Decay 1 Level ...................................................................... 79 FEG Decay 1 Rate ........................................................................ 79 FEG Decay 2 Rate ........................................................................ 79 FEG Hold Rate ............................................................................. 79 FEG Initial Level ......................................................................... 79 FEG Other Velocity ..................................................................... 80 FEG Release Level ....................................................................... 79 FEG Release Rate ........................................................................ 79 FEG Scale Sensitivity .................................................................. 79 FEG Sustain Level ....................................................................... 79 FEGAtkL (FEG Attack Level) ..................................................... 79 FEGAtkR (FEG Attack Rate) ...................................................... 79 FEGAtkVel (FEG Attack Velocity) .............................................80 FEGDcy1L (FEG Decay 1 Level) ................................................79 FEGDcy1R (FEG Decay 1 Rate) ..................................................79 FEGDcy2R (FEG Decay 2 Rate) ..................................................79 FEGHoldR (FEG Hold Rate) .......................................................79 FEGInitL (FEG Initial Level) .......................................................79 FEGOthVel (FEG Other Velocity) ...............................................80 FEGRelL (FEG Release Level) ....................................................79 FEGRelR (FEG Release Rate) .....................................................79 FEGSclSens (FEG Scale Sensitivity) ...........................................79 FEGSusL (FEG Sustain Level) ....................................................79 FILTER (Basics) ..........................................................................51 Filter Envelope Generator (Basics) ..............................................51 Filter Envelope Generator Settings ...............................................79 Filter Scale Break Point 1~4 .........................................................78 Filter Scale Flag ............................................................................77 Filter Scale Offset 1~4 ..................................................................78 Filter Scale Sensitivity ..................................................................78 Filter Scale Velocity Sensitivity ...................................................78 Filter Scaling Settings ...................................................................78 Fixed Vel (Fixed Velocity) ...........................................................90 Fixed Velocity ..............................................................................90 Flt BP1~4 (Filter Scale Break Point 1~4) .....................................78 Flt Ofs1~4 (Filter Scale Offset 1~4) .............................................78 FltSclFlag (Filter Scale Flag) .......................................................77 FltSclSns (Filter Scale Sensitivity) ...............................................78 FltSclVel (Filter Scale Velocity Sensitivity) ................................78 Foot Controller (Using Controllers) .............................................45 FOOT CONTROLLER jack .........................................................10 Foot Controller Transmit Control Number ...................................91 Foot Switch (Using Controllers) ..................................................46 FOOT SWITCH jack ....................................................................10 Footswitch Transmit Control Number ..........................................91 Front Panel ......................................................................................8 FSTxCtlNo (Footswitch Transmit Control Number) ...................91 Function Tree chart .......................................................................20 G GENERAL (Common General) (Basics) .....................................49 GM System Level 1 ........................................................................4 [GM/XG/(OTHER)] button ............................................................9 H H (Hexadecimal) ...........................................................................95 HOST SELECT switch .................................................................10 I [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons (Basic Operations) ...............31 [INC/YES] button (The Controls & Connectors) ...........................9 Init (Initialize) (Multi) ..................................................................68 Init (Initialize) (Voice) ..................................................................88 Initialize (Multi) ...........................................................................68 Initialize (Voice) ...........................................................................88 Insertion Effects ............................................................................53 J Job (Multi) ....................................................................................67 Job (Utility) ..................................................................................92 Job (Voice) ...................................................................................87 Job Modes (Selecting a Mode) .....................................................29 K Kbd Trans (Keyboard Transpose) ................................................90 Key Assign ...................................................................................85 [KEY] button ..................................................................................8 Key On/Key Off ...........................................................................96 Keyboard ......................................................................................90 [KEYBOARD] button (The Controls & Connectors) ....................9 Keyboard Transpose .....................................................................90 KeyonDelay ..................................................................................82 L N Layering Two Voices (Parts) Together ........................................42 LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) ........................................................8 Level (Drum Voices) ....................................................................85 Level (EG) ....................................................................................52 Level (Normal Voice) ..................................................................73 Level Break Point 1~4 ..................................................................81 Level Offset 1~4 ...........................................................................82 Level Scale Sensitivity .................................................................82 LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) (Basics) ...................................52 LFO AMod (LFO Amplitude Modulation) ..................................83 LFO Amplitude Modulation .........................................................83 LFO Filter Modulation .................................................................83 LFO FMod (LFO Filter Modulation) ...........................................83 LFO Phase (LFO Phase Initialize) ...............................................82 LFO Phase Initialize .....................................................................82 LFO Pitch Modulation .................................................................83 LFO PMod (LFO Pitch Modulation) ...........................................83 LFO Speed ....................................................................................83 LFO Wave ....................................................................................82 Local On/Off — When Connected to a Computer .......................93 Local On/Off Switch ....................................................................93 Local Sw (Local On/Off Switch) .................................................93 Low Frequency Oscillator (Basics) ..............................................52 Lvl BP1~4 (Level Break Point 1~4) ............................................81 Lvl Ofs1~4 (Level Offset 1~4) ....................................................82 LvlSclFlag (AEG Level Scale Flag) ............................................81 LvlSclSens (Level Scale Sensitivity) ...........................................82 Name (Drum Voice) ..................................................................... 85 Name (Multi) ................................................................................ 56 Name (Normal Voice) .................................................................. 71 Normal Voice (Basics) ................................................................. 26 Normal Voice (Reference) ........................................................... 70 Note Limit High (Multi) .............................................................. 60 Note Limit High (Voice) .............................................................. 73 Note Limit Low (Multi) ............................................................... 60 Note Limit Low (Voice) .............................................................. 73 Note Limit Low/High (Basics) .................................................... 50 Note On/Note Off ......................................................................... 96 NoteShift ................................................................................ 61, 74 NtLmt-H (Note Limit High) (Multi) ............................................ 60 NtLmt-H (Note Limit High) (Voice) ........................................... 73 NtLmt-L (Note Limit Low) (Multi) ............................................. 60 NtLmt-L (Note Limit Low) (Voice) ............................................ 73 NtLmt-L/H (Note Limit Low/High) (Basics) .............................. 50 Numeric keypad (Basic Operations) ............................................ 32 Numeric keypad (The Controls & Connectors) ............................. 9 M Master Tune ..................................................................................90 masters ..........................................................................................15 Maximum Polyphony ...................................................................18 MIDI .............................................................................................95 MIDI “Echo” ................................................................................93 MIDI Channel (MIDI Mode) .......................................................93 MIDI channels (About MIDI) ......................................................95 MIDI Filter ...................................................................................93 MIDI IN/OUT/THRU terminals ..................................................10 MIDI Mode (About the Modes) ...................................................19 MIDI Mode (Reference) ...............................................................93 MIDI Mode (Selecting a Mode) ...................................................29 MIDI OUT terminal .....................................................................10 MIDI Receive Channel (Multi) ....................................................61 MIDI Receive Channel (Voice) ...................................................94 MIDI THRU terminal ...................................................................10 MIDI Transmit Channel ...............................................................94 MODE buttons ...............................................................................8 MODULATION wheel (The Controls & Connectors) ..................8 Modulation Wheel (Using Controllers) ........................................44 Mono/Poly (Multi) .......................................................................61 Mono/Poly (Voice) .......................................................................71 Moving the Cursor Position .........................................................32 Multi Edit (Reference) .................................................................55 Multi Edit Mode (About the Modes) ............................................19 Multi Edit Mode (Selecting a Mode) ...........................................28 Multi Job ......................................................................................67 Multi Job Mode (About the Modes) .............................................19 Multi Job Mode (Selecting a Mode) ............................................29 Multi Mode (About the Modes) ...................................................19 Multi Mode (Reference) ...............................................................55 Multi Play Mode (About the Modes) ...........................................19 Multi Play Mode (Selecting a Mode) ...........................................28 Multi Store ....................................................................................69 Multis ...........................................................................................24 [MUTE] button ...............................................................................8 MW AMod (MW Amplitude Modulation Depth) ..................65, 72 MW Amplitude Modulation Depth ........................................65, 72 MW Filter Control ..................................................................65, 72 MW Filter Modulation Depth ................................................65, 72 MW FltCtl (MW Filter Control) ............................................65, 72 MW FMod (MW Filter Modulation Depth) ...........................65, 72 MW Pitch Modulation Depth .................................................65, 72 MW PMod (MW Pitch Modulation Depth) ...........................65, 72 MW Transmit Control Number ....................................................91 MW VarCtl (MW Variation Effect Control Depth) ...............58, 72 MW Variation Effect Control Depth ......................................58, 72 MWTxCtlNo (MW Transmit Control Number) ...........................91 O OCTAVE [DOWN] ....................................................................... 8 OCTAVE [UP] and [DOWN] buttons ........................................... 8 offset ............................................................................................. 32 OrgKt (Original Kit) .................................................................... 85 Original Kit .................................................................................. 85 OSC/MIX (Oscillator/Mix) (Basics) ............................................ 49 Oscillator/Mix (Basics) ................................................................ 49 Other Modes (Selecting a Mode) ................................................. 29 OUTPUT L/MONO and R jack ................................................... 10 Overview of the S03 .................................................................... 17 Overview of Voices/Waves ......................................................... 26 P Package Contents ........................................................................... 4 Pan (Drum Voice) ........................................................................ 85 Pan (Multi) ................................................................................... 60 Pan (Normal Voice) ..................................................................... 73 Parameter Table ........................................................................... 22 Parameter Type List ....................................................................... 8 Part ............................................................................................... 59 Part Controller .............................................................................. 59 Part Effect .................................................................................... 59 Part General .................................................................................. 59 Part Mix ........................................................................................ 59 Part Mode ..................................................................................... 61 Part Tone ...................................................................................... 59 [PART/ELEMENT/KEY] buttons ................................................. 8 PB Range (Pitch Bend Range) ............................................... 65, 72 PchSclCN (Pitch Scale Center Note) ........................................... 74 PchSclSns (Pitch Scale Sensitivity) ............................................. 74 PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator) (Basics) ................................... 50 PEG Attack Level ........................................................................ 75 PEG Attack Rate .......................................................................... 75 PEG Attack Time ......................................................................... 64 PEG Decay 1 Level ...................................................................... 75 PEG Decay 1 Rate ........................................................................ 75 PEG Decay 2 Rate ........................................................................ 75 PEG Initial Level (Multi) ............................................................. 64 PEG Initial Level (Voice) ............................................................ 75 PEG Level Velocity ..................................................................... 76 PEG Rate Velocity ....................................................................... 76 PEG Release Level (Multi) .......................................................... 64 PEG Release Level (Voice) ......................................................... 75 PEG Release Rate ........................................................................ 75 PEG Release Time ....................................................................... 64 PEG Scale Center Note ................................................................ 76 PEG Scale Sensitivity .................................................................. 76 PEG Sustain Level ....................................................................... 75 PEGAtkL (PEG Attack Level) ..................................................... 75 PEGAtkR (PEG Attack Rate) ...................................................... 75 PEGAtkTm (PEG Attack Time) .................................................. 64 PEGDcy1L (PEG Decay 1 Level) ............................................... 75 PEGDcy1R (PEG Decay 1 Rate) ................................................. 75 PEGDcy2R (PEG Decay 2 Rate) ................................................. 75 PEGInitL (PEG Initial Level) ...................................................... 75 PEGIntL (PEG Initial Level) ....................................................... 64 PEGLvlVel (PEG Level Velocity) ............................................... 76 PEGRelL (PEG Release Level) (Multi) ....................................... 64 PEGRelL (PEG Release Level) (Voice) ...................................... 75 PEGRelR (PEG Release Rate) ..................................................... 75 PEGRelTm (PEG Release Time) ................................................. 64 PEGRtVel (PEG Rate Velocity) .................................................. 76 PEGSclCN (PEG Scale Center Note) .......................................... 76 PEGSclSns (PEG Scale Sensitivity) ............................................ 76 PEGSusL (PEG Sustain Level) .................................................... 75 107 Performing Live While Playing Back a Song File .......................40 PHONES jack ...............................................................................10 PITCH (Basics) ............................................................................50 Pitch Bend Range ...................................................................65, 72 PITCH bend wheel (The Controls & Connectors) .........................8 Pitch Bend Wheel (Using Controllers) .........................................44 Pitch Coarse ..................................................................................86 Pitch Envelope Generator (Basics) ...............................................50 Pitch Envelope Generator Settings ...............................................75 Pitch LFO Delay ...........................................................................83 Pitch LFO Fade Time ...................................................................83 Pitch Scale Center Note ................................................................74 Pitch Scale Sensitivity ..................................................................74 PitchCors (Pitch Coarse) ..............................................................86 PitchFine .......................................................................................86 Play Modes (Selecting a Mode) ....................................................28 Playing in Multi Mode ..................................................................37 Playing the S03 .............................................................................33 Playing the Voices ........................................................................33 PLFO Fade (Pitch LFO Fade Time) .............................................83 PLFODelay (Pitch LFO Delay) ....................................................83 Porta Sw (Portamento Switch) ...............................................65, 72 Portamento Switch ..................................................................65, 72 Portamento Time ....................................................................65, 72 PortaTime (Portamento Time) ................................................65, 72 Power Supply ................................................................................11 Powering Up .................................................................................15 Power-on Procedure .....................................................................15 [PRESET/(DRUM/PERC)] button .................................................9 Program Change ...........................................................................98 R Rcv Ch (MIDI Receive Channel) .................................................61 Rcv Ch (Voice Mode MIDI Receive Channel) ............................94 Rear Panel .....................................................................................10 Receive Bank Select On/Off .........................................................94 Receive Note Off ..........................................................................86 Receive Note On ...........................................................................86 Receive Program Change On/Off .................................................94 Relative .........................................................................................32 Releas Tm (Release Time) ...........................................................63 Release Time ................................................................................63 Resonance (Drum Voice) .............................................................86 Resonance (Multi) ........................................................................63 Resonance (Normal Voice) ..........................................................77 Resonance Velocity Sensitivity ....................................................77 ResoVel (Resonance Velocity Sensitivity) ...................................77 Rev Return (Reverb Return) .........................................................56 RevEF (Reverb Effect Type) ........................................................56 Reverb Effect Type .......................................................................56 Reverb Pan ....................................................................................57 Reverb Parameters ........................................................................56 Reverb Return ...............................................................................56 Reverb Section ..............................................................................53 ReverbSend (Drum Voice) ...........................................................87 ReverbSend (Multi) ......................................................................66 ReverbSend (Normal Voice) ........................................................72 RxBankSel (Receive Bank Select On/Off) ...................................94 RxNote On (Receive Note On) .....................................................86 RxNoteOff (Receive Note Off) ....................................................86 RxPgmChng (Receive Program Change On/Off) ........................94 108 S V S&H ..............................................................................................83 Saving S03 Settings to an External Device ..................................42 saw ................................................................................................83 Selecting a Mode ..........................................................................28 Selecting a Screen ........................................................................30 Selecting XG Banks .....................................................................35 Send Chorus to Reverb (Multi) ....................................................57 Send Chorus to Reverb (Voice) ...................................................72 Send Variation to Chorus .............................................................58 Send Variation to Reverb .............................................................58 Setting the Voice Name ................................................................71 slaves ............................................................................................15 SndChofiRev (Send Chorus to Reverb) (Multi) .........................57 SndChofiRev (Send Chorus to Reverb) (Voice) .........................72 SndVarfiCho (Send Variation to Chorus) ...................................58 SndVarfiRev (Send Variation to Reverb) ...................................58 Splitting the Keyboard .................................................................41 STANDBY/ON switch .................................................................10 Store (Multi) .................................................................................69 Store (Voice) ................................................................................89 Store Mode ...................................................................................19 Store Mode (Selecting a Mode) ...................................................29 sustain (AEG Release Rate) .........................................................80 sustain (Foot Switch) ....................................................................46 Switching Between Screens and Entering Settings ......................48 Switching Elements On/Off (Mute) .............................................48 Switching Parts On/Off ................................................................55 System and Insertion Effects ........................................................53 System Effects ..............................................................................53 System Exclusive Messages .........................................................99 V EfBypass (Voice Effect Bypass) .............................................. 92 Var Pan (Variation Pan) ............................................................... 58 Var Return (Variation Return) ..................................................... 58 Var Send (Variation Send) ........................................................... 67 VarConnect (Variation Connection) ............................................ 58 VarEF (Variation Effect Type) .............................................. 57, 72 Variation Connection ................................................................... 58 Variation Effect Type ............................................................. 57, 72 Variation Effects .......................................................................... 53 Variation Pan ................................................................................ 58 Variation Parameters .............................................................. 57, 72 Variation Return ........................................................................... 58 Variation Send .............................................................................. 67 Vel Curve (Velocity Curve) ......................................................... 90 VelLmt-H (Velocity Limit High) (Multi) .................................... 60 VelLmt-H (Velocity Limit High) (Voice) ................................... 74 VelLmt-L (Velocity Limit Low) (Multi) ..................................... 60 VelLmt-L (Velocity Limit Low) (Voice) ..................................... 74 VelLmt-L/H (Velocity Limit Low/High) (Basics) ....................... 50 Velocity Curve ............................................................................. 90 Velocity Limit High (Multi) ........................................................ 60 Velocity Limit High (Voice) ........................................................ 74 Velocity Limit Low (Multi) ......................................................... 60 Velocity Limit Low (Voice) ........................................................ 74 Velocity Limit Low/High (Basics) .............................................. 50 Velocity Sensitivity Depth ..................................................... 62, 72 Velocity Sensitivity Offset ..................................................... 62, 72 VelSnsDpt (Velocity Sensitivity Depth) ................................ 62, 72 VelSnsOfs (Velocity Sensitivity Offset) ................................ 62, 72 Vib Delay (Vibrato Delay) ........................................................... 64 Vib Depth (Vibrato Depth) .......................................................... 64 Vib Rate (Vibrato Rate) ............................................................... 64 Vibrato Delay ............................................................................... 64 Vibrato Depth ............................................................................... 64 Vibrato Rate ................................................................................. 64 Voice (Basics) .............................................................................. 25 Voice (Reference) ........................................................................ 70 Voice Edit (Basics) ...................................................................... 47 Voice Edit (Reference) ................................................................. 70 Voice Edit Mode (About the Modes) ........................................... 19 Voice Edit Mode (Selecting a Mode) .......................................... 29 Voice Effect Bypass ..................................................................... 92 Voice Job ...................................................................................... 87 Voice Job Mode (About the Modes) ............................................ 19 Voice Job Mode (Selecting a Mode) ............................................ 29 Voice Mode (About the Modes) .................................................. 19 Voice Mode (Reference) .............................................................. 70 Voice Mode MIDI Receive Channel ........................................... 94 Voice Play Mode (About the Modes) .......................................... 19 Voice Play Mode (Selecting a Mode) .......................................... 28 Voice Selection ............................................................................ 59 Voice Store ................................................................................... 89 Voices ........................................................................................... 25 Volume ......................................................................................... 60 [VOLUME] slider .......................................................................... 8 T Thru Port ......................................................................................94 To call up the GM/XG Drum memory .........................................34 To call up the User Drum memory (USDR1/USDR2) ................34 To call up the XG SFX Kit memory ............................................34 TO HOST terminal .......................................................................10 Tone Generator (Overview of the S03) ........................................17 Tone Generator (Utility) ...............................................................90 Total Level ...................................................................................71 Total Lvl (Total Level) .................................................................71 Total Vol (Total Volume) (Multi) ................................................56 Total Vol (Total Volume) (Normal Voice) ..................................71 Total Volume (Multi) ...................................................................56 Total Volume (Normal Voice) .....................................................71 Trans Ch (MIDI Transmit Channel) .............................................94 Transmit Bank Select On/Off .......................................................94 Transmit Program Change On/Off ...............................................94 Transpose .....................................................................................56 Transposing the Octave ................................................................36 tri ..................................................................................................83 TxBankSel (Transmit Bank Select On/Off) .................................94 TxPgmChng (Transmit Program Change On/Off) .......................94 Types of Parameters (Absolute and Relative) ..............................32 U [UP] button .....................................................................................8 USB ..............................................................................................14 [USER/(SE)] button .......................................................................9 Using Controllers .........................................................................44 Using Multi Mode ........................................................................37 Using the Foot Controller to Control Parameters .........................45 Using the Foot Switch to Advance Through Programs ................46 Using the S03 as a Multitimbral Tone Generator ........................38 Using Voice Category Search ......................................................35 Utility Job .....................................................................................92 Utility Mode (About the Modes) ..................................................19 Utility Mode (Reference) .............................................................90 Utility Mode (Selecting a Mode) .................................................29 W Wave Selection ............................................................................ 73 Waves ........................................................................................... 27 X XG .................................................................................................. 4 MEMO For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below. Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. Av. Reboucas 2636-Pinheiros CEP: 05402-400 Sao Paulo-SP. Brasil Tel: 011-3085-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY/SWITZERLAND Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Central Europe, Branch Nederland Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. ASIA FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Combo Division Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong, Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3770-0660 Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 THAILAND OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Belgium Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels, Belgium Tel: 02-726 6032 HEAD OFFICE SY34 Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 KOREA SWEDEN BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG HONG KONG PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971-4-881-5868 Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West), Jingan, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 INDONESIA GREECE OTHER COUNTRIES THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2445 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B) NEDERLAND / THE NETHERLANDS ADVARSEL! • Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up. • This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up. • Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service Afdeiing: Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel. 030-2828425 • For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the end of the service life please consult your retailer or Yamaha Service Center as follows: Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center Address : Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel : 030-2828425 • Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA. • Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small chemical waste. Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren. (lithium disposal) VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. VAROITUS Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti. (lithium caution) OWNER’S MANUAL Yamaha Web Site (English only) http://www.yamahasynth.com Yamaha Manual Library http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2001 Yamaha Corporation This document is printed on chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink. V654540 404MWCP2.3-03C0 Printed in Japan